Alfa Laval Lopx 710

r-
o"tJ
><
......
....o
en
(1)
"'C
...
Q)
a
_0
o
~
en
<tn
p+.
(1)
3
,.
Berlioz
053 •
I
I
System Manual
LOPX 710
Separation System
~======r======;::'1
t:J" /
@
,
/ \
"------'l\@
'
~
,
, /
\ ,
'\ r--><l---,
,
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
I English I
LOPX 710 Separation System
1 Safety
:. 2 System Description
• 3
4
Operating Instructions
Parameter List
5 Alarms and Fault' Finding
6 System Reference
7 Installation Instructions
'. 8 Separator Manual

Spare Parts Catalogue
(incl. fault finding)
-- 9 Component Descriptions (incl. fault finding)
10 Optional Equipment
Alfa Laval Marine & Power

Printed Dec 1996 Product No. 1765143-02
Book No. 1817176-02
•
Alfa Laval reserve the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
•
Any comments regarding possible errors and omissions or
suggestions for improvement of this publication would be
gratefully appreciated.
Copies of this publication can be ordered from your local Alfa
Laval company.
Published by: Alia Laval Separation AB
Marine & Power Oil Treatment Division
S-147 80 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alfa Laval Separation AB 1996.
,
Study instruction manuals and observe the

warnings before installation, operation,
service and maintenance.
Not following the instructions can result in

serious accidents with fatal injuries.
• In order to make the information clear only foreseeable conditions have

been considered. No warnings are given, therefore, for situations
arising from unintended usage of the machine and its tools.
•
. ,
~~
AlfaLavaI
• Separation System
Safety
•
•
I
Printed
Book No.
INov 1998
1810158-02 V4

•
•
•
Alfa Laval reserve the right to make changes at any time without •
prior notice.
Copies of this publication can be ordered from your local
Alfa Laval company.
Published by: Alfa Laval Marine & Power AB
S - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alfa Laval Marine & Power AB 1998.
Contents
1 Safety Instructions 1
1.1 Warning Signs 1
1.2 Specific Factors 3
•
•
•
•
1810158-02
1 Safety Instructions
1.1 Warning Signs

Pay attention to the safety instructions in this
manual. Below are definitions of the three
grades of warning signs used when there is a
• risk to personnel.
~ J
.. . .
/•
. DANGER
•
..
- -'
Ty~e of haz~r(f
Thistypeof.safetyinstruction
indicates a situation which, ifnot
avoid~d;couldresultin fatal injury,
or fatal c\all1ageto health.
WARNING
~.••
. Type of hazard
• Thi stype of safety instruction

indicates a situation which, ifl10t
•
avoided,could result in disabling
injury, or disabling damage to health.
CAUTION
Type of hazard
This. type of safety instruction

indicates a situation which, if not·
avoided, could result inIightil1jury,
or light damage to health.
1810158-02 1
1 Safety Instructions Safety
----------------------------'--
The warning sign used when there is a risk to

equipment.
NOTE
This type of safety instruction

indicates a situation which, if not
avoided, could result in damage to
equipment.
The warning sign is also used when there is a

need to stress important information.
•
NOTE
This sign is used to stress important

•
information, e.g. how to read this
system manual.
•
•
2 1810158-02
Safety 1 Safety Instructions
1.2 Specific Factors

The centrifugal separator includes parts that
rotate at high speed, generate high centrifugal
forces, and take a long time to stop rotating.
Materials are carefully chosen and parts are

designed with extremely fine manufacturing
tolerances. Rotating parts are carefully bal-
anced to reduce vibration and wear and tear
•
and to withstand stress and fatigue.
The separation system is designed and

supplied for a specific function (type of liquid,
rotational speed, temperature, density, etc.)
• and must be used for this function only, and

strictly within Alfa Laval's specifications.
Incorrect operation or maintenance is likely to

result in an imbalance due to build up of
sediment, reduction of material strength, etc.
that could lead to serious injury or damage.
These compulsory safety instructions apply:

• Use the separator only for the purpose and
parameter range specified by Alfa Lava!.
• Strictly follow the instructions for
• •
installation, operation and maintenance.
Ensure that personnel are fully trained and
competent in operation, maintenance and
• •
emergency procedures.
Use only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts
and the special tools supplied.
NOTE
If safety instructions and installation

instructions in this manual are not
strictly followed, Alfa Laval can not
be held responsible for any
malfunction or injuries resulting.
1810158-02 3
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard
Using the separation~ystem,6litsid~

',limits specified by Alfa Laval could
cause breakdown.
If power cables have been altered,

always check the rotatio~ directionOir
Hz
11
..
'pm
•
•
the separator rotates in reverse vital
rotating parts could unscrew.
'Excessive vibration may ,cause

breakdown.
Do not enter the room after an

emergency stop while the separator is
still rotating.
•
Do not start the separator after an l-- ~=....,!!!=!!!"=~ ~I
emergency stop without first
remedying the cause of the
emergency.
" After an emergency stop the

separator bowl must be manually
•
, cleaned before starting up again;
IftheA7- IQ CFOPX)alarm is riot

remedied there is a risk for
breakdown.
•
If th~ A7~ iOj"cLoPx);{iannls not"
.Temedied there is a risk for
breakdown duet6 insufficient sludge
conditioning.
4 1810158-02
DANGER
./t>s. ·OiliiritegratiOn·
... hazard
. .
. IftheiI1terVal.tJetween sludge
discharges· istoo]ong, there is a risk
of heavy sidebh~akdown ...
• Operation instand-by mode fora

prolonged period of time may cause
heavyside breakdown. (FOPX)
• Fail~re to follow th~ above

instructioIls may l~.~d to heavy side
breakdown.
;
Iftheseparator ispm assembled and
connected properly it may lead to
. disintegration.
" . ", ' )., ." ,::.
Never discharge a vibrating sep.fratoE

Vibration will increase if only partof .
S9lidifi~d sludge is discharged: .
• Running a separator build for50 Hz

at higher frequency will result in
overspeed and may cause
disintegnttion.
1810158-02 5
Do riot be~in maintenance work .

\\\'hjJeth~ll1achine is stilI tot~tiJ1g.
Do not switch on without all covers.
•
and guards in place.
,Fire Hazard
•
.' Excess of maximum idling time may
cause fire, if a destillate with low'"
flashpoint is used.
•
•
6 1810158-02
. L1i
.
i .,
. ',"
. WARNING
h~zard
-:",
N()iSe
Excessive noisecanc3use damage to ..

hearing if no ear protection is used.
• . ..•... -_::-:,_:-:~,\::, -_c.:"::::

Neverresetal1.illann without first
finding an(Li~medying the cause.
'::' '," ," ,<: -:: . ,',. ,,'
• . Eachne\vbb~~irequires
• reconsideration.~f the discharge time
setting; . .
.,
Operatingwaterihoriage may result

in sludge~ischarge failure and cause
sludge accumulation and heavy
imbalance..
Experience has shown thatif

intervals between sludge discharges
are too. long, a compact and hard
• . sludge cake can accumulate. On

. discharge, this cake may break lip .
andlJ~discharged unevenl~cilusing
•
imbalance in the bowl. If imbalance
is excessive, there is risk for serious
mechanical damage and injury to
personnel.
1810158-02 7
~.... WARNING
. Disintegration
hazard
...,:.:.: ..,. .~ .
..F~ilur~i!qcle~llthes~p~tor bowI,
. includingoperatirlg: system,at
reqllir<idintervals or afteral~rms and
•
stop of bowl rriaycauseimbalance
with riskofinjury to personnel.
.~ntrap~en~<l1azard ..
Do not switch on without all cover
and guards in place.. •
•
•
8 1810158-02
Processpipes;hibricationoil and
~'" vari6us'Iriachine-;~urfacescan be'hot
arid caukebuITls..
. :".,.' - ::,'
. "
<SIiR hazard
• oil leakage maymakethe floor

slipperyand cause injuries.
6
• NOTE
Be sure to study all relevant

documentation supplied and become
familiar with the function and
operation of the system and each
particular unit.
If safety instructions, installation
• specifications and additional

installation information in this manual
are not strictly followed, Alfa Laval
•
can not be held responsible for any
1810158-02 9
b~
AlfaLavaI
• LOPX Separation System
• System Description
•
•
Printed Aug 1997
Book No. 1810234-02 V3
, Alfa laval Marine & Power

•
•
prior notice.
•
•
Alfa Laval company.
Published by: Alfa Laval Separation AB
Marine & Power Division
S -14780 Tumba
Sweden
Contents
1 Scope 1
2 System Overview 3
2.1 System Layout 4
• 2.2
3
3.1
Oil Flow
The ALCAP LOPX ProceSS7
The ALCAP Principle 7
6
• 3.2
3.3
3.4
Low Water Content
High water content
Displacement Water
Adjustments
8
10
12
3.4.1 Decreasing the Amount of
Displacement Water 12
3.4.2 Increasing the Amount of
Displacement Water 12
3.5 Definition of Terms 14
•
•
1810234-02
1 Scope
This system description is valid for the

following separation systems:
LOPX705
•
LOPX707
LOPX709
LOPX71O
• LOPX713
LOPX 714
The LOPX separation systems are designed

for cleaning of lubricating oil for diesel
engines in marine and power applications.
•
•
1810234-02 1
2 System Overview
In the LOPX process, heated lubricating oil is

fed through the separator to clean the oil from
solid particles and water.
An LOPX system comprises:
• • An LOPX separator.
• Ancillary equipment including a control
unit and a water transducer.
• • Optional equipment such as an oil feed
pump and an oil heating system.
The LOPX separator operates as a clarifier.

Cleaned oil leaves the separator through the
oil outlet while free water and separated
sludge accumulate at the periphery of the
separator bow I.
The control unit supervises the entire

operation of the separation system and
performs monitoring, control and alarm
• functions.
At normal conditions, characterized by low or

no water content and normal sludge content,
• sludge discharges are initiated by the control

unit at preset intervals. Sludge and water are
then discharged through sludge ports at the
periphery of the bowl.
Water is used in the separation process, and

specific amounts of processing water are
added at different times.
The control uni t adapts the process to changed

conditions such as changes in the water
content of the lu be oi I.
1810234-02 3
2 System Overview LOPX System Description
2.1 System Layout

The basic LOPX system layout is illustrated
by the following symbol diagram.
c
~ 14
11 11
•
8 10
3 12 .L-_~5
D~
9
•
U
A D
B
The LOPX system
The inlet and outlet arrows indicate the

following: •
•
A Unprocessed oil inlet C Water inlet
B Cleaned and recirculated oil outlet D Sludge outlet
Item Symbol Designation Function
Displacement pump Feeds unprocessed oil to the separator.

1 ()
Heater Heats un processed oil to separation temperature.
2
El
Temperature transmitter Measures the oil temperature.
3 @
4 1810234-02
LOPX System Description 2 System Overview
Pneumatically controlled Leads the unprocessed oil to the separator or back
~
change over valve to the tank (recirculation).
4
Separator Cleans the oil by removing water and solid

5
2S particles.
Water transducer Measures the changes of water content in the

6 @ separated oil.
• 7 @-
Flow indicator Displays the oil flow rate,
• 8
9
@
@
High pressure switch
Low pressure switch

Senses high pressure in the oil outlet.
Senses low pressu re in the oil outlet.
Pressure gauge Displays the pressure in the oil outlet.

10
® "
Manually controlled Regulates the clean oil back pressure.

11
~ regulating valve
.
.,
Non-return valve Stops reverse oil flow.
~
•
12
Solenoid valve block, water Distributes separator opening and closing water,
13
~ conditioning water, and displacement water.
• 14
11 11
Control unit Supervises the separator system.
1810234-02 5
2 System Overview LOPX System Description
2.2 Oil Flow

The unprocessed oil is fed through a strainer
by a positive displacement pump, operating at
constant flow.
After the heater the change over valve directs

the oi I to the separator. The separated oil
passes the manually operated back-pressure
regulating valve back to the lubricating oil
•
tank.
The oil can also be directed back to the oil

tank, bypassing the separator. This is the case
•
when the oil temperature is outside the preset
range, during separator start and stop
procedures, and during alarm conditions.
•
•
6 1810234-02
3 The ALCAP LOPX Process
The terms used in this process description are

explained in section "3.5 Definition of
Terms" on page 14.
• 3.1 The ALCAP Principle

During the separation process sludge and
water accumulate at the periphery of the
• separator bowl.
Normally, sludge and water are discharged at
preset time intervals.
Should the build up of separated water and

sludge increase, water may approach the disc
stack. In that case traces of water start to
escape with the cleaned oil. This small
increase of water content is immediately
detected by the water transducer, installed in
the oil outlet.
,
• The signal from the water transducer is

continuously transmitted to the control unit,
where a reference value is stored.
• The control unit continually compares the

transducer signal with the reference value.
Should a deviation from the reference value
occur, a sludge discharge is initiated to keep
the system at optimum separation efficiency.
1810234-02 7
3 The ALCAP LOPX Process LOPX System Description
3.2 Low Water Content

Nonnally the lube oil contains little or no
water. In this case sludge discharges will be
timer initiated.
I I
-.- 8- 11 - -
I I
I I
1
-1- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1
1
I
1-
I
I
I
- - 1- -
I
I •
A~,lL~1---L¥
I I ~;! I I
•
~'--_,(;..--"'-t-_ _+-
~ 1 ~ I
I~:; F 1 I~:; G I
F-r-"'-l-u""'",--.'..Ei""--+---t_ t
I C .1 I I
I I I
I 0 I E I
• I • I
I I
Transducersigna~normalcondmons
s
t
A
Transducer signal
Time
Trigger range
E
F
G
Displacement of oil
Addition of conditioning water
Addition of displacement water •
•
B Trigger value
C Reference time 1 Storing of reference value
D Preset time between discharge sequences 2 Sludge discharge
The water transducer signal reflects the
nonnal condition where the oil contains no
water. The preset time between sludge
discharges is set in the control unit as a timer
function.
8 1810234-02
LOPX System Description 3 The ALCAP LOPX Process
Process Cycle
I. Conditioning water is added to the
separator bowl. The conditioning water
softens the sludge in order to accomplish a
good discharge.
2. A new reference value is stored by the
control unit.
3. When the preset time between sludge
•
discharges has elapsed, displacement
water is added to the separator bow I. The
displacement water eliminates the risk of
oil loss at the following sludge discharge.
• Initially, water is continuously admitted.

4. After that, a number of short pulses add a
minor amount of water. The interface
between oil and water moves toward but
,""!:•.
never into the disc stack. This means that

there is no risk of water contaminated oil
.
leaving the separator. -
5. The sludge discharge is initiated after a
predetermined number of water pulses.
The actual number of pulses is calculated
by the control unit, and is adapted to
•
changing conditions.
6. After the sludge discharge a new process

cycle starts with the adding of
•
conditioning water. A new reference value
is then stored.
1810234-02 9
3.3 High water content

When the water content is high, the transducer
signal will reach the trigger value after the
minimum time between discharge sequences
but before the maximum time.
•
•
t
C 1 c ..
"I
1 0
~I--------~=--------------------.-
I
•
Process cycle. high water content
s Transducer signal o Preset time between discharge sequences

t Time F Addition of conditioning water
A
B
C
Trigger range
Trigger value
Reference time
Process Cycle
I
2
Storing of reference val ue
Sludge discharge •
I. After the sludge discharge a new cycle
starts with the adding of conditioning
water.
2. A new reference value is stored.
10 1810234-02
3. Separated water will fill out the sludge

space of the bowI before the preset time
between discharge sequences has elapsed.
4. Water escaping with the cleaned oil is
immediately detected by the water
transducer, and a sludge discharge is
initiated. No displacement water is added
in this case.
•
Alarm
Should five consecutive sludge discharges be

initiated by the transducer signal, the alarm for
•
high water content is activated.
This alarm indicates that a water leakage has

occurred somewhere in the lube oil system.
Resuming the Normal Process
When the water content in the lube oil is

reduced, the preset time will elapse without a
transducer initiated discharge.
The control unit then starts to add an

appropriate amount of displacement water.
The amount is adapted to the decreasing water
• content in the unprocessed oil.
After a few process cycles the system resumes

its normal operating mode.
1810234-02 11
3.4 Displacement Water

Adjustments
The ALCAP LOPX process is automatically
adjusting the amount of displacement water to
suit changing conditions, such as changed
water content in the oi I or scaling in the water
line.
•
3.4.1 Decreasing the Amount of
Displacement Water
If the water content of the unprocessed oil is
•
low, displacement water is added prior to the
sludge discharge.
Should a sludge discharge be initiated by the

transducer signal during addition of
displacement water, too much water has been
added. Less displacement water will then be
used at the next sludge discharge cycle.
3.4.2 Increasing the Amount of

Displacement Water
Every fourth sludge discharge the amount of
displacement water is checked to ensure that
an accurate amount of water is added.
A minor amount of extra water is then added

•
with the displacement water.
An increased transducer signal confirms that

the amount of displacement water was
sufficient.
•
. Should the transducer notrespond to the
additional water, the amount of displacement
water is increased at the next sludge discharge
cycle.
12 1810234-02
Alarm
If the amount of displacement water is
increased two times with no transducer
response, the A7-11 alarm is activated.
This alarm indicates that the displacement

water supply is insufficient and must be
checked.
•
'
1"
"
DANGER
~ [)isir'ltegratiOn hazard
• ,
•
•
1810234-02 13
3.5 Definition of Terms

Transducer signal The analog signal from the water transducer.
The transducer signal is monitored by the
control unit to detect minor changes of water
content in the outlet oil from the separator.
Reference value The lowest achievable transducer value for the
oil that is being processed.
The reference value is determined during the
•
reference time interval. The value is stored in
the control unit.
The reference values differ for different lube
oils.
Reference time interval
(Parameter value)
Trigger range
The time period after each sludge discharge,
after which the actual transducer signal is
stored as a reference value.
The allowed deviation of the water transducer
•
(Parameter value) signal, compared with the reference value.
The trigger range lower limit is the reference
value, and the range is normally set to 0.2% of
the reference value.
Trigger value Trigger range upper limit. When the transducer
signal reaches the trigger value, water must be
discharged from the separator.
Preset time between sludge discharge
sequences
(Parameter value)
When this time has elapsed, a sludge discharge
is initiated.
•
•
Conditioning water Water, added to the separator bowl to soften the
sludge.
Displacement water Water, added to the separator bowl to displace
the oil and ensure there is no loss of oil at
sludge discharge.
14 1810234-02
b~
AlfaLavaI
• Operating Instructions
•
'.
Printed Nov 1998
Book No. 1810020-02 V4

.' ,
•
•
Alia Laval reserve the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
Alia Laval company.
Published by: Alia Laval Marine & Power AB
S - 147 BD Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alia Laval Marine & Power AB 199B.
•
• Study instruction manuals and observe the


arising from uninte nded usage of the machine and its tools.
• A summary of the safety information is found in the Safety chapter

under divider 1.
Contents
1 Scope 1
2 Operating 3
2.1 Start up Check List 3
•
2.2 Start up 5
2.3 Interv als Between Sludge

Discharges 7
Background 7
•
2.3.1
2.3.2 Lubricating oil cleani ng 8
2.3.3 Bowl inspection 10
2.4 Intervals Between Bowl

Cleaning 11
2.5 Operating Check List 13
2.6 Stop 17
2.7 Emergency Stop 19
2.8 After Emergency Stop 19
•
•
181002 0-02
1 Scope
These operating instructions are valid for the

LOPX 705
•
LOPX 707
LOPX 709
LOPX 710
• LOPX 713
LOPX 714
The LOPX separation system is designed for
cleaning of lubrication oil for marine and
power diesel engines.
•
•
1
181002 0-02
2 Operating
2.1 Start up Check List

Separator
1. Check that the separator is assembled and
• connected correctly.
.................. DANGER.· . .
~
1~
~ •.,..
__ _._
...:.......
. '.
......... ..........
...........:~
~
Y'-
._;:,~-- ~
.. ~
•
.. .
. Disl~tegration.
.
. hazard
.If the separator is not assembled and

conne cted properly it may lead to
disintegration;..•.•.••.. .
. ..... .... ......
...
2<!l> ....__._ ... _-~-~~~~
'- --,- ----'0
2. Check the oil sump level: it should be no
more than half way up the sight glass.
•
NOTE
Too much or too little oil can damage

the separator bearings.
• 3. Release the brake.
Starter
4. Powe ron.
3
1810020-02
2 Operating LOPX Operating Instructions
Control Unit
~
5. Check that the mode selector switch points
to L (local). mm
- , .. ....
L~
6. Power on.
~
cm
•
The display reads "OFF".
ITi~ ;
m
7. Close the door.

- ~ . u
8. Check the direction of rotation of the bowl

by doing a quick start/stop. The revolution
counter must rotate clockwise.
IOJMEJI
•
DANGER
DI~integration
.hazard
. Ifpowereables have bee~altered

always check the rotation direction.
If the separato~ rotates in reverse vital .
.rotaWlg parts .~o~d u~c:rew. ................••.... •
Air Valve Block
9. Check that there is correct air supply by
•
reading the pressure gauge situated on the
valve block; see "System Reference". t?t---+
Plant set value:
<
mm. .................... max.
L- ~=~ ____I; I
4 1810020-02
2 Operating
LOPX Operating Instructions
2.2 Start up
1. Start the oil feed pump from the pump
starter.
~-------==---------'
I
2. Switch the heate r on from the control unit.
• If the heater is not connected to the control

unit it must be switched on independently.
3. Start the separator from the starter unit.

• 0[i] E1l
....
°
~@
4. Listen and observe.

Vibration may occur during start up, when
passing critical rpm (revolutions per
minute).
This is normal and should pass without
danger.
• If vibration increases, or continues at full

speed, press the emergency stop button.
The cause of vibration must be determined
and corrected before starting again!
• DAN GER ·
.. Disintegration
··hazard
.' .
'.,
.• EJ{c~s~i~e vibratio~ Ill.ily cause .

breakdown. . .
5
181002 0-02
5. Ensure that the separator is at full speed.

At full speed the starter ammeter reading
has decreased from a high starting value to [Z]]
a low steady value; the idling value
(slightly lower than the normal operating
value). •
[&]
6. Check the oil feed temperature on the
control unit display by pressing the alarm 0
~~
reset button.
If the temperature sensor is not linked to
the control unit read the temperature
~
~
0
•
•
indicator situated after the heater.
~
7. Wait until the oil feed temperature is •
correct: j
• for cross head engines 80 - 90°C
• for trunk piston engines 85 - 95°C
8. Start the feed to the system from the
-.- -W
,',
~
control unit.
"I'
~
When the temperature is correct the
0 ~
operation LED lit (green). •
•
0
•
•
6 181002~2
2 Operating
2.3 Intervals Between

Sludge Discharges
2.3.1 Background
WARNING
Disintegration
hazard
• . . .
.. Experience has shown thatif

intervals betwe en sludge discharges
•
are too long, a compact and hard
sludg~ cake can accumulate.· On· .
. discharge, this cake may break up
and be discharged unevenly causing
imbalance in the bowl. If imbalance
is excessive, there is risk for serious
mechanical damage and injury to
PerSonnel. .. . .
Recommendations are given regarding initial

intervals betwe en sludge discharges for
different applications. The setting may
su bsequently have to be changed after actual
• inspection of the bowl.
7
1810020-02
2.3.2 Lubricating oil cleaning

• Continuous operation:
In a new lubricating oil system the oil is
initially clean but as it gets dirtier the
interval between discharges will have to
be shortened until a "steady state" is
reached. Following information refers to
systems in "steady state".
Recommended Intervals for Crosshead
•
engines
Type of 011 Type of separato r
Initial discharge Time to first bowl in-
spection
Main lubricating oil system 0.5 hours 1 week LOPX

SluHing box oil 5min.
When separating stuffing box oil, the

specialised "MMPX Box Oil Cleaning
Plant" is primarily recommended. Please
After each batch LOPX
•
note that the recommended initial
discharge interval is 5 minutes and that it
must never exceed three times this value.
Recommended Intervals for Trunk
engines
Type of 011
Initial discharge Time to first bowl in-
spection
•
Main lubricating oil system 0.5 hours
If separator has been out of operation:

2 days
•
•
If the separator has been out of service for
24 hours or longer, while the engine has
been running, the interval between
discharges has to be shortened.
In this case the recommendation is:
• Discharge interval 5 minutes until the
whole oil volume has passed twice
through the separator.
• After that resume normal discharge
interval.
8 1810020-02
2 Operating
• Intermittent operation:
For installations where one separator
serves one engin e which is temporarily
stopped the following recommendations
apply:
If the engine is to be stopped for 24 hours
or less:
• Operate the separator continuously.
If the engine is to be stopped for more than
• 24 hours:
• Keep the separ ator in operation for 8
hours after the engine is stopped.
•
• Start the separa tor 8 hours before the
engine is started again.
Doing so most of the suspended particles
and condensed water will be removed
from the system and not settle in the sump
tank.
For installations where one separator
serves more than one engine the following
recommendations apply:
• Continuous use of the separator
whenever possible.
• Frequent switches between the engine
• systems to be cleaned. In a typical case

with one separa tor serving 2-4
auxiliary engines switching after
maxim um 24 hours of cleaning.
• • Discharge interval:
Engine has been in operation with- Engine has not been in operati
out cleaning of the system
Discharge interval 5 min.

oil since last cleanin g of system
Normal discharge interval

on
oil
Duration until the whole oil volume

has passed twice through the
separator
After that resume to normal
discharge interval
9
181002 0-02
2.3.3 Bowl inspection

To check if the initially selected interval is
appropriate, the bowl should be inspected
after a short test period shown in the previous
tables.
If sludge space is clean:
Interval may be prolonged with steps of 15

minutes, but it must not exceed three times the
•
recommended initial interval.
"Sludge space is clean" means that no

noticeable amount of hard sludge remains in
•
the sludge space.
If sludge space is dirty:
Interval has to be shortened. Sludge space in bowl. Parts to be inspected:
When the bowl is opened for routine cleaning, A. Top disc

B. Bowlhood
the sludge space should always be inspected C. Sludge space
and evaluated. If necessary, the interval D. Disc stack
between discharges should then be changed E. Sliding bowl bottom
accordingly.
N.B. Alfa Laval assumes no responsibility
for the actual choice of discharge
•
intervals, as these entirely depend on
local conditions.
10 1810020-02
2 Operating
2.4 Intervals Between

Bowl Cleaning
Suitable intervals between cleaning vary
according to the process parameters and
installation. The intervals can only be
determined by bowl inspections at actual
operating conditions. Indicated below are
some of the conditions, where experience has
shown that the interval between cleaning has
• to be closely monitored and possibly

shortened.
• Installation not in accordance with Alfa
• •
•
Laval specifications and
recommendations.
Poor operating water quality.
Operation without sludge conditioning
water.
• Diesel engine condition bad.
Note:
I. A low pressure/low flow or no discharge
alarm with no apparent external cause
•
(incorrect flow, temperature etc.) is a sign
that the bowl needs immediate cleaning.
Never neglect to investigate and remedy
the cause of such alarms.
• 2. Cleaning of the opera ting system is

normally required whenever product-
wetted parts of the bowl are manuaUy
cleaned.
3. Intervals between manual cleaning can be
prolonged by the use of the "Alfa Laval
CIP System"'(Cleaning-In-Place).
11
181002 0-02
4. In cases where an uneven sludge cake

remains in the bowl after a discharge, this
induces a particularly heavy imbalance
when not covered by liquid. This may
occur in total discharge type separators
and when starting separators without
previous cleaning.
Therefore, always after each stop, inspect
the bowl for cleanliness from sludge, and
if required clean it before restart. This
•
should be done when the separator has
been in operation for 24 hours or more
after the last inspection or cleaning.
. .• /f\....
l..U
WARNING
. Disintegration
hazard
•
Failure to c1eanthe separator bowl,
including operating system, at .
required intervals Or after alarms and ..
stop of bowl may cause imbalance
with risk of injury to perscmnel.
•
•
12 181002~2
2 Operating
LOPX Opera ting Instructions
2.5 Operating Check List

Compulsory 200 hour Service
A compulsory service must be carried out

when the system has completed 200 hours of
operation after installation or after a gear has
been replaced.
1. Check that all units are in good condition
•
and function correctly.
2. Change the oil in the separator oil sump.
Clean the oil sump before filling with new
•
oil.
Consult the "Separator Manual".
The level should be no more than half way up

the sight glass.
NOTE
Neglecting an oil change will result in

damage to separator bearings.
3. Tight en all connections .
• During operation:
•
Check visually that there is oil in the sump.
NOTE

Check that the starter ammeter reading is the

normal low and steady value.
I~
13
181002(}-()2
Observe the control unit front panel

information: ,1/
-e-
/, I ' rsl
• heater operation LED lit (green): /
only if the heater is connected to the I -e- , ' 1f

control unit. o-e-o
,'
/
0 ~
..
i*
/
• separator system operation LED lit

(green).
I j:
I
j~'
• activated valve LED lit (green).
During normal operation the trigger value is

shown on the left, and the time to next sludge
discharge is shown on the right of the display.
~ ~
~ •
More information may be read, as required, by
pressing the alarm reset button repeatedly (the
values are always shown to the right):
I. the oil feed temperature:
0
~~ ~
;;
g
•
• for cross head engines 80 - 90 cc
• for trunk piston engines 85 - 95 °C ~ ~
i
If the temperature sensor is not linked to
2. the oil feed temperature (if a second
OOIIJ
•
sensor for heater control is connected). ;•
a
3. the accumulated operating time l in hours.
0illIJ •!
~
4. the water transducer value.
5. the number of pulses for displacement

water.
[ilIIJ
[ll[[] •
~
Continue pressing until the display returns to
normal; Le. the trigger value, and time to next
sludge discharge.
I. How to interpret the displayed figures as

hours:
000 - 999 a actual value in hours
1.00 - 9.99 - 1000 - 9990 hours
10.0 - 99.9 - 10000 - 99900 hours
100. - 999. - 100000 - 999000 hours
14 1810020-02
2 Operating
Check the back pressure:

read the pressure gauge situated by the low
pressure switch on the clean oil outlet line.
Plant set value:
i
'-------'=-------------"~
• If excessive vibration occurs press the

emergency stop"button and evacuate the room. ~
•
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard .
l--_--=,""""".!=!!!.l.=r=--_---.l1
Neve rdisch arge a vibrating separa-
tor. Vibration will increase ifonly
part ofsOlidified sludge is.
'. disc hMg ed'·· .
Check all connections for leakage.
• I! \ . CAUTION
• 6
. Sliph azar d •
Oilleakagema~1lllikethefloor
slippeIYaIldcailseinjuries.. "
15
181002 0-02
Avoid contact with hot machine surfaces.
CAUTION
Burn hazard
\\\
Process pipes, lubrication oil and
I •. vanous machinesilrfaces can be hot
and cause burns. .
Use ear protection if noise levels are high. •

WARNING
Noise hazard· •
Excessive noise can cause damage to
hearing
...
if no. ear protection
.
is used..
•
•
16 1810020-02
2 Operating
2.6 Stop
To stop the system:
1f
1. Stop the system from the control unit:
A sludge discharge is initiated.
Separator stop sequence operation LED
-.- ~ ~
0
'- I /
/1 '- •§
<
~
flashes (yellow).
The LED changes to steady when the
•
sludge discharge is completed.
o~~
2. Stop the heater from the control unit.
If the heater is not connected to the control
i
•
unit it must be switched off independently.
I
3. Wait until the oil feed temperature starts to
drop:
Read the temperature on the control unit
display by pressi ng the alarm reset button.
If the temperature senso r is not linked to
0
~~ <
;
§

4. Stop the oil feed pump at the pump starter.
•8
• 5. Wait until the separator is switched off by

the control unit, i.e. when the starter
[G] ~
• ammeter reading drops to zero.
tit ~
6. Apply the brake.
7. Wait until the separator has come to a

complete stop (4 - 7 minutes; depends on
separator size; see "System Reference").
0/ ~
8. Release the brake.
17
1810020-02
9. In order to empty the bowl. restart the

separator drive motor from the separator I"'7\'l •
~
starter and let it run for about I minute. @@
•
L-- ~ _ _--.-J
i
•
•
•
•
18 1810020-02
2 Operating
2.7 Emergency Stop

If an emergency situation occurs press the
emergency stop button and evacuate the room.
Do not return until the separator has come to a
complete stop. •
L-
---',
I
if·· DANGER
• . Disintegration
hazard.
•
Do not enter the room after an
emergency stop while the separator is
. still.rotating.
2.8 After Emergency Stop

The cause of the emergency must be remedied
before attempting to restart the separator.
If the cause is not found a major service must
be performed and all moving parts thoroughly
check ed.
• . •. ~.·.·."· .• DANGER
• LU
Do
. .'
Disintegration
···hazard
;--
nots~th~~~£~torafte~~
emergency stopwitho~tf1rst . ..
.
. .
•..
.
.. reIl1e dyiIlg tl1eca useof the.·

eIl1ergency
To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock

the powe r supply before dismantling.
Consult the "Separator Manual" and the

"Alar m List" about emergency procedures.
19
181002 0-02
Dismantling work must not be started before
t~
all rotating parts have come to a complete
standstill.
DANGER . .
.
Entrapment hazard
Do not begin maintenance work
•
while the machine is still rotating.
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard
After an emergency stop the

separator bowl must be manually
. cleaned before starting up again...
The separator must be reassembled and all

covers and guards in place before unlocking.
the power supply and starting the system.
DANGER .'
Entrapment hazard
Do not switch on without all covers

and guaTds in place.
•
20 1810020-02
AlfaLaval
• Parameter List
•
•
List No.: 31830-6181-5
Printed Sep 1997

Book No. 1810138-02 V5
I- , . -. ' Alfa Laval Marine & Power_ . - '.':-. .

•
•
•
•
Alfa Laval reserve the right to make changes at any lime without
prior notice.
Alia Laval company.
S - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alia Laval Separation AB 1997.
•



under divider 1.
Contents
1 Scope 1
2 Process Parameters 3
3 Installation Parameters 5
• 4
5
Timer Sequence
Parameters
Service Mode Par~meter
7
• 5.1
5.2
90,94 and 95
Countdown of Timers
P50 - P89
Alarm Log
9
10
5.2.1 Examples of Logged Alarms 11
5.3 Timer function 13
6 Additional Parameter
Information 15
6.1 Process Parameters 15
6.2 Installation Parameters 18
• 6.3 Timer Sequence Parameters

6.3.1
6.3.2
Starting Sequence
Separation Sequence
19
19
20
• 7
6.3.3
6.3.4
Sludge Discharge Sequence 20
Stopping Sequence
Sequence Diagram
20
21
1810138-02
1 Scope
The parameter list is valid for the following

separation systems:
LOPX705
•
LOPX 707
LOPX709
LOPX 710
• LOPX7l3
LOPX 714
Including the EPC-400 control unit with
PROM (memory chips):
PROM (front circuit board): 31830-6210-1
PROM (rear circuit board): 31830-6132-1
•
•
1810138-02 1
2 Process Parameters
The EPC-400 control unit is used within a

separation system for control of the separation
process. The control unit can be programmed
for different separator systems and for
different conditions within the system. The
• programming is made by setting parameters.
The process parameters can be adjusted easily

and as often as required to meet changes in the
• operating conditions, e.g. time between sludge

discharges, oil temperature and alarm points.
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard
If the interval between sludge

discharges is too long, there is risk of
heavy side breakdown.
• Parameter Description or unit Range

Factory Plant
set value set value
• P1 1
P2 1
Max. time between
sludge discharges
Clarifier mode
Minutes
P1 ~ P60 + P61
Changing of P1 automatically
changes P61.
0-999
C
30
C
.....
P3 Not in use ---

P4
PS 1 High temperature DC or OF 0-115°Cor 0 .....
alarm 0- 255 of
P6 1 Low temperature DC or OF 0- 115°C or --- .....
alarm 0- 255 of
P7 1 Temperature set point °C or of 0-110°Cor - -- .....
0- 240 of
1810138-02 3
2 Process Parameters LOPX Parameter List
Factory Plant
Parameter Description or unit Range
set value set value
PS' P-band % 10 - 500 -- - .....
P9' I-time Minutes 0.1 -10.0 -- - .....
P10' Stand-by/On mode o ~ Stand-by o or 1 1 .....
1 ~ On
P 10 = 0 must only be used during
test operation or if high water
content in oil.
P11 Not applicable 0-999 0
P12 Conditioning water Number of pulses 0-999 5. . ....
•
P13 Displacement water Number of pulses 0-999 10 .....
P14 Min. number of Min. number of pulses of 0-999 2 .....
separate pulses additional displacement water.
P15to Not in use ---
•
P1S
P19 Factory test constant 1
1. For more information, see "Additional Parameter Information" on page 15.
•
•
4 181013&-02
3 Installation Parameters
NOTE
EPC-400 parameter P2l is factory set

to 50 Hz. If connected to a 60 Hz
•
supply an alarm will occur. Set P2 I to
60 Hz and press the reset button. The
i alarm will disappear.
• The installation parameters must be set before

the initial start-up and before process
parameters are set. The parameters rarely need
to be adjusted again.
Factory Plant
set value set value
P20 1 Separator type 5.1 ~ LOPX 705, 707, 709, 710, 4.1 - 5.2 5.1 5.1 or 5.3
713
5.3 ~ LOPX 714
P21 Power frequency Hz 50 or 60 50 .....
Check that the frequency is
correct, see label on the
•
separator.
P22 Not in use - --
1 EPC-400 address 1 ~ EPC-400
P23 1- 8 1 1
2-8 ~ Not in use
• P24
P25
P26 to Nolin use
P32
P33 Emergency stop
function
For remote communication with
COMLI protocol
o = Emergency stop only

1 = Mechanical vibration switch
o or 1
48
2
---
0
.....
.....
.....
P34 1 Alarm delay time Seconds 1 -30 15 .....

P35 1
Low temperature Seconds 1 -999 15 .....
alarm delay, after MV1
change over
1810138-02 5
3 Installation Parameters LOPX Parameter List
Factory Plant
set value set value
P36' Remote control 0= No remote control 0-3,10-13 0 .....

1 = Remote switches
2 ~ Remote computer
3 = Not used
10 = No remote control, alarm
A4-1 cancelled
11 ~ Remote switch, alarm A4-1
cancelled
12 ~ Remote computer, alarm
•
A4-1 cancelled
13 = Not used
P37' Heater type o = No or common heater with 0-2 0 .....
separate controller
1 = Heatpac EHS-62 controlled
•
by EPC-400
2 = Heater with control valve,
controlled by EPC-400
P38 Size of Heatpac kW 0,7,8,14,16,22, --- .....
heater If P37 = 1 then P38 is set to 16, 24,36,40,50,56,
otherwise P38 = "- - -". 65,72
P39 Run time of control Seconds 0-999 --- .....
valve If P37 ~ 2 then P39 is set to 120,
otherwise P39 ~ "- - -".
P40' Temperature reading C ~ °C Cor F C .....
F = OF
P41' Max. start tim e for Minutes 0-999 15 .....
heater
P42 Not in use ---
•
P43' Extra alarm function o = Alarm in dication on display. 0-1 0 .....
No action.
1 = Alarm indication on display.
Oil feed off during separa-
tion sequence.
P44 Displacement water
pulses
P45to Not in use

P49
.
Number of times the displacement 0-999
water is increased by two pulses
before alarm (A7-11 ).
2
-- -
.....
•
6 1810138-02
4 Timer Sequence Parameters
The timer sequence parameters control the

operation of the separation system, i.e. start,
separation, sludge discharge and stop
functions.
Factory Plant
•
set value set value
Starting sequence
•
PS0 1 Bowl closing water Seconds 0-999 15 .....
PS1 Not in use ---
1
PS2 Conditioning water Seconds 0- 999 30 See table
Automatically set to below
P52= P12 x P70
PS3 1 Reference time, oil Seconds 0-999 120 .....
feed on
PS4to Notin use ---
PS9
Separation sequence
P60 1 Time to first discharge Minutes 0- 999 10 .....

after start-up (for P60 + P61 = P1
calibration)
• P61 1 Time between sludge

discharges
Minutes
P60 + P61 = P1
Changing of P1 automatically
changes P61.
0-999 20 .....
•
P62 Pre-discharge interval Seconds 0-999 60 .....
P63 to Not in use - --
P69
1810138-02 7
4 Timer Sequence Parameters LOPX Parameter List
Factory Plant
set value set value
Sludge discharge sequence
P70 1 Displacement water Seconds 0-999 6 See table

below
P71 Pause Seconds 0-99.9 30 .....
P72 1 Sludge discharge Seconds 0-99.9 3.0 .....
P73to Not in use - --
P75
P76 1
•
Conditioning water Seconds 0-999 30 See table
Automatically set to below
P76 = P12 x P70
P77 Not in use ---
1 0-999 60 .....
•
P78 Reference time Seconds
P79 Not in use ---
Stopping sequence
P80to Not in use ---
P83
P84 1 Displacement water. Seconds 0-999 70 .....
Oil feed off
P85 Not in use ---
P86 1
Separator motor off Seconds 0-999 180 .....
P87to Not in use - --
P89
P12
LOPX 705
5
LOPX 707/709/
710
5
LOPX 713/714
5 •
•
P70 6 10 15
P52 and P76 30 50 75

=P12xP70
8 1810138-02
5 Service Mode Parameter 90, 94 and 95
With aid of the service mode parameters

information can be requested and displayed,
for instance the countdown of timer sequences
can be displayed while they are running.
•
Factory Plant
Parameter Description or unit Range set set
value value
P90 Service mode o= No service mode 0,1,50 0
•
.....
1 = Countdown of timers
P50 - P89
50 = Alarm log, including self
resetting alarms
P91 For remote 0
P92 communication with 19,2
P93 Profibus protocol 60
P94 Count down timer 0.0 - 10.0 0.0
P95 Indication of P94 timer
Hours
0.0 - 10.0 -- - .....
actual value
P96 to Not in use -- -
P99
• 5.1 Countdown of Timers

P50 - P89
IIGI/~aI31211"~J·'(Q)
I I· I
• By setting P90 to 1, the mode selector in

position L and then by pushing the alarm reset
button, a countdown of each activated timer
o )X
I
I
i
(P50 - P89) can be displayed during
operation.
L
O~I(Q)I~
--===='-! ----.:I~
Timer P61 shows that it is 32 seconds/eff to next
sludge discharge.
1810138-02 9
5 Service Mode Parameter 90, 94 and 95 LOPX Parameter List
5.2 Alarm Log

Set P90 to 50, the mode selector back to Land
push the alarm reset button; the 32 latest
alarms are displayed, including self resetting
alarms. Each logged alarm consists of three
consecutive groups of information:
I. The accumulated alarm log time, which
shows how long the EPC has been in
operation since the alarm in question.
Max. time between two alarms is 999.5
hours'" 41 days. If this time is exceeded
the whole alarm log will be reset to O. •
•
2. The alarm is indicated in the same way as
when it occurred (except for the "alarms"
starting with an E):
• Alarm code starting with an A
• LED and an alarm code, for instance
"High or low oil temperature"
• LED indications only
• "Alarm" code starting with an E (events
with no alarm released). E I is a self
resetting function
El'" no signal for discharge
•
E4 = ALCAP functions in stand-by
mode
E5 = ALCAP functions back to
operation mode again.
3. The value of parameter PI (maximum
time between sludge discharges). •
10 1810138-02
LOPX Parameter List 5 Service Mode Parameter 90, 94 and 95
5.2.1 Examples of Logged Alarms

• The capital "H" indicates that this is the
latest alarm which has been logged. The
EPe has been in operation 48 hours and
20 - 29 minutes since the alaffil in
question. Every tenth minute is displayed,
but several alarms can be logged within
this period.
The latest alaffil was a "Power failure"
~I
• PI (maximum time between sludge
discharges) was set to 30 minutes. ~I
• Between these two alaffils 10 hours and 0 - 10
minutes have elapsed (58.2 - 48.2).
•
~ ·•
58 hours and 20 - 29 minutes ago the
event below occurred. ~
The event was a ;;No signal for discharge".
No alarm was given, as the next discharge [ill[IIJ ~
attempt was succesful. "•

P I setting was 30 minutes.
~
• • 106 operating hours and 30 - 39 minutes
Ihl/~olb.131
•
ago another alarm occurred.
The alarm was a ;;Water transducer fault".

(Which is indicated by the LED and not on
the display)
S
DJI]]J
~
PI setting was 30 minutes.
1810138-02 11
5 Service Mode Parameter 90. 94 and 95 LOPX Parameter List
• If the accumulated time becomes more

than 999.5 hours it will the first time be
indicated by capital "H" and 1000 is
subtracted from the displayed value.
The second time it happens, another 1000
is subtracted from the displayed value etc.
Between these two alarms 10 hours have •

•
elapsed (H 5.0 = 1005.0 hours)
mmJQ]
@
~
~
• This indicates the end of the log.

•
•
12 1810138-02
LOPX Parameter List 5 Service Mode Parameter 90, 94 and 95
5.3 Timer function

By setting P94 to >0.0 a count down timer is
activated. It is intended as a reminder of
service to be made after the elapsed running
hours. If e.g. P94 is set to 2.70 it means 2700
hours. Each 0.1 indicates 100 hours. When
2700 hours of operation have elapsed, an
alarm will be released and 3h - - - is indicated
in the front window. The alarm is repeated at
•
each start of the EPe. To avoid this the P94
timer has to be started or set to O.
When P94 is >0 the actual count down value
•
is displayed when P95 is activated. P95 is just
an indication of the elapsed time in P94. It can
not be set.
To restart the timer, go to P94. Push third

button once (display flashes). Push button one
once. The timer is now restarted with the same
value. When the display is flashing, a new
val ue can be entered.
•
•
1810138-02 13
6 Additional Parameter Information
6.1 Process Parameters The only way to get a clean sludge

space is to make appropriate
PI Max time between sludge discharge adjustment of the interval based on
Long intervals between sludge regular inspection.
discharge can cause sludge
•
accumulation and solidity in the bowl.
N.B. Alfa Laval assumes no responsibility
The sludge may then break up at
for the actual choice of discharge
sludge discharge and create heavy
interval times, as these depend entirely
imbalance in the bowl.
•
upon local feed characteristics.
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard
If the interval between sludge

discharges is too long, there is risk of
heavy side breakdown.
As many factors influence the sludge

discharge interval, the choice of
• interval must be based on experience.
When the bowl is opened for routine

cleaning, the sludge space should be
• inspected and, if necessary, the interval

between discharges changed
accordingly.
Clean sludge space: the interval may
be prolonged. "Clean sludge space"
means that no noticeable amount of
solidified sludge remains in the sludge
space.
Dirty sludge space: the interval must
be shortened. "Dirty sludge space"
means that some solidified sludge has
accumulated in the sludge space.
1810138-02 15
6 Additional Parameter Information LOPX Parameter List
Main lubricating oil system

Initial discharge Time to first bowl inspection
Recommended interval 1 hour 1 week
for cross head engines
Recommended interval 0.5 hour 2 days
for trunk piston engines
P2 Clarifier mode
PS
The LOPX separator is a clarifier
which can handle water.
High temperature alarm •
•
Should be set sufficiently above the
temperature set point P7.
(Recommendation 5 - IO °C, or
10- 20 OF, higher than P7).
If P5 = 0 (no monitoring temperature
sensor, Pt 100, is connected)
then P6 = P7 = "- - -".
P6 Low temperature alarm
Should be set sufficiently below the
temperature set point P7.
(Recommendation 5 - IO °C, or
10 - 20 OF, lower than P7).
P7 Temperature set point
To be set according to plant
application. See also P5 and P6. •
•
PS P-band (Proportional band)
If P37 = 0 then P8 = "- - -".
If P37 = I or 2 thenP8 is set to 40%.
P9 I-time (Integral time)
If P37 = 0 then P9 = "- - " .
If P37= I or 2 then P9 is set to 1.2
minutes.
16 1810138-02
LOPX Parameter List 6 Additional Parameter Information
How to set PS and P9:

If the temperature varies with regularly
repeated oscillation, setting of the
proportional band and integral time
would be necessary.
• Increasing the value of parameter
PS (proportional band width) will
result in a slower and more stable
control action.
• Increasing the value of parameter
• P9 (integral time) also results in

slower response from the EPC-400.
•
We recommend you to follow these
guidelines:
I. Set P9 = 10 minutes.
2. Decrease P-band (PS) in steps until
the process reaches the point where
it starts to oscillate with a constant
amplitude. Test the stability after
each step by introducing a step-
change of load or set point.
3. When you have discovered the
point where the process oscillates Constant amplitude
with a constant amplitude note the
• following figures:
A = The value ofP-band (PS).
B = The time for one full period in
[\
\J
[\
I
,I
• seconds.
4. Calculation of optimal parameter
settings.
P-band I-time
•
B
PS = 2.2 x A P9 = O.S x B
The settings above give a rather good
result but may be adjusted according to
individual characteristics in different
loops.
1810138-02 17
PlO Stand-by I On mode N.B. Only use the stand-by mode when
In ihe case of transducer failure or necessary.
temporarily abnormal operation with Not adding displacement water will
excessive water content, or during fau It lead to loss of oil.
finding, the ALCAP functions can be Check the addition of conditioning
set in stand-by mode (PlO = 0) and the water regularly while in stand-by
separator can be operated as a mode..
conventional clarifier.
In stand-by mode the following apply: DANGER
• No transducer value nor deviation
•
from reference value wi 11 be Disintegration
displayed. hazard
• No alarm function for "Water
Failure to follow the above
•
transducer fault"
instructions may lead to heavy side
• No "ALCAP alarms, A 7" will be breakdown.
displayed.
• No sludge discharges will be To remind the operator of stand-by
initiated by the transducer during mode, the display will indicate "n.c."
P61. There will only be a sludge (not connected) to the left of the
discharge when P61 has elapsed. display and the time to next sludge
• No addition of displacement water discharge to the right of the display.
to the separator bowl. The time between sludge discharges
Conditioning water only is added. will automatically be set to 15 minutes
and a reminding alarm will occur every
• No draining function during P60 24 hours (A7-3).
6.2 Installation Parameters •

P20
P23
Separator type
When P20=5.l the specific functions
for the LOPX are automatically set.
EPC·400 address
In a LOPX separation system the
•
EPC-400 is always regarded as master
unit, e.g. P23 = I. LOPX can only
operate as a single unit and not in a
serial separation system.
18 181013&02
LOPX Parameter List 6 Additional Parameter Information
P34 Alarm delay time If a steam heating system is connected

Activation of most alarm functions can to the EPC-400 and if the system is
be delayed up to 30 seconds, except equipped with an optional shut-off
for: valve, and provided P37= 0 or 2, the
valve is opened when the heater is
• emergency / vibration alarm
started. The valve is shut:
• high temperature alarm
• when the heater is stopped
• transducer alarm
which have a fixed delay time of 2 • at high temperature alarm
seconds. • at power failure
• P35 Low temperature alarm delay after

MVl change over
When the change over oil feed valve
P40
• at. EPC stand-by mode.
Temperature reading
Degrees Celsius (0C) or Fahrenheit
•
changes position the flow rate and thus (OF) temperature readings available.
the oil temperature may be influenced. P5, P6 and P7 have to be set according
By delaying the temperature alarm, a to °C or oF.
false alarm is avoided as the oil
temperature has time to stabilize. P41 Max. start time for heater
P35 should be set according to plant Sets the maximum allowed start time
application. If a delay time above 120 for the heater. Minimum temperature
seconds is necessary, check the heating limit (P6) must be reached within this
system and the installation layout. time.
P36 Remote control P43 Extra alarm function

Remote control can be applied in form Extra alarm functions can be
of: connected. By setting P43 to I the oil
feed to the separator will be stopped
• • external switches when the extra alarm occurs.

• external computers
P37 Heater type
6.3 Timer Sequence
• The EPC-400 control unit is designed

for control of:
•
•
Heatpac EHS-62 (P37 =1)
Heater with heating media control
Parameters
6.3.1 Starting Sequence

valve (P37=2) P50 Bowl closing water
N.B. If a different type of heater is installed For proper closing of the separator
(P37 = 0), only a start/stop signal is bowl during start-up sequence. If more
available from the EPC-400 control than 60 seconds is required. it may
unit. indicate a malfunction.
1810138-02 19
P52 Conditioning water Filling of displacement water to the

Addition of water to separator bowl bowl eliminates the risk of oil loss at
during starting sequence. The water is the following sludge discharge.
to soften the sludge, to prevent sludge When a transducer signal from the
remaining after discharge. transducer MT4 is obtained the filling
P53 Reference time, oil feed on of displacement water is stopped and
Time to stabilize the transducer P72 starts.
reference value during the starting P72 Sludge discharge
sequence. The transducer reference Sludge discharge initiated by MV 15
value is stored when this time has admitting water to the separator bowl.
•
elapsed. If more than 4 seconds are requ ired,
this may indicate a malfunction.
6.3.2 Separation Sequence P76 Conditioning water
•
Addition of water to the bowl after a
P60 Time to first discharge after start-u p
sludge discharge. The water is to soften
Only the first time, after start-up, there
the sludge, to prevent sludge remaining
is a discharge after P60 (minimum time
after discharge.
between sludge discharges). The drain
valve (VS) can only be activated P78 Reference time
during P60. Bowl closing water is Reference time after a sludge
intermittently supplied. discharge. The transducer reference
value is stored when this time has
P61 Time between sludge discharges
elapsed.
P60 + P61 is the maximum time
between two consecutive sludge
discharges. See PI.
Bowl closing water is intermittently 6.3.4 Stopping Sequence
•
supplied. P84 Displacement water. Oil feed off
The time within P6l may be Before the separator is stopped
interrupted by a sludge discharge, displacement water is added to the
initiated by the transducer signal.
•
bowI to displace the oil and ensure
there is a minimum loss of oil.
P86 Separator motor off
6.3.3 Sludge Discharge Sequence The separator motor is automatically
P70 Pulse length of displacement water switched off. Restarting is blocked for
Pulse length during filling of 3 minutes.
displacement water.
20 181013&-02
7 Sequence Diagram
The duration of the monitoring functions and output signals is illustrated in the diagram.
Valve Terminal Activated function Stand· Starting Separation Sludge discharge Stopping
Relay by sequence sequence sequence sequence
Sensor OFF P50 P52 P53 P60 P61 P62 P70 P71 P72 P76 P78 P84 P86 OFF
15 s 0-755 120 s Omin Omin 60s s 30 S 3.0$ 0-755 60s 70 s 180 s
Mon. functions
• -
1'541
X7:1
X7:3
Extra alarm
High oil pressure
•
1'542 X7:4 Low oil pressure
X511 Vibration
X8A
X52 Emergency stop"
- X9:3 Heater fault
TT1 Xl1:1-3 High oil temperature 3
TT1 Xl1:1-3 Low oil temperature 3
Water transducer
MT4 XE:1-4
(signal displayed)
MV151
X5:3/X7:4 Discharge failure
1'542
Output signals
•
- Xl:1-2 Motor starter
'-
X51
MV1
X2:3-4
X4A
Blocking vibration
switch
Oil to separator
-
• MV10N
MV10
MV15
MV16
X5:1/X5:2
X5:3
X5:4
Displacement!
Conditioning water
Bowl opening water
Bowl closing water 4 ~

~
••• • ••
10-
-
- -
1. See list after timer sequence parameters on page 4.
2. Emergency stop (X52) is normally connected to terminal X8:4. If optional vibration switch (X51) is installed, it
will be connected to terminal X8:4. Emergency stop (X 52) will then be connected to the system power supply.
If the EpC is in stand-by mode (OFF) and the emergency stop button is pushed, the separator motor will be
stopped.
3. With optional sensor TT1 installed 1'50 will not start if the temperature is to low or to high.
4. During 1'60 and 1'61 intermittently.
1810138-02 21
7 Sequence Diagram LOPX Parameter List
Separation sequence
Bowl closing water is intermittently supplied

during the separation sequence (shown in the
diagram with a broken line).
Sludge discharge sequence
Within this period of time any trigger signal

from the transducer MT4 will interrupt the
P70 sequence.
Stopping sequence
Before the actual stopping sequenc~ begins •

•
the separation is completed with a sludge
discharge sequence.
•
•
22 1810138-02
~~
AIfa Laval
LOPX Separation System

•
• Alarms and Fault Finding
•
•
Printed Nov 2000
Book No. 181 0144-02 V6
. Alfa Laval Marine & Power

•
•
Alfa Laval reserves the right to make changes at any time without
•
prior notice.
•
Alfa Laval company.
SE - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
•



under divider I.
Contents
1 Scope 1 4 Alarm Tests 25
2 EPC Signs 3 5 Test Program 27
3 Alarms 5 5.1 How to Start the

Test Program 27
•
3.1 Alarm Functions 5
5.2 Lamp Test 28
3.2 Alarm Reset 6
5.3 How to Activate
3.3 Alarm Survey 7 Different Parts of the
• 3.4 LED Alarms and Test Program 28

Fault Finding 8 5.4 Functions in the
3.4.1 High Oil Pressure 8 Test Program 29
3.4.2 Low Oil Pressure (Low Flow) 9
3.4.3 Sludge Discharge Failure 10
3.4.4 Water Transducer Fault 11
3.4.5 Emergency Stop 12
3.4.6 Vibrations (Option) 13
3.4.7 Heater Fault 14
3.5 LED and Display Alarms and
Fault Finding 15
•
3.5.1 High or Low Oil Temperature
(Option) 15
3.5.2 Temperature Sensor Error
(Option) 16
•
3.6 Display Alarms and
Fault Finding 17
3.6.1 Communication Error 17
3.6.2 Processor Fault 18
3.6.3 Programming Error 18
3.6.4 Power Failure 19
3.6.5 Temperature Deviation 20
3.6.6 ALCAP Alarms 21
3.6.7 Other Alarms 23
3.6.8 Countdown Timer Alarm 23
1810144-02
1 Scope
The alarms, alarm tests and the test program

are valid for the following separation systems:
LOPX 705
LOPX 707
• LOPX709
LOPX 710
• LOPX 713
LOPX 714
Including the EPC-400 control unit with

PROM (memory chips):
PROM (front circuit board):31830-621 0-1

PROM (rear circuit board): 3 1830-6132-1
•
•
1810144-02 1
2 EPC Signs
The control unit signs for the LOPX

separation system are shown in this chapter,
9 9 r
• I
1
I
I
I
I
I
'I
1
•
I I I
1 I I
I I I
Monitoring functions'
9 9 ~
• .....;I I I
I
~
I
•
I I
1 I
LOPX
I 1 I ,•
I I I •
Monitoring functions (options)
3
1810144-02
2 EPC Signs LOPX Alarms and Fault Finding
Vl J
I
MV10
I
J £I
MV10:
MV16
...£.;' E
..,;;r ! . I ---+~
n
~
MV15
Q(I--....------_ .~
-D'
... • IEPC-400 I <
'----- "'~ =.:LO"-2p--,X,,----- ---,i
•
Output signals
...1: ~ ..
U •
•
Operating symbols
4 1810144-02
3 Alarms
3.1 Alarm Functions

The alann system is designed to ensure that
the separation system always remains in a safe
state. There are two different types of alann
• functions:
• Sensor-related alarm functions are
indicated by light emitting diodes (LEDs)
•
on the EPC-400.
• Display-related alarm functions are
indicated on the EPC-400 display. When
any of the displayed alann functions are
activated the left digits start flashing and
the right digits are steadily lit.
If there is more than one alarm at the same

tilT'e, the EPC-400 will display the alanns in
the order in which they occurred.
• 0
OOl
O1f
©
o'lf ©
()
o )X
©
•
o /> ©
@
IIDJDIJI
An activated alarm condition is identified either by an alarm LED (to the left in the
picture) or an alarm code on the display together with the main alarm LED (to the
right in the picture).
1810144-02 5
3 Alarms LOPX Alarms and Fault Finding
3.2 Alarm Reset

I. Acknowledge the alann signal by pressing
the alann push-button.
The flashing light then changes to steady.
2. Remedy the cause.
3. Reset the alann function by pressing the
alann push-button a second time.
The LED will turn off.
o
It is possible to reset the system without
remedying the cause, but the alann signal will
be repeated.
•
NOTE
Never return to the EPC-400 control

unit to acknowledge or reset an alann
•
if it by any means can be hazardous.
WARNING
Disintegration
hazard
Never reset an alann without first

finding and remedying the cause.
•
•
6 1810144-02
LOPX Alarms and Fault Finding 3 Alarms
3.3 Alarm Survey

LED Display Alarm function Page
alarms alarms
8 High Oil Pressure 8
8 Low Oil Pressure (Low Flow) 9
),)(. Sludge Discharge Failure 10
• (3
@
Water Transducer Fault
Emergency Stop
11
12
• .
@)
Q
Vibrations (Option)
Heater Fault
High or Low Oil Temperature (Op-

13
14
8 C tion)
~ Temperature Sensor Error (Op-

15
8 lion)
16
IT Communication Error 17
~ Processor Fault 18
• ~
~
Programming Error
Power Failure
18
19
• ~
IT
Temperature Deviation
ALCAP Alarms
20
21
~ Other Alarms 23
[C Countdown Timer Alarm 23
1810144-02
7
3.4 LED Alarms and Fault

Finding
3.4.1 High Oil Pressure
Cause Corrective action
Regulating valve, RV4, or other valves, downstream Open or regulate RV4, or other valves, to correct back
throttled or closed.
Automatic actions at alarm
Main alarm flashes.

pressure, normally about 1.5 bar (150 kPa).
Automatic actions after alarm reset
Main alarm off.

•
Alarm diode (PS41) flashes. Alarm diode off.
Change over valve (V1) is set for oil recirculation. V1 is set for oil feed to separator.
•
•
8 1810144-02
3.4.2 Low Oil Pressure (Low Flow)
Causes Corrective actions
Too low oil feed. Check the oil feed pump.

Adjust the oil flow.
Strainer before the oil feed pump is clogged. Clean the strainer.
Oil feed pump has stopped. Check the oil feed pump.
• Change over valve (V1) is in recirculation position. 1.
2.
3.
Check the air supply to the solenoid valve block air
(MV1).
Check MV1.
Check V1.
• Too low back pressure.
Bowl opened accidentally during operation.

Increase the back pressure with regulating valve RV4.
The correct back pressure is normally about 1.5 bar
(150 kPa).
Check the opening water valve (MV15) for leakage.

See "Separator Manual".
Leakage from bowl. See "Separator Manual".
Automatic actions at alarm Automatic actions after alarm reset

Main alarm flashes. Main alarm off.
Alarm diode (PS42) flashes. Alarm diode off.
V1 is set for oil recirculation. V1 is set for oil feed to separator.
•
•
1810144-02 9
3.4.3 Sludge Discharge Failure
No or very low opening water supply. Check the water supply system:
11 Iitres/min are required for LOPX 705
18litres/min are required for LOPX 707,709,710, 713 &
714.
Opening water valve (MV15) damaged. Check MV15.
No signal from low oil pressure switch (PS42) at dis-

charge.
Separator operating system not working.

Check PS42.
1. Check the separator by manually opening MV15 for

discharge.
•
Dosing ring tightened too mUCh.
2. Dismantie and check the operating system. See'
"Separator Manual".
Tighten the dosing ring screws with a torque of 7 Nm for

LOPX 705
Tighten the dosing ring screws with a torque of 20 Nm for
LOPX 707,709,710, 713 & 714.
•
N.B. This alarm is activated after two attempts to discharge, within the same discharge cycle, have failed.
Alarm diode flashes. Alarm diode off.
•
The stop sequence is initiated. 1. If the power has been off for more than about 10
minutes the separator bowl must be stopped and
manually cleaned before restart.
2. The separator and the EPC program have to be
restarted.
10 1810144-02
3.4.4 Water Transducer Fault
Loose connection between transducer test circuit Check connecUons.

board and oscillator.
Faulty oscillator unit or faulty EPC control module. Check supply voltage in the MT4 on terminal 3 - 4 (20 V
DC).
About every fifth second the voltage at terminal 4 - 5 (20
•
V DC) will drop for approx. 0.5 second:
• If voltage drop: replace the oscillator unit.
• If no voltage drop: replace the EPC control module.
For more information about the interconnections, see
•
"System Reference".
-.
Alarm diode flashes. Alarm diode off.
•
•
1810144-02 11
3.4.5 Emergency Stop
Cause Corrective actions
Emergency stop button has been pushed. 1. Remedy the cause for the emergency stop.
2. Reset the alarm by switching the power off and on.
3. Restart the separator.
4. Restart the EPC program.
Main alarm flashes.

A utomatic action after alarm reset
N.B. This alarm function can not be reset by pushing

the alarm reset button. See above.
•
•
Alarm diode flashes.
The separator is stopped and the heater turned off.
Oil feed through the heater and separator stays on for

max. 3 minutes, or until FS4 signals no flow. Bowl
closing water supplied for 15 seconds.
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard
The separator bowl must be manually
•
cleaned before starting up again
12 1810144-02
3.4.6 Vibrations (Option)
Cause Corrective actions
Vibration switch activated: separator bowl out of baI- L Remedy the cause. See "Separator Manual".
ance. Check the vibration switch setting.
2. Reset the alarm by switching the power off and on.
3. Clean the separator bowl.
4. Restart the separator.
• Automatic actions at alarm

5. Restart the EPC program.
Automatic action after alarm reset
• Main alarm flashes.
The separator is stopped and the heater turned off.
Oil feed through the heater and separator stays on for

N.B. This alarm function can not be reset by pushing
the alarm reset button. See above.
max. 3 minutes. or until FS4 signals no flow. Bowl

closing water supplied for 15 seconds ..
DANGER
Disintegration
hazard
• The separator bowl must be manually

cleaned before starting up again
1810144-02 13
3.4.7 Heater Fault
N.B. Heater fault is only activated if the heater is controlled by the EPC-400.
Cause Corrective action
Oil flow stopped or temperature switch tripped in an If oil flow stopped. investigate the cause.
installed Heatpac heater. See corrective actions for PS42.
Check the flow switch on the Heatpac heater.
If temperature switch tripped. investigate the tempera-
•
ture switch setting. If OK check that the heater is clean .
Clogged heater. Clean heater.
Safety switch for other type of electric heater or steam Remedy the cause.
heater tripped.
Main alarm flashes.

Main alarm off.
Alarm diode off.

•
Heater switched off. Heater switched on.
•
•
14 1810144-02
3.5 LED and Display

Alarms and Fault
Finding
3.5.1 High or Low Oil Temperature

(Option)
• N. B. Also applicable to IT2 temperature sensor, if fitted.

Low temperature alarm when: Investigate the reason and remedy it.
• - clogged heater
- insufficient steam supply
- faulty steam trap
- faulty steam supply valve
- electrical fault (tripped fuse)
High temperature alarm when: Investigate the reason and remedy it.
- faulty steam supply valve
- electrical control system out of action
Set point (P7) changed or the alarm limits are too 1. Adjust the parameters.
close to the set point. P5 = max. temp
P6 = min. temp
P7 = set point.
See "Parameter UsC
2. Check the temperature control loop.
•
Steam control valve (SRV1) open or closed too much. 1. Check and adjust the SRV1 function.
2. Check the EPC output functions.
Low temperature alarm when the temperature in- Check the heater and parameter P41, See "Parameter
creases too slowly, during start-up. Usf'.
• Pt 100 temperature signal faulty.
N.B.
Check the Pt 100 temperature sensor.
The current temperature is indicated when the alarm is acknowledged. To find the appropriate
temperature sensor reading, push the alarm reset button twice 1C (1 F) = IT1, 2C (2F) = TT2.
For more information, see "Operating Instructions".

Alarm diode and displayed value flash. Alarm diode off and display returned to normal.
Oil feed (MV1) off. MV10n.
Heater switched off at high temperature (if controlled Heater switched on when temperature is below set point
by EPC-400). (if heater is controlled by EPC-400).
1810144-02 15
3.5.2 Temperature Sensor Error

(Option)
•
i
N.B. Also applicable to TI2 temperature sensor, if filled.
Temperature sensor is incorrectly connected. Check the temperature sensor by the test program, see
"Analog inputs" on page 32 in the chapter Test Program.
•
Temperature sensor loop is open or short-circuit. Check the connections.
Temperature sensor cables are too close to power ca- Check the cables between the temperature sensor and
bles. EPC-400.
N.B. Push the alarm reset bullon to find appropriate process value reading.
1C (1 F) = TI1, 2C (2F) = TT2. If both temperature sensors are filled, alarm A6 is also activated.
Main alarm flashes.

Main alarm off.

•
Alarm diode and displayed value flashes. Alarm diode off and display returned to normal.
Oil feed (MV1) off. MV10n.
Heater switched off at high temperature (if controlled Heater switched on when temperature is below set point
by EPC-400). (if heater is controlled by EPC-400).
•
•
16 1810144-02
3.6 Display Alarms and

Fault Finding
3.6.1 Communication Error
Alarm code Cause Corrective actions
•
Communication error with exter- 1. Check extemal and internal
§TIE[]] nal computer. connections.
2. If internal communication error,
replace the control modUle.
•
Communication error between 1. Check by measurement the fuses
§]]EIBJ front and rear circuit board. A 1:F2 (front board), A2:F2 (rear
board).
(See "Component Description,
EPC-400 Control Unit").
2. Replace the control module.
Automatic action at alarm Automatic actions after alarm reset

Display flashes. Display normal.
•
•
1810144-02 17
3.6.2 Processor Fault
Alarm codes Causes Corrective actions

Internal RAM error. Replace control module.
~
g"
~
External RAM error. Replace control module.
~
"~
~
§ E2 RAM error. Replace control module.

M:ITI
Mll]
~
11
~
Program error. Replace control module.
•
•
Mode switch error. Check that the mode SE"'3ctor is in the cor-
~ i
~
rect position.
A I D (Analog I Digital) conversion Check the fuse A1:F2 (front board)

~
~
~
~
error. If the fuse is correct, replace the control
module.
Calibration error. Ask for service or replace the control mod-

~
"~
8 ule.

3.6.3 Programming Error

•
Alarm code
~
"~
~
Cause
In programming mode too long
(more than 30 minutes without
Corrective action
Change the mode selector to the

"L" (Local) position and. when appropriate.
•
programming during this time). return to the "P" (Programming) position
and continue with programming.

18 1810144-02
3.6.4 Power Failure

Power failure. 1. Check the power supply.
HI]] 2. If the power has been off more than
about 10 minutes the separator bowl
must be stopped and manually
cleaned before restart.
•
3. Restart the heater, separator and
EPC program.
Power supply frequency too high 1. Check the power supply.
~ (more than + 5%).1 2. If the power has been off more than
• 3.
about 10 minutes the separator bowl
must be stopped and manually
cleaned before restart.
Restart the heater, separator and
EPC program.
All outputs are off.
Only valid for alarm A4-1 : Only valid for alarm A4-1:
Main alarm diode and display Main alarm off.
start to flash when power returns. Display indicates "OFF".
Only valid for alarm A4-2: Only valid for alarm A4-2:
• 1.
vated.
The frequency deviation must be continuous or repeated during the alarm delay time before an alarm is acti-
1810144-02 19
3.6.5 Temperature Deviation
Alarm code Cause Corrective actions

< Temperature deviation alarm (dif- At commissioning:
MJJJ ~
~
ference between n1 and nz is
more than 30 'C/54 'F).
Check if the distance between
sensors is too great.
System in operation:
Check the temperature sensors.
•
N.B. Push the alarm reset button to find the appropriate process value reading 1C (1 F) = TT1 ,
ZC (ZF) = nz. For more information, see "Operating Instructions".

Main alarm flashes.
Display flashes.
Main alarm off.
Display normal.
•
•
•
20 1810144-02
3 Alarms
LOPX Alarms and Fault Finding
3.6.6 ALCAP Alarms

Alarm codes
, High water transducer (MT4) val-
@l l]] ~
ue (above 400):
• High water content in oil. Check the oil system for water leakage.
• Water transducer dirty. Clean the contact surfaces of water trans-

ducer. See "Comp onent Description, Wa-
•
ter Transd ucer'.
~
Low water transducer (MT4) val-
~ ~
ue (below 100):
Open circuit in the MT4. 1. Check connections in control unit and

•
•
transducer.
2. Check cables for damage.
Bad connection between 1. Check the cable connection.

•
oscillator unit and electrode. 2. Tighten oscillator electrode connector
. ALCAP stand-by for more than 1. The reason for stand-by mode must
@]£mJ "
~
24 hours. be checked!
2. Try to operate the system normally.
PROM and/or RAM fault. Replace control module.
~
~
~
Water transducer trigger value 1. System and component check:
~
~
less than 30. • Check that the valve block strainer is
~
Insufficient displacement water. free from deposits.
Insufficient conditioning water.
•
• Check that the displacement water
flow from MV10 is correct.
• Check that the inner water pipe in the

separator inlet pipe is free from
deposits. Clean if necessary.
• •
2.
Check that the seal ring and sealing
surface on the sliding bowl bottom are
free from any damage.
If the alarm still occurs, please check
following parameter settings in EPC
400:
• P12 2: 5 (If this value is below 5, then

set it to 5)
• P70 = according to parameter list

setting for your separator type
• P76 = actual value of P12 x actual

value of P70.
21
1810144-02

Water transducer (MT4) trigger- 1. Check for water leakage into lube oil
~ ing 5 times in a row. system (e.g. from cooler or engine).
2. Change over to stand-by mode
(adjust P10 to 0).
•
Oil feed off.. Oil feed on.
•
DANGER
Disintegration hazard
If the A7 - 11 alarm is not remedied

there is a risk for breakdown.
•
•
22 1810144-02
3.6.7 Other Alarms

. Extra alarm. 1. Check the connected external
@ill]] §
~
function.
2. Check the jumper at terminal XC-Xl:1
(when extra alarm not used).
.., Low pressure signal (PS42) Check the pressure switch.
~
•
faulty at start. Circuit should be
~
open.
• Main alarm flashes.

Display flashes.
Only valid for alarm A9-1:
If P43=1 then oil feed off.
Main alarm off.
Display normal.
Oil feed on.
Only valid for alarm A9·2:

The start of the timer sequences
is blocked.
3.6.8 Countdown Timer Alarm
• Alarm codes Causes Corrective actions
Restart the timer after relevant actions are
•
The count down timer has
@EEtB reached zero. completed (Parameter 94).

1810144-02 23
4 Alarm Tests
Use the following guide for testing alann

functions by activating them. Alanns are
provoked by one or more actions CA, B and so
on) as shown in the right column, however,
certain alann functions can not be tested
• without being disconnected.

N.B. If the alann functions are to be
disconnected in the control unit, be
•
careful to avoid a short-circuit,
The recommendation is to test the alanns

every 3 months.
Displa y alarm Functi on Senso r Action s to provok e an alarm
LED alarm
e High oil pressure
Low oil pressure (Iow

PS41
PS42
Increase back pressure.
A. Stop oil feed pump.
§ flow) B. Change MV1 position by reducing

air pressure.
C. Reduce the back pressure.
Sludge diSCharge failure PS42 1. Disconnect hose for opening water

).)(.
•
(MV15).
2. Initiate a Sludge discharge.
Water transducer fault MT4 Disconnect cable to XE:4 (the test signal
S to MT4).
• @
Emergency stop
Vibrations (option)
XS2
XS1
Press the emergency stop bullon.
Tap the vibration switch until the alarm is
§ released.
- Start the heater.
ru Heater fault 1.
2. Disconnect cable to X9:3.
25
1810144-02
4 Alarm Tests LOPX Alarms and Fault Finding
LED alarm Display alarm Function Sensor Actions to provoke an alarm
e C
High or low oil tempera- TI1
ture (option)
A.
S.
Remove sensor from pipe and put
into hoVcool liquid.
Change alarm limit parameters
(PS = max. temp., P6 = min. temp.)
For more information see the
"Parameter Usf'.
N.B. Reset the parameter values
after test.
Communication error - Remove fuse A2:F2 (rear board).

Mll]
~
MIIJ
A I D conversion error
Programming error
-
-
Remove fuse A1:F2 (front board).
Leave the mode selector switch in

•
•
position P for 30 minutes.
Power failure - Switch the power to the EPC ott and on.
0EfII]
Power supply frequency - Set parameter P21 to wrong frequency.
MJ:R] too high (more than
+ 5%).
Temperature deviation TI1-TI2 Remove sensor from pipe to cool or heat

~ up (temp. ditto more than 30 'C/54 'F).
High water transducer MT4 Touch the central screw in the MT4
lmEITI value (above 400). connection box.
Low water transducer MT4 Disconnect the central screw in the MT4
~ value (below 100). connection box and keep the oscillator
unit free.
Mm
Water transducer trigger MT4
value not above 30.
Insufficient amount of
displacement water.
Close displacement water supply and
wait 7 discharge cycles.
The amount of displacement water is
checked every fourth discharge.
•
rnJ:TI
~
Extra alarm
PS42 faulty at start

(Circuit should be open)
-
PS42
A. .Activate appropriate sensor.
B. Disconnect cable X7:1.
With the EPC in off mode put a jumper

between XC- X7:4 and push the start
bullon.
•
26 1810144-02
5 Test Program
The EPC-400 control unit has a test program,

for testing of input and output functions,
memory etc.
This test program should be run during
•
installation and whenever there is a need for it,
for instance, during fault finding.
• 5.1 How to Start the Test

Program
NOTE
11
The test program is only to be used I I : 1> , 'I B
when the separator system is out of II
operation.
To run the test program, do as follows:

I. Open the control unit door.
• 2. Switch the powe r off and the mode

selector in any position (R, L or P).
3. Press the discharge and the alarm push-
L~om
P m
• buttons simultaneously, and keep them

pressed.
4. Switch the powe r on.
5. Release the discharge and alarm push-
buttons when the test program has started.
27
1810144-02
5 Test Program LOPX Alarms and Fault Finding
5.2 Lamp Test

The test program starts with a lamp test.
-
I. The display lit with power on. o ©
2. There are two ways to check the lamps: l1:r·~ p
Cl _ 111 l 0S[1Y
6l
1f~
o
\11111110
00-:'"00000=11 IIOA fRI

• Each LED and display segment o~c!ocr. -- --- ~ IQ;
individually lit (see the picture).
• Each group of LED:s and display
[It . : -r""""~ -~ ©
segments lit.
Push the button 2 (see the figures in the
picture below) to switch between the two
modes. •
5.3 How to Activate
Different Parts of the
•
Test Program
Use the push-buttons to activate different
parts of the test program (see the figures I, 2
and 3 in the picture).
I. Push button 1 to step from function I to
function 2 etc. in the test program. ~~ Co£:]--+--1
•
It is not possible to step backwards.
p L0£:]--+-- 2
Wait until the function is activated before
pushing the button again.
0,1---+--3
•
2. Push button 2 to step forward within each
function in the test program, for instance
from function 1.1 to 1.2.
3. Push button 3 to activate or deactivate
output terminal (function 5 and 6).
28 1810144-02
5 Test Program
5.4 Functions in the Test

Program
1. Memory
Function
DJJJ Q] . ~
1.1 PROM
1.2 Internal RAM

Memory correct
1.3 External RAM
• [[ [[ ]f ]
Memory fault
1.4 EEPROM
• 2. Digital inputs
Terminal Unit Correct

Functi on
value
Low flow (Low oil pressure) X7:4-X e PS42 0

2.1
,
DJ JJ Q] il
~
2.2 High pressure X7;3-Xe
-
PS41
-
1
1
2.3 Not in use
Circuit open
2.4 Extra alarm X7;1-Xe - 0
• D II J] i Emergency stop or Vibration X8:4-Xe XS2 or 1

2.5
switch XS1
Circuit closed 2.6 Not in use - - 1
X8:2-Xe Remote 0
•
2.7 Start or stop EPe
switch
2.8 Start or stop heater X8:1-Xe Remote 0

switch
29
1810144-02
3. Digital inputs
Function Terminal Unit Correct

value
3.1 Alarm acknowledge or Reset X9:4-XC Remote 0
[[][]]Q] ~ •
3.2 Heater fault X9:3-XC
switch
1
Circuit open
3.3 Sludge discharge X9:2-XC Remote 0
switch
[JJ[J]] I
Circuit closed
•
4. Mode selector
Function
4.1 ' Remote (R) position

•
CIErni
Remote position
4.1
4.1
Local (L) position
Program (P) position
~ •• ~
LR~
Local position
~!
Program position
p
•
1. 4.1 has three positions: R, L, and P.
30 1810144-02
5 Test Program
5. Digital outputs
Use push-button 3 to activate or deactivate

each output (see "How to Activate Different
Parts of the Test Program" on page 28).
N.B. Corresponding green LED is not lit.
Function Terminal Unit
5.1 Oil feed X4:4-XD MV11V1
[]] ]]Q ] ·~ 5.2 Displacement or conditioning X5:1-XD MV10A
•
water drain
Circuit deactive 5.3 Displacement or conditioning X5:2-XD MV10
water supply
[[ [[ ]] ·• 5.4 Opening water X5:3-XD MV15
•
~
5.5 Closing water X5:4-XD MV16
Circuit active
5.6 Steam shut-off valve or Heatpac X6:1-XD -
fixed load
-
5.7 Steam valve decrease or Heatpac X6:2-XD
fixed load
5.8 Steam valve increase or Heatpac X6:3-XD

fixed load
6. Digital outputs
• Use button 3 to activate or deactivate each

output (see" How to Activate Different Parts
of the Test Progr am" on page 28).
•
N.B. Corresponding green LED is not lit.
6.1 Heatpac variable load X6:4-XD
[]] ]]Q ] i 6.2 Heatpac alarm blocking during

start
X4:2-XD K15in
power
unit
Circuit deactive
6.3 Not in use
[[ [[ ]] ~ 6.4
6.5
Separator stop
Not in use
X1 :1-2
Circuit active
6.6 Remote/common alarm X2:1-2
6.7 Blocking vibration switch X2:3-4 XS1
31
1810144-02
7. Not in use
8. Analog inputs
To simulate the temperature sensor elements
~_=~=___X_1_0_,
(Pt lOO) in 8.1 and 8.2, a resistor can be used.
Separate plug connectors with appropriate
resistors are included in the test module kit.
_____ X_1_1 !
I
Resistor Reference temp. Display reading
110 Q 25°C (77 OF) 60
140 Q 104 °C (219 OF) 215
The normal value on the display for function

8.1 and 8.2 should be 60 - 215. Outside the
•
range 42 - 233 indicates a fault. 000 (or a very
low value) or 255 indicates a serious fault.
A normal value for function 8.3, Reference

4 V should be 195 - 215.
•
This table shows how to find the fault:
"Temperature sensor error": alarm code "EEE" Possible causes
Func~ion Terminal Unit FuseA1:F2 AID conver- Input Input short

blown sion faulty open circuit
8.1 Temperature sensor for control Xl0:1-3 IT2 000 000 255 000
8.2 Temperature sensor for alarm Xll: 1 - 3 ITl 000 000 255 000
8.3
8.4
Reference 4 V
Not in use
Function Terminal
000
Unit Displayed value

000 195-215 195-215
•
8.5
8.6
Calibration
Calibration
Xl0
Xll
For instance, if the display shows "000" for

function 8.1, 8.2 and 8.3, it must be either a
IT2
ITl
o = OK E = Error
o = OK E = Error
•
blown fuse or AID converter fault. Check it in
this order:
I. If the fuse is blown, replace it.
2. If the fuse is correct, replace the control
module.
32 1810144-02
5 Test Program
9. Serial communication
[[[[]Q] i •
9.1 Not applicable
(The display will show an E).
X13:1-4
Circuit correct 9.2 RS 232 C X14 X14:1-4

Measure -10 to -12V DC
on X14:1-4 (Circuit correct).
DIillh
Circuit fault
• N.B. After the test, remove the terminal

jumpers and connect communication
• cables.
10. Test of EPRO M (rear circuit board)
11. Test of internal RAM in CPU Circuit correct

(rear circuit board
12. Test of external RAM in CPU

(rear circuit board)
13. Test of IC 8255 I/O port Circuit fault
• (rear circuit board)
14. Low reference analog input

(internal)
• A value between 77 and 116 is displayed,

when it is correct.
15. High reference analog input

(internal)
A value between 251 and 377 is displayed,

when it is correct.
33
1810144-02
16. Transducer signal (internal)
The display shows 100 ± -50 with oil

inside the WT 200 and 55 ± 10 with air,
when it is correct.
17. Not in use
18.Not in use
19. o-volt reference, analogue in
A value between 34 and 46 is displayed when

correct.
•
N.B. Stop the test program by switching
power off-on.
•
•
34 1810144-02
• LOPX 710 Separation System
• System Reference
•
•
Product No. 1765143-02
Printed Dec 1996

Book No. 1810489-02 V1

•
•
prior notice.
•
•
Alfa Laval company.
S - 14780 Tumba
Sweden
•



under divider I.
Contents
1 Technical Data 1
1.1 Separation System 1
1.2 Separator 2
• 2
2.1
Drawings
Mounting Drawings
2.1.1 Mounting Drawing
3
3
4
• 2.2
2.3
Separator Drawings
2.2.1
2.2.2
Basic size
Foundations
Interconnection and
7
7
8
Circuit Diagrams 9
2.3.1 Cable List 9
2.3.2 Standard Equipment
Interconnection Diagram 11
2.3.3 Standard Equipment
Interconnection Diagram
(Cont.) 12
2.3.4 Optional Equipment
Interconnection Diagram 13
• 2.3.5
2.3.6
Heatpac Control
(Electric Heater)
Heatpac Control
14
•
(Steam Heater) 15
2.3.7 separator Starter
Interconnection Diagram;
13-25Amp 16
2.3.8 separator Starter Circuit
Diagram; 13 - 25 Amp 17
2.3.9 Combined Separator
and Pump Starter Interconn.
Diag; 13 - 25 Amp 18
2.3.10 Combined Separator
and Pump Starter Circuit
Diagram; 13 - 25 Amp 19
1810489-02
1 Technical Data
1.1 Separation System
Separator LOPX 710 SFD-34
• Application Cleaning of all types of lubricating oil used

for marine and power diesel engines.
•
Separation temperature Cross-head engine 90°C
Trunk Piston engine 95°C
Capacity Rated capacity 21100 l/hr

Detergent
Cross-head engine 6550 l/hr
Trunk Piston engine 4850 l/hr
Operating water Pressure 150 - 600 kPa

Temperature 5 -85°C
Maximum density 1000kg/m3
Maximum hardness 180 ppm (CaC0 3 10 °dH)
Minimum pH value 6
• Compressed air
Salinity
Pressure
maximum 60 ppm chloride
(equivalent to 100 ppm NaCI)
650-800kPa
• Free from oil

Dry with dew point at least 10°C
below ambient temperature
Sludge production 5 litres per discharge
Maximum water
consumption 5 litres per discharge
Maximum back pressure 250kPa
1810489-02 1
1 Technical Data LOPX 710 System Reference
1.2 Separator
50Hz 60 Hz
Speed Drive motor 1420 - 1500 rpm 1700 -1800 rpm
Bowl spindle max. 5175 rpm 5148 rpm

Rev. counter 118 -125 rpm 142 -150 rpm
Gear ratio 69:20 60: 21
Torque Jp reduced to motor shaft 90 kg m2 62 kg m2
Miscellaneous Starting time

Stopping time with brake
3 - 4 minutes
4-7 minutes
•
Maximum operating time
without oil feed
Sump lubrication oil
Motor power (min.)
Power consumption:
180 minutes
12 litres
12 kW
•
maximum at start up 16 kW
maximum operating 7kW
Bowl data Sludge and water space 6.3 litres
Manufacturing materials Frame lower and upper cast iron
•
Frame hood silumin
Bowl shell stainless steel
Other process parts bronze, brass and
stainless steel
2 1810489-02
2 Drawings
2.1 Mounting Drawings
•
•
•
•
1810489-02 3
-1>0
I~
t\)
,~.. ....
•
r-------------~--Il~
- r.. . . ~~"""4~ ....
•
~
-
Qj
01
~
~
I: I' ~-~~
---i!---~~ MY1
~
o B B
o 0
~
~
"
"
3:
0
C
::J
I~'
-~_..............................................JO_-_-_-_......-_J
'"
Q
"
"
~
1 ,L_"
I'
",I
=
::J
~
LS l 1~ I ---------l 2
CC
~ c
0'I
I EPC--400 l-
~
~
:. , I
Ir-ll r='lI ii1
~I ! I !l ~_J
III d
xs __
C "
;-_-b " ~.
'(i 1r~,I "'no
::J
N
L "
CC
'"
E
,, ,,
r r~----Ti-i
11 I
\ 1
) :r=====.. :i "
jS K
m
I. RV1 1111
11 .Ii! JT1
I, - 1
~
I
1
'1 ljl
JI1
1• I
- - -1 .
u== r----~
I"
1 ~
I I,
I,
I1 J..:..n..-_-_~ .g==,
!J::.3r"'_~..<r~.#.#.J:r.2'~"".zr
- ...."iI
I I,"
~
. PI n
I~
P 0
5"tJ
":. '50"1"-- -~- ®-
~
'i • ll~ n X
I PI cpv"
i i "'-I
I
1 ' n
, r-,
I, PI
LiMi-~I-------'--------
L" ~ ~
o
F i i L_J ~================a=======~
-It-- 209
I " PS42 CIl
® ®® RV4
~
~
r_,:a
III
3
CD
~
·t--0--~ L_" :0
~
I . H (il
8 :l
£
LOPX 710 System Reference 2 Drawings
Legend
-='> Flow
201 Oil inlet JIS 40A 10K
206 Conditioning and displacement water
209 Oil Recirculation to tank JIS 40A 10K
220 Oil outlet JIS 40A 10K
222 Sludge discharge outlet, JIS 100A 5K
371 Operating water pH value not below 6pH,
•
hardness max 100 dH 15D-600 kPa
(1,~ bar), Salinity max 60ppm Cl
(equivalent to 100 ppm NaCI )
H high pressure G 3/4 internal
llow pressure G 3/4 internal
•
372 Opening water
376 Closing water
463 Bowl casing drain
501 Operating air, Cu-pipe 06/04 650·800 kPa
A Starter/Combined starter
B Operating water tank with/without level
switch
C Protection device, emergency stop box
0 Flow control equipment
E Vibration switch
F Max. deviation from vertical 30°
G Max. 3 m AthwarthShips
•
H Separator
I Max. 15 m Fore and Aft
J Thennometer kit
K Temperature sensor kit
• - - - Not included in standard delivery

===: Optional equipment
1810489-02 5
2 Drawings LOPX 710 System Reference
Basic Equipment
Item DesCription Qty. Article no.
1 Separator LOPX 710 SFD-34 1 881243-0~2
2 EPG-400 control unit 1 31830-6228-2
3 Emergency stop 1 1763946-01
4 Water transducer, WT-200 1 3183D-1nD-4
5 Flange connection JIS 40A 1 1762567-83

10K
•
6 Pressure pipe assembly JIS 1 1764780-84
40A 10K
7 Flow indicator 1 1761974-83
8 Regulating valve JIS 40A 10K 1 1762570-85
10
9
11
Change-over valve JIS 40A
10K
Solenoid valve block, water
Solenoid valve block, air

1
1
748393-84
1763455-92
1763524-80
•
13 Connecting hose 2 534115-80
14 Mounting parts 1 1765140-41
15 Connection flange JIS 40A 1 1765012-81

10K
16 Connection flange JIS 40A 1 1765013-81

10K
18 Flexible hose, water 3 1763906-02
12 - 181 Ancillary kit 1765140-21 I

•
•
6 1810489-02
2.2 Separator Drawings
.
2.2.1 Basic size
•
•
110
95
640
6 560
90 max.
• 136
o
co
•
.q-
525
Ref. 1765033 Rev. 3
All connections to be installed non-loaded.

Flexible steel hoses must not be bent; max.
centre deviation ±7 mm.
1810489-02 7
2.2.2 Foundations
r--------~ A
c
1700
min.
<ElB _._._._._.,
460
205
•
I
.
.·1·.
. . ···+17···.... I
. •
2000
'{E
,
.-. . .:.. .
+._._.-
..
1-+._l_~_· :'1- i
,':
.:
; I'
_~ ! .:...... .
I .... ·-··.. I
• I .... .. __ . _ ....- " \ '.
1 t....···
1Zoo
i E
L,....;'---f-- . _ . - .
19
Ref. 1765033 Rev. 3

11B
•
A. Min. 2200 mm when lifting bowl pans
over adjoining separator
Min. lifting capacity lOOOkg
B. Max. ht. of largest component inc!.
lifting tool
_._.- Recommended free floor space for
unloading during service
•
C. Centre of separator bowl ----- Min access area for overhead hoist
(No fIxed piping within this area)
D. 4 holes 017 for anchorage S Centre of gravity (without motor)
E. Service side B Vertical force not exceeding 20 kN/foot
F. Tightening torque 20 Nm \i!:I Horizontal force not exceeding 20 kN/foot

Secured with lock nut
8 1810489-02
2.3 Interconnection and Circuit Diagrams
2.3.1 Cable List
Standard Equipment
No. Type Connection point A instruction Connection point B Remar1ls
10 RCOP 5 x 1.5 Starter EPC-400
• 11
12
13
RCOP 1 pair 0.5
RCOP 1 pair 0.5
RCOP 1 pair 0.5
EPC-400
EPC-400
EPC-400
Alarm panel
MV 1
MV lOA
• 14
15
16
17
RCOP 1 pair 0.5
RCOP 1 pair 0.5
RCOP 1 pair 0.5
RCOP 1 pair 0.5
EPC-400
EPC-400
EPC-400
EPC-400
MV10
MV15
MV16
PS42
18 RCOP 1 pair 0.5 EPC-400 XS2
19 RCOP 2 pair 0.5 EPC-400 SSC MT4
20 RCOP 1 pair 0.5 EPC-400 PS41
Optional equipment
• XS1 Vibration switch

No. Type Connection point A Instruction Connection point B Remar1ls
•
21 RCOP 2 pair 0.5 EPC-400 XS 1
Remote operation of control unit EPC·400

No. Type Connection point A Instruction Connection point B Remar1ls
23 RCOP 2 pair 0.5 EPC-400 Remote operation switch
TT1 temperature sensor Pt1 00 for alarm

No. Type Connection point A instruction Connection point B Remar1ls
24 RCOP 2 pair 0.5 EPC-400 SSC TT 1
1810489-02 9
Supervision of externally controlled heater

No. Type Connection point A Instruction Connection point B Remarks
40 RCOP 1 pair 0,5 EPC-400 StarV Stop Heater
41 RCOP 1 pair 0,5 EPC-400 Heater fault
42 RCOP 1 pair 0.5 EPC-400 Remote operation switch
44 RCOP 1 pair 0.5 EPC-400 Steam shut off
Heatpac EHS control

No. Type
40 RCOP 4 pair 0.5
Connection point A Instruction Connection point B
EPC-400 Heatpac power unit
Remarks
•
•
42 RCOP 1 pair 0.5 EPG-400 Remote operation switch
43 RCOP 4 pair 0,5 EPG-400 SSC TT2/TT1
Heatpac SHS control

No. Type Connection point A Instruction Connection point B Remarks
40 RCOP 2 pair 0,5 EPC-400 SRV 1
41 RCOP 1 pair 0,5 EPG-400 Heater fault
42 RCOP 1 pair 0,5 EPG-400 Remote operation switch
43 RCOP 4 pair 0.5 EPC-400 SSC TT2/TT 1
44 RCOP 1 pair 0.5 EPC-400 Steam shut off
Other equivalent and approved cables may be used.

Where SSC is indicated it should be a signal shielded cable with the shield properly
connected to earth as shown in the electrical drawings.
•
For other connections armoured cable may be used provided the armour is connected to
earth as shown in the electrical drawings.
•
10 1810489-02
2.3.2 Standard Equipment Interconnection Diagram
,00'J=::h,,<I-;:;-J
,0-'
PO\\ER SUPPLY
;;from~.=.St",o,-,rter",-,t!!,or~S """o'.!!o!",o!..., ----{ 10 '1--'--11
'0-2
10-1 <48 VAC+ 10l1 50/60 Hz
10-2 -1SX
~o-~ STOP OF SEPARATOR

0- Pot. free contoct, mox 50 V AC/OC. 1 A
10-5 PROlECllVE EARTH {PE} ,0-3-+'::::;ffiE~:::J
,D-4;
• §1~..I0_ALARl!...P~E.h..
Pot free contact. opens ot alorm " ./
I -ll-"-'
-:11'-- - . -
I 11-- 11-2
•
Mox 50 V AC/OC, 1 A -
~ (")
o
:z
;d
o
r-
e
:z
MVl (Vl)
Oil Feed ~::;] @>'---!.--JI ;~;++--[jrn -i
,."
-0
(")
....
++-OOill g
I
~::;,dl I
MVlOA ,3-'
Water Drain ® 13-2
~:::J~ ,...,
MVlO ,..., +f-ffii2J
Displacement
Water
• MVl5
Opening Water
MVl6
'O'~'S-ldf-----I1S
A"'l-c::... 5-2
~'O-I1~
' .,
'0-1 ++-OOIl
• I I
15-2~1 ~ ~
Oasing Water '0-2
.,
,
I,
I
Ref. 1763488 Sheet 1 Rev. 5
1810489-02 11
2.3.3 Standard Equipment Interconnection Diagram (Cont.)

I
EXTRA ALAR~ ~~---ll
-- -~ /',-
,'f~
r~I!--
Replaces jumper
when used ---11- - - , .,/ - 1+
~_-
--- ,
n.. ---~
I,
,~:::~~~:::
PS 41
tfKjlh pressure
L ___ .:J '

n.. I,
---~
l:~17-'jl •
PS 42
Low pressure
__17-~!J ®
I,
~ 1~17-'
I I 17-2
I,
)(52
Emergency Slop
Separator I~~::~:JH ®
I,
I, n~,a-l
i 1&-2
("")
0
z
:;:j
0
r
C
Z
•
L~:::_j
(Special slop
I•
~
-l
sequence) I"T1
"U
("")
1
To !\torter for
~.rator
I, ~
0
0
I,
I,
-.
~
~T4
'~';~,
, ,
I,
I
av
PE
1XD
RXD -
- .
.
...,en
'"
I::l
•
•
Water Transducer
I 1~1 ,0-'
NOm
11-2 1"\
,....
'0-2
L_~_'I~
Shield connected 10-<
only in transducer
L _
12 1810489-02
2.3.4 Optional Equipment Interconnection Diagram
XS1
VIBRATION SWITCH
Replaces XS2
Emergency Slop
•
IlEMQlL
CQNmOL UNIT
PUSH-BUnON
FUNCTIONS
START/STOP
DISCHARGE INIT.
• ALARM ACK.
IT 1 (Algrm)
Temp. sensor
2 x PI 100
I---~
,~:1::~1
I ~24-2
'
II-+---{
(For 2-wlre conn. I ~ I
se. dwg. 1764441) ~__ -.::J

I
SUPERVISION OF -
EXT. CONmOllED HEATER
- - -l '
I
r,-
Remote START/STOP
(Input)
-42-1""",,, I
L.....-4'-'-1I-\- - ,,4~ - rltlt-~-'
I,.., n-~-,
HEATER FAULT(lnput) -41-,--41 ' ,... \..... '~IJ.-41-'- r+--mW

Jumper when not used c;..:::"-'-lI-l- -"~ - rltlt-~-'- ~
• START / STOP .
(Output 48 VAC)
~"""~~'
4D
~40-2
~:~I
'
, ,
I~
..,..,
40-2
•
STEAM SHUT-Off
(Output 48 VAC) ® :
----~ , ~
I,
I 'I~
L _
1810489-02 13
2.3.5 Heatpac Control Interconnection Diagram (Electric Heater)
1------ .if-
,
I,
HEATPAC
POWER UNIT
....., I,
see also
......
- ...... I .....,
- . ......
•
interconnection
diagram for
- ....., 11--:---{4D
n
.....
......
8elected Heater size

......
.....,,
.....
SIZE
.....,+-~X9:31
("")
o
z
::d
,o
c:
•
REMOTE z
START/STOP :::;
of heater rrl
-0
("")
I
~
o
~~'r
Temp. sensor
,43-,
43-'j=:H~~
•
2 x Pt 100
...,
4)-1 I
TT 2 (Controll , 'H
(For 2-wire conn. I 43-11-+-~
see dwg. 1764441)
.....
4J-4
TT 1 (Algrm)
~~~ ....1
I,
I,
I,
•
L ------- .1}-
14 1810489-02
2.3.6 Heatpac Control Interconnection Diagram (Steam Heater)
STEAM SHUT-OfF
(Output, 48 VAC)
SRV 1
Steam Reg. Valve
•
....2'-'--_"'",.",
(24 V AC Motor)
(mox 1,6 A)
• HEAITR FAULT
NOTE! Jumper
when not used.
("')
o
z
;;d
or-
e
z
~ --- -:. . -42-~~E ..... "- I 11-'2-1

--j
REMOTE n fT1
START/STOP ,..... - 42-2--11 - "4~ - ;- i(lt- 42-2 "tJ
Heater
I - ("')
....oI
o
I,
I,
Temp. sensor
• I"~:~
2 x Pt lOO
IT 2 (Control>
(For 2-wire conn.

see dwg. 1764441)
TT 1 (AIgrm)
•
I,
I,
• Note that conductor 2 is connected to terminel 3 C"ld I,
conductor 3 to terminal 2 in atean regulat;,g val..
L_ -If
Ref, 1763488 Sheet 5 Rev. 5
1810489-02 15
2.3.7 Separator Starter Interconnection Diagram; 13 - 25 Amp
MAINS SUPPLY
3x220 380 41S OR 440VAC SO 60Hz 1-1
1-2 :t::m;:-:
9
SELECT VOLTAGE ON TRANSFORMER T1 1-'
MAX FUSE : 63 A
t-7"--:-=~--1M E~=tt~:
SEPARATOR
MOTOR
CONTACTOR RESPONSE, SEPARATOR

POlENllAl-FREE CONTACTS:-MAX 2SOVO.SA- - - - - -
I
- If- -:..- _ - ~ ""
TiE-:. .- _- ~ - •
SYSlEMS EMERGENCY STOP"
(CONTROL VOLTAGE OFF)
TO CONTROL SYSlEM [PC -41

~
400
10-1/10-2 : CONTROL VOLTAGE 4BVAC
10-3/10-4: STOP OF SEPARATOR
-=-":!...I,
10
I
.:. . , J:
I,
}----'--il-,D-,
==
'D-l=t3;;~
ID-Z =
::::;-+---IJi
•
10-S : PROlECTIVE EARTH (PE) UJ
-i
REMOlE STOP"
SEPARATOR REMOlE START
b. =
~
- .=3'f- - ---- L- -I''rLl- ==
~,
- -
»
;;0
M
;;0
I
COVER INlERLOCK SWITCH" [,. - - ..j!... .:.... JL - -
TO CONTROL SYSlEM EPC -41 400 - --11 I It- - -
(SPECIAL STOP SEQUENCE)
~'B-'~
SEPARATOR_
EMERGENCY STOP
~18-2---i
&:=: ~~:=: ±:::j:j:H=I

I
.
z
p
•
I
I
I
•
I
I
"REPLACES JUMPER ON lERMINALS L _
Ref. 1764036
16 1810489-02
Ul .....
~
Cl
c:
.~
o
C\l
-I
CL
E
et
It)
N
I
,..
(')
£.:1
E I tOl
ABt
____ 1...1"-
1!!
Cl
.~
Q
l.:l
Ql
o
c:
Ql ~ __ L
&--~-
~
~
CC
E
Ql
~OlV~Vd3S ~- --r-
1
o ~re
.....
-
~
~ L-- ---' . .:
9 ~
2.3.9 Combined Separator and Pump Starter Interconn. Diag; 13 - 25 Amp
MAINS SUPPLY
I 1-1
3x220 380 41S OR «OVAC SO 60Hz H
SELECT VOLTAGE ON TRANSI'ORMER 11 '-3
MAX FUSE : 63 A
2-' 2-1
SEPARATOR 2-2 2-'
MOTOR 2-3 2-3
...,
....
...,
....
PUMP
.... ..., ...'"
•
MOTOR 3
CONTACTO~RESPONSE,~PARAT~ - - -
POTENTIAL FREE CONTACTS, MAX 2S0V O.SA
- - - - _-to -fII--="-
•
-=..- - -~'"
_ - ~-
CONTACTOR RESPONSE, PUMP

POTENTIAL-FREE CONTACTS;-MAX 2S0VO.5A- -
SYSTEMS EMERGENCY STOp·

(CONTROl VOLTAGE OFF)
~. -
-
- -I!...
--11
- - - -.
l-f11--=..-
-=..- - - ~ '"
.L JI- -
. U- -
_- ~ ...
-
-
•
""TO,-C",0",N""TR,=,0l=--::,SYS""",TE=M""E,-,PC""-",4,,,'e::40
"'o'=:-;,c=- -{ 1
I '0-, --r::t:mtj
°}----'--jr'O-' -t-
10-1/10-2 : CONTROL VOLTAGE 48VAC ,0-3:l==tftitj
10-3/10-4 : STOP OF SEPARATOR
,o-S : PROTECTIVE EARTH (PE)
I ~~;
SEPARATOR REMOTE STOp·

REMOTE START
b'r ----"-11-
--" - - - - - - t-. -if-,IL--I-~E
. . -- -I-'
-
COVER INTERLOO< S\\ITCH· [.. -
---11
- -I!... - - - - - ~ JI- - - bffiR
11---
TO CONTROl SYSTEM EPC -41 400
SPECIAl STOP SEQUENCE
SEPARATOR
EMERGENCY STOP
•
PUMP REMOTE STOP·
REMOTE START
~~~~-----r'
- --"
I
+==
u- - - •
I
I
I
'REPLACES JUMPER ON TERMINAlS L
Ref. 1764043
18 1810469-02
2.3.10 Combined Separator and Pump Starter Circuit Diagram; 13 - 25 Amp
•
•
I .... r"""
~ '-P-PLFJ
I~
I
•
I
• I
I
.~ .~
I~
o 0 :::; ~::l -r--ll'
I ./'~ j;:: j~j::! I
L 0 m or-
I I I I
Ref. 1764041
1810489-02 19
~~
AlfaLavaI
• . LOPX Separation System
• Installation Instructions
•
•
Printed Aug 1997
Book No. . 1810024-02 V3

•
•
•
prior notice.
•
Alfa Laval company.
S -14780 Tumba
Sweden
•



under divider 1.
Contents
1 Scope 1 7.2 Air Piping 26

7.2.1 Pipes 26
2 System Layout 3
7.2.2 Solenoid Valve Block, Air 26
3 Separator 7
8 Electrical System 27
• 4
4.1
4.2
Sludge Draining System
Sludge Tank
Sludge Piping
9
10
11
8.1
8.2
Ambient Temperature
Limitation
Mounting
27
28
• 4.3
4.4
5
Bowl Casing Drain
Sludge Tank Ventilation
Oil System
13
13
15
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
Identification
Cable Types
Power Supply
Cable Routing
28
29
30
30
5.1 Piping 17
8.7 Short Shield Connections 31
5.2 Oil Feed Line 17
5.2.1 Pump and Suction Line 17 9 Completion and
5.2.2 Heater 18 Initial Start 33
5.2.3 Change Over Valve 18 9.1 Completion Check List 33
5.3 Oil Outlet Line 19 9.2 Initial Start up 35
• 5.4 More than one Oil Tank 20 9.3 After Initial Start up 36
6 Operating Water System 21 10 Shut-down and Storage 37
6.1 Operating Water 22 10.1 Storage before Installation 37
• 6.2 Water Tank (Not applicable for

LOPX 714)
6.2.1 Tank Properties
6.2.2 Installation
22
22
23
10.2
10.3
10.4
Shut-down after use
Protection and Storage
Reassembly and Start up
38
39
41
6.3 Installation Height 23
6.4 Water Piping 24

6.4.1 Pipes 24
6.4.2 Solenoid Valve BloCk, Water 24
7 Pneumatic System 25
7.1 Compressed Air 26
1810024-02
1 Scope
These installation instructions are valid for the

• LOPX705
• LOPX 707
• • LOPX709
• LOPX 710
• •
•
LOPX 713
LOPX 714
Most of the installation instructions are

specifications, which are compulsory
requirements.
These specifications are sometimes completed

with non-compulsory recommendations,
which, if followed, will improve the
installation quality.
•
Additional installation information, such as
drawings and component installation
instructions, can be found in the following
books of this system manual:
'. • "System Reference"

Contains drawings and technical data
about the system.
• "Separator Manual"
Contains installation instructions and
drawings specific for the separator in the
chapter "Technical Reference".
• "Component Descriptions"
1810024-02 1
1 Scope LOPX Installation Instructions
Contains technical data, installation

instructions and drawings about ancillary
system equipment.
NOTE
Be sure to study all relevant

documentation supplied to become
familiar with the function and
operation of the system and each
particular unit.
•
NOTE
If safety instructions, installation

•
specifications and additional
installation information in this manual
are not strictly followed, Alfa Laval
can not be held responsible for any
•
•
2 1810024-02
2 System Layout
C c)---r--i
17 (18) 19
• 11 IIII II@]
• 5
ED-
(22)1 :;J (13)
• U
A
D
B
• A
B
C
()
Oilfeed
Cleaned and recirculated oil outlet
Operating water
D
E
Compressed air
Sludge discharge outlet
Numbers in brackets refer to units not induded in the standard delivery.

Process line, flow direction
)
Strainer Removes larger solid particles from the oil.
1
0
1810024-02 3
2 System Layout LOPX Installation Instructions

Displacement pump Feeds un processed oil to the separator.
2
Q-
Heater Heats unprocessed oil to separation temperature.
3
El Temperature transmitter Measures the oil temperature.
4 @
Pneumatically controlled Leads the unprocessed oii to the separator or back
~ •
5 change over valve to the tank (recirculation).
Separator Cleans the oil by removing water and solid

6
ZS
•
particles.
Water transducer Measures the changes of water content in the

7
€> separated oil.
Flow indicator Displays the oil flow rate.

S @-
High pressure switch Senses high pressure in the oil outlet.
9 @
Low pressu re switch Senses low pressure in the oil outlet.
10
@
®
•
11
Manually controlled Regulates the cleaned oil back pressure.

12
~ regulating valve
13
14
~
D
Non-return valve
Water tank
Stops reverse oil flow.
Contains operating water. Not applicable for

LOPX 714
•
Solenoid valve block, air Distributes compressed air to the pneumatically
~
controlled valve.
15
Solenoid valve block, water Distributes operating water, conditioning water, and
16
B displacement water to the separator.
4 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 2 System Layout

Control unit Supervises the separation system.
17
11 11
Starter Starts the separator and/or the pump.

18
11 11
Emergency stop button Initiates a controlled switch off sequence.

19
@]
Water line
• 20 ~
Flexible hose, water
Air line
Leads the operating water to the separator.
• 21
22
~
I :J
Flexible hose, oil
Sludge tank
Leads the oil.
Collects sludge and water from the separator.
•
•
1810024-02 5
3 Separator
17 (18) 19
• 11 IIIIII@]
• 5
E.(}
(22)1 :;J..
• {1
-. "'"-
A
~------------------------------'
i
• See the storage and installation instructions
and descriptions in "Technical Reference" and
"Dismantling/Assembly" in the
"Separator Manual".
1810024-02 7
4 Sludge Draining System
.• C Q...,......,...--,---i
17 (18)19
• I!:::==I==!.III!:::==I==!.II@}
• 5
• '-------------------------------------', I
• E Sludge discharge outlet
() Numbers in brackets refer to units not included in the standard deliveI)'.

Sludge tank Collects sludge and water from the separator.
22
1810024-02 9
4 Sludge Draining System LOPX Installation Instructions
4.1 Sludge Tank

Specification
The sludge tank must meet the following 2

specifications (see examples):
1
• It must be installed directly under the
separator sludge outlet.
"
"
• The volume must be at least one cubic "
'I
•
metre for each connected separator. I",
A
• The tank height (A) must not be less than 3 "
"
"
400mrn. o "~
B
• The ventilation pipe and the separator
sludge pipe must be installed according to
the instructions in .. 4.2 Sludge Piping"
and" 4.4 Sludge Tank Ventilation".
I Sludge pipe connection
2 Ventilation pi pe
3 Sludge outlet pump connection
A Min. height 400 mm
B Min. slope 150
•
Recommendation
The sludge tank should be easy to empty and

inspect.
Consider the following recommendations ..,

(see examples):
• The tank floor, or most of it, should have a 4 6 -
•
5
slope (B) of minimum 15°.
• A heating coil should be used to keep the ~ ~
sludge warm and fluid while being 7
•
pumped out.
The sludge outlet pump connection should
be positioned in the lowest part of the
tank.
~---------------1
)
"----------------1
@ ~
VB
•;;
g
0
•
• A manhole should be installed for 4 Manhole
5 Bowl casing drain connection
inspection and cleaning. 6 Water drain connection
7 High level alarm switch
• Fit the tank with a sounding pipe or a high 8 Heating coil
level alarm switch, or both.
10 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 4 Sludge Draining System
4.2 Sludge Piping

Specification
• The sludge pipe from the separator to the
sludge tank should be vertical.
• If a vertical pipe is not possible, the
deviation (A) from the vertical line must
not exceed 30°.
•
•
Maximum deviation from vertical: 30"
• • The sludge pipe must not extend below the

tank top.
• NOTE
An extended sludge pipe will obstruct

ventilation and create back pressure
that could cause separator problems.
No pipe below tank top
1810024-02 11
Recommendation
If more than one separator is connected to the

same sludge tank, a butterfly or a flap valve
should be installed in each sludge pipe.
A. If a butterfly valve is used, it should be
equipped with an interlocking switch
(connected to the separator starter) to
prevent the separator from being started
when the valve is not fully open.
•
1 Butterfly valve
2 Starter interlocking switch
3 Electric control line
B. If a flap valve is used, make sure that the

valve prevents back pressure when sludge
is discharged from another separator.
•
1
2 f---=,=---_-_-...=l2
•
1 Flapvalve
2 Maximum level
12 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 4 Sludge Draining System
4.3 Bowl Casing Drain

The bowl casing drain must be open to allow
ventilation and inspection. The water from the
bowl casing drain should be collected in a
funnel which feeds the sludge tank or a
collecting tank.
The drain pipe connected to the sludge tank \----1

must extend close to the tank floor. This is to \~--2
avoid odours from the sludge and discharge
• splash-back.
NOTE
3
• If the bowl casing drain is not open

the sludge can splash back into the
separator bowl and cause operating
problems or damage.
4 i'"
"IJ
5
I Bowl casing drain 3 Floor level

2 Funnel 4 Sludge tank
5 Drain pipe
4.4 Sludge Tank

Ventilation
• The sludge tank must be sufficiently

ventilated.
Specification
• The ventilation pipes must meet the following

specifications:
• The ventilation pipe should be straight,
but if it is impossible to install a straight
pipe, the bends must not be sharp.
• The ventilation pipe must not extend
below the tank top.
• The number and minimum dimensions of
pipes depend on size and number of the
separators connected to the tank.
1810024-02 13
See table and pictures below.
Type 1 separator 2 separators 3 separators 4 separators
LOPX 705 1 x0100mm 1 x 0100 mm 2x0100mm 2x0125 mm
LOPX 707 1x0100mm 1x0125mmor 2 x0125 mm 2 x0150 mm

LOPX 709 2x0100mm
LOPX 710
LOPX 713/714 1x0150mm 1 x0175mm 2x0150mm 2x0175 mm
• If two ventilation pipes are required,

install one at each end of the sludge tank.
•
•
• A sludge tank with partition walls must
have ventilation pipes in all
compartments.
•
------ ~ ---- --------
•
14 1810024-02
5 Oil System
CQ---:--~--1
. 17 (18) 19
• IIIIIIII@]
• 5
(13)
• '--
oA
--J
•
J
• A
B
()
Oilfeed
Cleaned and recirculated oil outlet
Numbers in brackets refer to units not included in the standard deliveI)'.

Process line. flow direction
)
0
Strainer Removes larger solid particles from the oil.
1
1810024-02 15
5 Oil System LOPX Installation Instructions

Displacement pump Feeds un processed oil to the separator.
2 ()
Heater Heats un processed oil to separation temperature.
3
Q
Temperature transmitter Measures the oil temperature.
4 @
Pneumatically controlled Leads the un processed oil to the separator or back
5
~
@
change over valve
Water transducer
to the tank (recirculation).
Measures the changes of water content in the

•
•
7 separated oil.
Flow indicator Displays the oil flow rate.

S
-0
High pressure switch Senses high pressure in the oil outlet.
9
@
Low pressure switch Senses low pressure in the oil outlet.
10
@
11
® Manually controlled Regulates the cleaned oil back pressure.
~
•
12 regulating valve
Non-return valve Stops reverse oil flow.

13
~
•
21 Flexible hose. oil Leads th e oi I.
~
16 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 5 Oil System
5.1 Piping
Specification
The correct pipe size must be used in the oil
system:
• Connection DN 25 for LOPX 705.
• Connection DN 40 for LOPX 707 -714.
The number of bends in the oil pipes must be

• minimized.
• 5.2
5.2.1
Oil Feed Line
Pump and Suction Line
Specification
To ensure optimum performance, consider the
following rules:
• The suction height must be as low as
possible.
• If the oil feed pump is positioned above 1
•
the oil tank, a foot val ve must be installed
1 Tank floor 5 Heater
close to the tank floor. 2 Foot valve 6 Tem perature transmitter
3 Strainer 7 Change over valve
• The oil feed pump must be a constant flow 4 Oil feed pump
pump.
• • The pump must be positioned close to the
oil tank.
• A strainer must be fitted in the suction line • • •• • • •• • •• B 1.5-2mm
to protect the pump from coarse particles. • ••••••••• ~ ~c--~ __
•••••
The diameter of the holes in the strainer ••••••••• ••••••
must be 1.5 - 2.0 mm. • • • • • • • • ••
•••••
• The strainer free flow area must be at least
• ••••••••••• •••
• • • • • • • • ••
35 % of total filter area. • •• ••••• ••
• • •• • • • • • •
•• • ••• •• • •
• •• •• • •
1810024-02 17
5.2.2 Heater
The heater must be installed close to the
separator to maintain correct feed oil
temperature. A temperature sensor must be
installed between the heater and the change
over valve.
5.2.3 Change Over Valve

The change over valve must be installed just
before the separator to allow oil recirculation.
The recirculation line should be connected

either directly to the oil tank or to the oil outlet
•
line from the separator.
•
•
18 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 5 Oil System
5.3 Oil Outlet Line

Specification
The oil outlet line from the separator must be

connected to the lubricating oil tank.
Components in the outlet line:

• water transducer N.B must be installed in
a vertical position.
• •
•
flow indicator
high pressure switch
- 9
•
• Iow pressure switch
• pressure gauge
• regulating valve
• non-return valve. ~=~.!..- ..J!
I Separator 6 Pressure gauge
For further information, see "Component 2 Watertransducer 7 Regulating valve
Descriptions". 3 Flow indicator 8 Non-return valve
4 Pressure switch, high 9 Oil tank
All units should be easily accessible. The flow 5 Pressure switch, low
indicator and the pressure gauge must be
visible simultaneously for adjusting the back
pressure.
• The water transducer must be installed not

more than 2 metres from the separator. It must
be installed vertically in an upstream
•
direction.
1 Water transducer
In order to keep the transducer filled with oil, 2 Pipe bend
it must be installed low with an upward pipe
bend between the transducer and the tank.
Recommendation
1
Install a drain valve close to the water
transducer to make it possible to drain the oil
if the transducer has to be removed.
'---------------''---------~
I
1 Water transducer
2 Drain valve
1810024-02 19
5.4 More than one Oil Tank

A'lf BD
Recommendation
When one separator serves more than one oil ~\7~.....

~
tank, both the suction and the outlet lines '~
should be fitted with change over valves. To ,,
avoid oil transfer from one tank to another,
these valves must be inter-linked.
~
=(), , /3
"
"
<
;;
•
~
•
A Unprocessed oil
B Separated oil
I Change over valve
2 Change over valve
3 Inter-link
•
•
•
20 1810024-02
6 Operating Water System
·.·CQ
•
17 (18) 19
11 1111
.'..:..;".,'
III~J ..
• 5
•
• C
()
Item
Operating water
Numbers in brackets refer to units not included in the standard deliveI)'.
Symbol Designation Function

Water line
Solenoid valve block, water Distributes operating water, conditioning water, and
16
8 displacement water to the separator.
Water tank Contains operating water. Not applicable for

14
D LOPX 714
20 Flexible hose, water Leads the operating water.

~
1810024-02 21
6 Operating Water System LOPX Installation Instructions
6.1 Operating Water

For water quality, including temperature and
pressure, see "System Reference".
6.2 Water Tank (Not 2

applicable for
LOPX 714)
3
6 ~
/'
'- - ./
-" ~----==C-:;'/~
.-~-
/1
\
•
I
/ I
./
6.2.1 Tank Properties
Specification 5- l r6
The operating water tank must meet the
following specification:
• Manufactured of stainless steel or other
non-corrosive material.
0IlV-
•
~
• The water volume in the tank must be at ""HIMII - 1---4
least 20 litres.
Recommendation 1 Water supply line inlet

= 5 Sight glass
2 Float valve 6 Bracket
3 Overflow and ventilation
The tank should be fitted with: 4 Water outlet shut-off valve
•
• a float valve in the water inlet
• a sight glass for level indication
• a shut-off valve
•
•
an overflow
ventilation. •
NOTE
Operating water shortage may result

in sludge discharge failure and cause
separation problems.
22 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 6 Operating Water System
6.2.2 Installation
Specification
/1
The tank installation must meet the following
specification:
• The tank must be installed close to the
ID
t -----.
.
I
~
separator(s). The maximum permitted

I B
distance between the separator and the
I
tank is 15 metres fore and aft (A) and I 2
• 3 metres athwart-ship (B). I

I
• The operating water tank can be connected I
to maximum three separators. I I
•
A •I
• Plan the installation in order to avoid air I
pockets in the pipes. I Water tank A Fore and aft
2 Separator B Athwart-ship
6.3 Installation Height

Specification
The height between tank water top level and
the separator operating water inlets must be at
•
least 2.2 and not more than 3.2 metres (A).
(Not applicable for LOPX 714)
A
The height between the solenoid valve block
and the separator operating water inlets must
• be not more than 0.5 metre (B). B
1810024-02 23
6 Operating Water System LOPX Installation Instructions
6.4 Water Piping
6.4.1 Pipes
Specification
The pipe installation must meet the following

specification:
• The pipes must be at least 3/4" and of
•
non-corrosive material.
• The pipe between the tank main outlet and
the solenoid valve block (static (low)
pressure line) should, if possible, be short
and straight.
The number of pipe bends must be
minimized to avoid air pockets and
prevent unnecessary pressure drop.
•
• If the water tank is supplying more than
one separator, the pipe size must be at
least I" instead of 3/4" (Not applicable for
LOPX 714).
Recommendation I High pressure water line 4 Strainers

2 Low pressure water line 5 Water tank
• The pipe between the water supply line 3 Shut-off valves (Not LOPX 714)
•
high pressure line) and the solenoid valve
block should be short and straight.
A shut-off valve should be installed close
to the solenoid valve block.
__ 1~----,-----11_· · · · · · · ·~=- -2\- =-· · · ·-3 ----J~
•
•
I Solenoid valve block
2 Shut-off valve
6.4.2 Solenoid Valve Block, Water 3 High pressure water pipe
See the "Component Descriptions".
24 1810024-02
7 Pneumatic System
C Q--"C'""T"""--1
17 .•. (18) ,.. . 19
• 11 .!:::::::::::::II C8J .
• 5
•
• D
Item
Compressed air
Symbol Designation Function

Solenoid valve block, air Distributes compressed air to the pneumatically
~
controlled valve.
15
1810024-02 25
7 Pneumatic System LOPX Installation Instructions
7.1 Compressed Air

The compressed air must meet the quality and
pressure specified in the "System Reference".
7.2 Air Piping
7.2.1 Pipes
Specification
The pipe installation must meet the following
specification: ~
•
•
The inner diameter of the air pipes must be
not less than 4 mm.
The material must be copper or stainless
steel.
-- e--+-- r-e-
\ \... ' /1)
.......T.".
4mm
,. •
6mm
7.2.2 Solenoid Valve Block, Air

•
•
26 1810024-02
8 Electrical System
8.1 Ambient Temperature

Limitation
Specification
• Leading classification societies state in their

regulations for engine-room equipment that
the maximum ambient temperature
• permissible is +55 qc.
Do not locate electric and electronic

components close to heat-generating
equipment
It is essential that electrical and electronic
• components have good ventilation to keep the

temperature below +55 qc.
1810024-02 27
8 Electrical System LOPX Installation Instructions
8.2 Mounting
Recommendation
The cabinet is wall-mounted. For hole
dimensions, see dimensioned drawing.
• Do not install electrical or electronic
equipment where it can be damaged by
leaking liquids.
• Connect the earth cable between the wall
and the cabinet.
n
I c::J §
~L....""'"_~-_-I Uo
•
8.3 Identification
•
Recommendation
Mark all cables clearly to simplify
identification and fault finding.
•
•
28 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 8 Electrical System
8.4 Cable Types
Specification
Follow the instructions given in the cable list.
Examples of cable types that can be used.

• Steel annoured cable.
•
• • Copper armoured cable with a separate
earth core.
• Steel armoured and shielded signal cable;

pair twisted or parallel.
•
• • Shielded signal cable; pair twisted or
parallel.
,
"- --==- -==--- -.J i
1810024-02 29
8 Electrical System LOPX Installation Instructions
8.5 Power Supply

AO~ ~
~
~
48V
Recommendation >-
So-called full transfonners (with separate
windings) are recommended to avoid the risk
of damage to e.g. noise suppression
components in electronic units.
11
•
•
A Primary phase
8.6 Cable Routing
Recommendation
Power cables carry the power supply to
motors, heaters, etc.
Any distance between signal and power cables A B

reduces electrical noise transfer.
(@@\ (@@\
Examples of recommended routing of various ~ ~
cable types.
•
A Power Cables
• Power cables and signal cables routed on a B Signal Cables
cable rack should be separated.

• If the space is limited, cables can be
routed in tubes.
30 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 8 Electrical System
8.7 Short Shield

Connections
Specification
The shields should always be connected as
shown in the installation drawings.
When making the connection to earth, it is

important that the length of the separated
•
shield is kept as short as possible to prevent
transmission of noise to the electronic
circuitry.
•
Cable gland with integrated earth connection of the
shield.
•
•
1810024-02 31
9 Completion and Initial Start
9.1 Completion Check List

It is essential before starting up the separator
system that all units are in good operating
condition and that all pipelines and control
• equipment are properly connected to assure

correct operation.
Use this check list as a guide for completing
• the system installation:

I. Compare the system with the installation
drawings.
If modifications of the recommended
layout have been made, study them
thoroughly to make sure that the principle
of the process flow has not been altered. If
in doubt, consult Alfa Laval for approval.
2. Check that transport seals are removed
from all pipes.
3. Check that all pipes are flushed clean and
• pressure tested.
4. Check that the separator corresponds with
the power frequency (50 Hz/60 Hz).
•
Running th~ se~ara~br atoversp~ed.
duetowi'ong fiequeIicywillredlice "
the safetyi'nargin c()nsiderably. ....,
1810024-02 33
9 Completion and Initial Start LOPX Installation Instructions
NOTE
If the separator has been operated at

overspeed, it could be severely
damaged.
Contact Alfa Laval before restarting.
5. Check that the mains power supply is

correct.
6. Make sure that the machines are lubricated
in accordance with the instructions. •
•
Separators are delivered without oil in the
oil sump. For information about oil filling
and oil type, see the "Separator Manual"
or the "Operating Instructions".
NOTE

Neglecting an oil change will result in

damage to separator bearings.
7. Power on.
8. Verify the direction of rotation of the bowl
•
by doing a quick start/stop (5-10
seconds). The revolution counter must
rotate clockwise. •
34 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 9 Completion and Initial Start
--------------~------
9. It is very important that the direction of

rotation during operation is correct.
..... ······DANGER
~ .. i
-Disintegration
: .hazard
. Iith~~rk~:tor~:~:te~in reverse vital·

rotating pans could unscrew.
• 10. Start the motor again and let the separator

run for about 30 seconds and then stop the
• motor.
Check for unusual sounds, obstructions,
and misalignment by listening very
carefully to the bowl rotation until it
comes to a complete standstill.
11. Check the pump function and direction.
9.2 Initial Start up

Use this check list for initial system start up:
• I. Check that there is oil in the feed oil tank.

2. Check water and air supply.
3. Check power supply to the control unit
• and that the voltage is in accordance with

data in "Component Descriptions".
1810024-02 35
9 Completion and Initial Start LOPX Installation Instructions
4. Check all parameter settings in the control

unit. See "Installation Parameters" in the
"Parameter List".
5. Run the control unit test program. See
"Alarms and Fault Finding".
6. Start the separator system as described in
"Operating Instructions".
Start up step by step, checking that the
machine and units function properly.
7. Set the clean oil outlet back pressure.
When the static back pressure does not
exceed 70 kPa (0.7 bar):
•
• adjust the back pressure to 150 kPa
(1.5 bar) (= Pnonnal)'
• set the low pressure switch to 100 kPa
(1.0 bar) (= Pswiteh), i.e. 50 kPa lower.
•
See "Pressure Switch" in the
"Component Descriptions".
If the static back pressure exceeds 70 kPa,

the settings should be increased with the
difference of actual value and 70 kPa,
according to the table:
•
Static delivery head Pnormal PswitCh
70 kPa 150 kPa 100 kPa
100 kPa 180 kPa 130 kPa
•
110 kPa 190 kPa 140 kPa
120 kPa 200 kPa 150 kPa
140 kPa 220 kPa 170 kPa
160 kPa 240 kPa 190 kPa
etc. etc. etc.
9.3 After Initial Start up

A 200 hour operating service must be
undertaken. See "Operating Check List" in the
"Operating Instructions".
36 1810024-02
10 Shut-down and Storage
10.1 Storage before

Installation
If the equipment is stored before installation,
•
these safeguards must be performed:
Storage period < 6 months > 6 months

See description in
Action Separator Ancillaries Separator Ancillaries
• Protect from dust,

dirt, water, etc.
Protect with anti-rust

oil
x x x
x
x
x
this chapter.
"Storage and installation"
in "Technical reference"
in "Separator Manual".
this chapter.
"Before shutdowns"
in "Common maintenance
instructions"
in "Separator Manual".
Intermediate Service x x "Service instructions"

(IS) after storage in "Separator Manual":
Major Service (MS) x "Service instructions"

after storage in "Separator Manual":
•
•
1810024-02 37
10 Shut-<!own and Storage LOPX Installation Instructions
10.2 Shut-down after use

If the separation system is going to be shut-
down for a period of time these safeguards
must be performed:
Shut-down period < 3 months 3 - 12 months > 12 months

(stand-by) See description in
Action Separat. Anclllar. Separat. Anclllar. Separat. Anclllar.
Remove bowl x x x "Dismantling/Assembly"
•
in "Separator Manual":
Protect from dust, this chapter.

dirt, water, etc. x x x x x x
Protect with anti- this chapter.
•
rust oil x x x x "Before shutdowns"
in "Common maintenance
instructions" in
"Separator Manual".
Intermediate Serv- "Service instructions"

ice (IS) before start x x in "Separator Manual":
up
Major Service (MS) "Service instructions"

before start up x in "Separator Manual":
•
•
38 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 10 Shut-down and Storage
10.3 Protection and Storage

All system equipment, both the separator and
the ancillary equipment, must be stored
indoors at 5 - 55°C, if not delivered in water-
resistant box for outdoor storage.
If there is a risk for condensation of water, the

equipment must be protected by ventilation
and heating above dew point.
• The following protection products are

recommended:
• Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol I 12 or equivalent)
•
with long lasting effective treatment for
external surfaces. The oil should prevent
corrosion attacks and give a waxy surface.
• Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol 40 or equivalent)
thin and lubricating for inside protection.
It gives a lubricating transparent oil film.
• Solvent, e.g. white spirit, to remove the
anti-rust oil after the shut-down.
If the storage time exceeds 12 months, the

equipment must be inspected every 6 months
and, if necessary, the protection be renewed.
• Separator
The separator must be dismantled and
•
protected. See the "Service Instructions" in
the"Separator Manual".
Electrical Equipment
Solenoid Valve Block, Water
1810024-02 39
10 Shut-<lown and Storage LOPX Installation Instructions
Valves, Pipes and Similar Equipment

• Components like valves need to be
cleaned with solvent and treated with
anti-rust oil (type 112).
• Water pipes should be drained and treated
with anti-rust oil (type 112).
• Articles made of rubber or plastics
(e.g. seals) must not be treated with
anti-rust oil.
Electric Heater
• Fill the heater with a non-corrosive
•
•
lubricating oil.
• Place a number of bags of silica gel inside
the connection box to absorb humidity.
Steam Heater
• Drain the condensed water from the steam
valve and the steam trap.
• Drain all condensed water from the heater.
• Fill the oil part of the heater with a
non-corrosive lubricating oil.
Pump
• Clean the pump housing outside from oil
and grease with solvent.
•
•
•
Protect the pump by filling it with non-
corrosive lubricating oil.
Apply anti-rust oil on the pump housing
outside.
•
Rubber Parts
• Gaskets, O-rings and other rubber parts
should not be stored for more than two
years. After this time, they should be
replaced.
40 1810024-02
LOPX Installation Instructions 10 Shut-<lown and Storage
10.4 Reassembly and

Start up
• Clean away the anti-rust oil with white
spirit.
• Remove the silica gel bags from all units.
• Follow all relevant instructions in the
"Separator Manual", the "Installation
Instructions" and the "Component
•
Descriptions" respectively.
• Before operating the heater:
• Check by lifting the safety valve handle
• that it functions correctly.

• Follow the start-up check list for the
heater in the manufacturer's
. instructions.
• For plate heat exchangers: check the
bolt connections to ensure that all
gaskets are tight.
•
•
1810024-02 41
ALFA LAVAL TUMBA AB
LOPX 710SFD·34
Separator Manual
Product No. 881243·05·02

Book No. 1270882·02 Vl
Alfa Laval
A L F A L A V A L SEPARATION
LOPX 710SFD·34
•
•
Separator Manual
•
•
Product No. 881243-05-02

Book No. 1270882-02 V1 b~ Alfa Laval
•
•
•
Alfa Laval Separation AB
Separator Manuals, dept. SKL
S-147 80 Tumba, Sweden
Telephone: +46 8 53 06 50 00
TeJefax: +46 8 53 06 50 29
•
Printed in Sweden, 96-12
© Alfa Laval Separation AB 1996

This publication or any part thereof may not be
reproduced or transmitted by any process or
means without prior written permission of
Alfa Laval Separation AB.
Contents
1 Read this first 7
2 Safety Instructions 9
3 Separator Basics 15
3.1 Basic principles of separation 16
•
3.2 Design and function 18
3.3 Definitions 27
4 Operating Instructions 29
• 5
4.1 Operating routine
Service Instructions
30
35
5.1 Periodic maintenance 37
5.2 Maintenance Logs 41
5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service (IS) 48
5.4 Check points at Major Service (MS) 65
5.5 Lifting instructions 79
5.6 Cleaning 81
• 5.7 When changing oil

5.8 Vibration
5.9 Common maintenance
85
89
91
• 6 DismantlinglAssembly
6.1 Introduction
6.2 Inlet/outlet, frame hood (IS)
95
96
98
6.3 Bowl hood and disc stack (IS) 102
3
-~------~--_._--------_.- ..
6.4 Bowl body and

operating mechanism (IS) 116
6.5 Operating water device (IS) 125
6.6 Vertical driving device (MS) 134
6.7 Horizontal driving device (MS) 148
7 Trouble-tracing 161
7.1 Mechanical functions 162
7.2 Separating functions 166
8
7.3 Vibration switch (option)
Technical Reference
169
171 •
8.1 Technical data
8.2 Basic size drawing
8.3 Water quality
8.4 Lubricants
173
175
183
184
•
8.5 Drawings 193
8.6 Storage and installation 201
Index 211
•
•
4
• , ,
STOP
• '-. ~
Study instruction manuals and observe the


serious accidents.
•
• In order to make the information clear only foreseeable conditions
have been considered. No warnings are given, therefore, for
situations arising from the unintended usage of the machine and its
tools.
5
1 Read this first
This manual is designed for operators and service

engineers working with the Alfa Laval separator
LOPX 71 OSFD-34.
For information concerning the function of the
separator, see chapter "3 Separator Basics" on
•
page 15 and chapter "8 Technical Reference" on
page 171.
If the separator has been delivered and installed
by Alfa Laval as part of a processing system, this
•
manual is a part of the System Manual. In this
case, study carefully all the instructions in the
System Manual.
Separator Manual and Spare Parts Catalogue
In addition to this Separator Manual a Spare
Parts Catalogue, SPC is supplied.
This Separator Manual consists of:
Safety Instructions
Pay special attention to the safely instructions for
the separator. Not following the safely instructions
can cause accidents resulting in damage to
• equipment and serious injury to personnel.
Separator Basics
• Read this chapter if you are not familiar with this

type of separator.
Operating Instructions
This chapter contains operating instructions for
the separator only.
7
1 Read this first
Service Instructions
This chapter gives instructions for daily checks,
cleaning, oil changes, servicing and check points.
Dismantling I Assembly
This chapter contains step-by-step instructions for
dismantling and assembly of the separator for
service and repair.
Trouble-tracing
Refer to this chapter if the separator functions
abnormally.
•
If the separator has been installed as part of a
processing system always refer to the Trouble-
tracing part of the System Manual first. •
Technical Reference
This chapter contains technical data concerning
the separator and drawings.
Index
This chapter contains an alphabetical list of
•
subjects, with page references.
8
The centrifugal separator includes parts that

rotate at high speed. This means that:
• Kinetic energy is high

• Great forces are generated
•
• Stopping time is long
Manufacturing tolerances are extremely fine.
•
Rotating parts are carefully balanced to reduce
undesired vibrations that can cause a breakdown.
Material properties have been considered
carefully during design to withstand stress and
fatigue.
The separator is designed and supplied for a
specific separation duty (type of liquid, rotational
speed, temperature, density etc.) and must not be
used for any other purpose.
Incorrect operation and maintenance can result in
unbalance due to build-up of sediment, reduction
of material strength, etc., that subsequently could
lead to serious damage and/or injury.
The following basic safety instructions therefore
•
apply:
• Use the separator only for the purpose
and parameter range specified by
Alfa Laval.
• •
•
Strictly follow the instructions for
installation, operation and maintenance.
Ensure that personnel are competent and

have sUfficient knowledge of maintenance
and operation, especially concerning
emergency stopping procedures.
• Use only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts

and the special tools supplied.
9
DANGER
~ Disintegration hazards
• Use the separator only for the purpose

and parameter range specified by
Alfa Lava!.
•
'C
• If excessive vibration occurs, stop
separator and keep bowl filled with
liquid during rundown. ~II~
• When power cables are connected, • m
•
always check direction of motor rotation.
If incorrect, vital rotating parts could
unscrew.
11l1li11
• Check that the gear ratio is correct for
power frequency used. If incorrect,
~
subsequent overspeed may result in a
" "
•
serious break down.
Welding or heating of parts that rotate
can seriously affect material strength.
1'.11
• Wear on the large lock ring thread must
not exceed safety limit. cj>-mark on lock
ring must not pass opposite cj>-mark by
more than specified distance.
• Inspect regularly for corrosion and

erosion damage. Inspect frequently if
process liquid is corrosive or erosive.
•
•
10
DANGER
~ Entrapment hazards
• Make sure that rotating parts have come IIII'iI
i~
to a complete standstill before starting
any dismantling work.
• • To avoid accidental start, switch off and

lock power supply before starting any
dismantling work.
•
• Assemble the machine completely
before start. All covers and guards must
~
be in place.
Electrical hazards -.
-
;>
• Follow local regulations for electrical
installation and earthing (grounding).
.:
WARNING
•
Crush hazards
• Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting

instructions.
• •
•
Do not work under a hanging load.
Noise hazards
Use ear protection in noisy o

environments.
11
'-------------------_._--_._-----_.-----------
CAUTION
•
Burn hazards
Lubrication oil and various machine

\\\
surfaces can be hot and cause burns.
•
Cut hazards
• Sharp edges on separator discs and lock

ring threads can cause cuts.
•
•
12
Warning signs in the text

Pay attention to the safety instructions in this
manual. Below are definitions of the three grades
of warning signs used in the text where there is a
risk for injury to personnel.
DANGER
•
Type of hazard
This type of safety instruction indicates a

situation which, if not avoided, could result in
•
fatal injury or fatal damage to health.
WARNING
Type of hazard

disabling injury or disabling damage to
health.
• CAUTION
•
Type of hazard

light injury or light damage to health.
NOTE
This type of instruction indicates a situation
which, if not avoided, could result in damage
to the equipment.
13
3 Separator Basics
Contents
3.1 Basic principles of separation 16
•
3.2 Design and function 18
3.2.1 Overview 18
3.2.2 Mechanical power transmission 19
3.2.3 Sensors and indicators 20
• 3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
Process main parts
Separating function
Sludge discharge cycle
3.3 Definitions
21
24
25
27
•
•
15
3. 1 Basic principles of separation 3 Separator Basics
3.1 Basic principles of

separation
The purpose of separation can be:
• to free a liquid of solid particles,
• to separate two mutually insoluble liquids with

different densities while removing any solids
presents at the same time,
• to separate and concentrate solid particles

from a liquid.
1 (I?
U •
Separation by gravity
A liquid mixture in a stationary bowl will clear
slowly as the heavy particles in the liquid mixture
sink to the bottom under the influence of gravity.
Sedimentation by gravity
•
A lighter liquid rises while a heavier liquid and
solids sink.
Continuous separation and sedimentation can be

achieved in a settling tank having outlets
arranged according to the difference in density of
the liquids.
Heavier particles in the liquid mixture will settle
•
and form a sediment layer on the tank bottom.
Sedimentation in a settling tank, with outlets making it
possible to separate the lighter liquid parts from the
heavier
•
Centrifugal separation
In a rapidly rotating bowl, the force of gravity is
replaced by centrifugal force, which can be "
thousands of times greater.
Separation and sedimentation is continuous and
happens very quickly. ""
The centrifugal force in the separator bowl can

achieve in a few seconds what takes many hours
in a tank under influence of gravity.
The centrifugal solution
16
3 Separator Basics 3. 1 Basic principles of separation
Separating temperatures
For some types of process liquids (e.g, mineral
oils) a high separating temperature will normally
increase the separation capacity. The
temperature influences oil viscosity and density
and should be kept constant throughout the
separation.
•
Viscosity •
Low viscosity facilitates separation. Viscosity can
• be reduced by heating.
High viscosity (with low temperature)
•
Low visCOSity (with high temperature) '.'
Density difference
•
The greater the density difference between the >.
two liquids, the easier the separation, The density

difference can be increased by heating,
• High density (with low temperature)
Low density (with high temperature)
17
3.2 Design and function 3 Separator Basics
3.2 Design and function
3.2.1 Overview
The separator comprises a processing part and a 206
driving part. It is driven by an electric motor (9). D
Mechanically, the separator machine frame is
composed of a bottom part, a top part and a
frame hood. The motor is flanged to the frame as
shown in the illustration. The frame feet (6) are
•
vibration damping.
The bottom part of the separator contains the

horizontal driving device (4), driving shaft with
.couplings (7, 8), a worm gear (5) and a vertical
•
spindle (3).
The bottom part also contains an oil bath for the 3

worm gear, a brake and a revolution counter. ,, ,
,iil 4
The frame top part and the frame hood contain ,
5
the processing parts of the separator, the inlet, -~
,
outlet and piping (1).
D
The liquid is cleaned in the separator bowl (2). I 221
This is fitted on the upper part of the vertical 9 8 7 6 222
spindle and rotates at high speed in the space
1. Inlet and outlet device
formed by the frame top part and frame hood. The
2. Bowl
bowl also contains the discharge mechanism
3. Vertical driving device with bowl spindle
which empties the sludge from the bowl. 4. Horizontal driving device
The main inlets and outlets are shown with 5. Worm gear
•
6. Frame feet
connection numbers in the illustration. These
7. Friction coupling
numbers correspond with the numbers used in
8. Elastic coupling
the connection list and the basic size drawing 9. Electric motor
which can be found in chapter "S Technical
Reference" on page 171.
•
201. Unseparated oil inlet
206. Displacement/sealing water inlet
220. Clean oil outlet
221. Water outlet
222. Sludge discharge outlet
372. Bowl opening water inlet
376. Bowl closing and make-up water inlet
18
3 Separator Basics 3.2 Design and function
3.2.2 Mechanical power

transmission
The main parts of the power transmission
between motor and bowl are illustrated in the
figure. 1------1
The friction coupling ensures a gentle start and F41::---2

acceleration and at the same time prevents
overloading of the worm gear and motor.
The worm gear has a ratio which increases the
bowl speed several times compared with the r-H----3
•
motor speed. For correct ratio see chapter "8.1
Technical data" on page 173. -----4
To reduce bearing wear and the transmission of
bowl vibrations to the frame and foundation, the
•
top bearing of the bowl spindle is mounted in a
spring casing.
The worm wheel runs in a lubricating oil bath. The .,
bearings on the spindle and the worm wheel shaft
are lubricated by the oil splash produced by the
..., 5
rotating worm wheel.

6
1. Bowl spindle
2. Top bearing and spring casing
3. Worm wheel
4. Worm
5. Friction coupling
6. Worm wheel shaft
• Brake
The separator is equipped with a brake to be
•
used when stopping the separator. The use of the
brake reduces the retardation time of the bowl
and critical speeds will therefore be quickly
passed.
The brake lining acts on the outside of the

2
coupling pulley.
(
Applying (1) and releasing (2) of brake
19
3.2.3 Sensors and indicators

Revolution counter (1)
A revolution counter indicates the speed of the

separator and is driven from the worm wheel
shaft. The correct speed is essential to achieve
the best separating results and for safety of
operation. The number of revolutions on the
revolution counter for correct speed is shown in
chapter "8 Technical Reference" on page 171.
Refer to name plate for speed particulars.
Sight glass (2)

The sight glass shows the oil level in the worm
gear housing.
Back pressure gauge (3)
•
•
1. Revolution counter
Correct limits for the back pressure in the clean oil 2. Sight glass
outlet can be found in chapter "8.2.2 Connection 3. Back pressure gauge
list" on page 177. 4. Vibration switch (option)
5. Cover interlocking switch (option)
Increasing back pressure in the clean oil outlet
can be caused by:
• restriction in the outlet piping, e.g. a buckled

or bent pipe,
• increased throughput,
• increased viscosity, decreased separating
temperature.
Vibration switch (4, option)
•
The vibration switch, properly adjusted, trips on a
relative increase in vibration.
The vibration switch is sensitive to vibration in a
direction perpendicular to its base. It contains a
vibration detecting mechanism that actuates a
snap-action switch when the selected level of
vibration is exceeded. After the switch has tripped
it must be reset manually by pressing the button
on the switch.
•
Cover interlocking switch (5, option)
When provided, the cover interlocking switch Reset push button on vibration switch
should be connected to the starter equipment so
that starting of the motor is prevented when the
separator hood is not (completely) closed.
20
3.2.4 Process main parts
Inlet and outlet device

206 ,',
.;:.... ~.
1. Oil paring disc
2. Inlet pipe
3. Displacement/conditioning water pipe
22. Paring chamber cover
Separator Bowl 22----;--wi13ii!.
• 4.
5.
6.
16.
17.
Disc stack
Large lock ring
Bowl body
Sludge space
Bowl hood seal ring
21-----+i0! InuF1H~----2
20-------,~
19-----f,~~HI
18 S[~~~!I:tJl
IIH·-\\~~ :----3
>-'11:---4
•
'",,'lA--5
18. Distributing cone 17 1
19. Distributor ....,.221
16 --+..f2I- . . ""'-'222
~I~itjlr~l
20. Bowl hood 15 ---i;:f,~l;\
21. Top disc
14~~.\\~
13-
'-----10
Discharge mechanism '------11
12
7. Sliding bowl bottom
8. Operating slide Non rotating parts are indicated by dark shading
9. Dosing ring
to. Springs and spring support
11. Distributing ring
12. Control pering disc
13. Nozzle
14. Nozzle
•
15. Drain valve plug
Connections
• 201.
206.
220.
221.
222.
372.
Unseparated oil inlet
Displacement/sealing water
Clean oil outlet
Water outlet
Sludge discharge outlet
Opening water inlet
376. Closing and make-up water inlet
21
Inlet and outlet device

The inlet and outlet device consists of the
following parts:
• The inlet (201). This comprises the pipe bend
and the long inlet pipe (2) which extends into
the middle of the bowl.
• The outlet (220). This comprises the paring
chamber cover (22) and the oil paring disc (1)
which pumps the separated oil out of the
bowl. The oil paring disc is located in a paring
chamber above the top disc (21).
The inlet and outlet device is held together by the
inlet pipe threading which is fixed to the oil paring
disc. O-rings seal the connections between the
parts.
•
The outlet connection housing is fastened to the
separator frame hood. Height adjusting rings
determine the height position of the oil paring disc
in the paring chamber.
•
Separator bowl
The separator bowl with its sludge discharge
mechanism is built-up as follows:
The bowl body (6) and bowl hood (20) are held
together by the large lock ring (5). Inside the bowl
are the distributing cone (18), the distributor (19)
and the disc stack (4). The disc stack is kept
•
compressed by the hood. The sliding bowl bottom
(7) forms an internal separate bottom in the bowl.
The sludge space (16) is the space between the
sliding bowl bottom and the bowl hood in the bowl
periphery. It is kept closed by the sliding bowl
bottom which seals against a seal ring (17) in the
bowl hood.
•
22
Sludge discharge mechanism

At intervals decided by the operator, the sliding
bowl bottom drops to empty the bowl of sludge.
The sludge discharge mechanism, which controls
the sliding bowl bottom, comprises an operating
slide (8) and an operating water device. Passive
parts are the dosing ring (9), nozzles (13, 14) and
drain valve plugs (15). The operating water
device on the underside of the bowl supplies
opening (372) and closing/make-up (376) water
to the discharge mechanism via the control paring
disc (12).
•
•
23
3.2.5 Separating function

Unseparated oil is fed into the bowl through the
inlet pipe (3) and is pumped via the distributor (5)
towards the periphery of the bowl.
When the oil reaches slots in the base of the ., .. ' ~201
distributor, it will rise through the channels formed
by the disc stack (6) where it is evenly distributed.
The oil is continuously cleaned as it travels
towards the center of the bowl. When the cleaned
oil leaves the disc stack it rises upwards, ftows
•
through slots in the top disc (4) and enters the oil
paring chamber (2). From the latter it is pumped
by the oil paring disc (1) and leaves the bowl
through outlet (220). Separated water, sludge and
solid particles, which are heavier than the oil, are
•
forced towards the periphery of the bowl and
collected in the sludge space (7) outside the disc
stack.
Separating principle
1. Oil paring disc

2. Oil paring chamber
•
3. Inlet pipe
4. Top disc
5. Distributor
6. Bowl disc stack
7. Sludge space
201. Unseparated oil, inlet

220. Clean oil outlet •
24
3.2.6 Sludge discharge cycle

When the sludge space is filled up and water
approaches the disc stack, some droplets of
water start to escape with the cleaned oil. The
small increase of the water content in the cleaned
oil must be detected and initiate a sludge
discharge cycle.
The separator discharges a fixed volume of
sludge and water. The discharge volume is
approximately 70% of the space outside the disc
stack, called the sludge space. The contents of
•
the discharge may contain some emulsified oil.
• Closed bowl (normal operation)
The sliding bowl bottom (7) is pressed upwards

by force of the closing water in the closing water
space (8) under the sliding bowl bottom which is
greater than the force of the process liquid above
the sliding bowl bottom. 1
---,-__ 7
2
The operating slide (11) is pressed upwards by 3 8
the springs (12) and the valve plugs (3) then 9
cover the drain channels (2). ~==+~ 10
6 ---11
r---- 12
'----- i
....J 0
Bowl closed (normal operation)
• 1.
2.
3.
4.
Sludge port
Drain channel
Drain valve plug
Nozzle'
• 5. Nozzle'
6. Dosing ring'
7. Sliding bowl bottom •
8. Closing water space
9. Opening chamber'
10. Closing chamber'
11. Operating slide'
12. Spring'

372. Opening water inlet·
376. Closing and make-up water inlet'
• Parts effecting a sludge discharge
25
Bowl opens for discharge

In order to avoid oil losses at discharges,
displacement water can be added through inlet
(206) prior to a discharge.
The opening water (372), which is supplied into
the space above the operating slide (11),
overcomes the force from the springs (12) and :\24--7
1
the operating slide is pressed downwards. The 2_JoS.!;
drain channels (2) open and the closing water 4
drains out through the nozzle (4). This allows the ~---11
force on the underside of the sliding bowl bottom
12 -
~
•
(7) to become lower than the force on the upper
side. The sliding bowl bottom moves downwards L- ---'8
and the bowl opens for a discharge through the Bowl opens for discharge
sludge ports (1).
Bowl closes after discharge

After some hundredths of a second the opening
chamber (9) above the operating slide (11) has
been filled by water leaving the closing water
•
space (8). This water overflows through channels 2
in the operating slide down to the closing 12'8"?4--7
3 8
chamber (10) between the operating slide and
dosing ring (6). When also this chamber has been
filled, the hydraulic forces directed up- and
6--.!'~
f~~~~=1~11
I!
downwards on the operating slide are equal and
12 "~
the springs (12) move the operating slide L- ---'8
upwards.
Bowl closes after discharge
The drain channels (2) are closed by the drain
valve plugs (3) and the increasing force from the
closing water (376) presses the sliding bowl
bottom (7) upwards. The bowl closes and the
sludge discharge cycle is complete. •
Bowl closing water is supplied during the sludge
discharge sequence and at intervals during the
separation sequence to replace evaporated
water.
Closing and opening water are supplied from the

•
high pressure water system.
26
3 Separator Basics 3.3 Definitions
3.3 Definitions
Back pressure Pressure in the separator outlet.
Clarification Liquid/solids separation with the intention of separating particles, normally

solids, from a liquid (oil) having a lower density than the particles.
Counter pressure See Back pressure.
Density Mass per unit volume. Expressed in kg/m 3 at specified temperature, normally
at 15 QC.
Gravity disc Disc in the bowl hood for positioning the interface between the disc stack and
the outer edge of the top disc. This disc is only used in purifier mode.
• Interface Boundary layer between the heavy phase (water) and the light phase (oil) in a
separator bowl.
Intermediate Service Overhaul of separator bowl, inlet/outlet and operating water device. Renewal
• (IS)
Major Service (MS)
Sediment (sludge)
of seals in bowl inlet/outlet and operating water device.
Overhaul of the complete separator, including bottom part (and activities
included in an Intermediate Service, if any). Renewal of seals and bearings in
bottom part.
Solids separated from a liquid.

.
Sludge discharge Ejection of sludge from the separator bowl.
Throughput The feed of process liquid to the separator per unit time.
Expressed in m3/h or lit/h.
Viscosity Fluid resistance against movement. Normally expressed in centistoke
(cSt = mm 2 /sec), at specified temperature.
•
•
27
4 Operating Instructions
Contents
4.1 Operating routine 30

4.1.1 Ready for start 30
•
4.1.2 Start 31
4.1.3 Running 32
4.1.4 Normal stop 33
4.1.5 Safety stop 34
•
•
29
4. 1 Operating routine 40peraffnglnstrucffons
4.1 Operating routine

These operating instructions are related only to
the separator itself. If the separator is a part of a
system or module follow also the instructions for
the system.
4.1.1 Ready for start

To achieve the best separation results the bowl
should be in a clean condition.
1.
2.
Check that the bolts of the frame hood are
fully tightened.
Check that all inlet and outlet connections •
•
have been correctly made and properly
tightened.
CAUTION 6
Check for leakages (not admitted)
Burn hazards
Make sure that hose connections and flange

couplings are properly assembled and
tightened.
Escaping hot liquid can cause burns.
•
3. Check that the oil level is exactly in the
middle of the sight glass.
NOTE
During running the oil level should be slightly
below the middle of the sight glass.
Too much or too little oil may damage the
bearings.
•
Check the oif level
Fill if necessary. See chapter "8.4 Lubricants"

on page 184, for a list of recommended oils.
30
4 Operating Instructions 4. 1 .Operating routine
4. Make sure that the brake is released.
4.1.2 Start
Release the brake
1. Start the separator.
2. Check the direction of rotation of the bowl.
• The revolution counter should turn clockwise.
DANGER
• Disintegration hazards
When power cables have been connected,

always check direction of rotation. If
incorrec~ vital rotating parts could unscrew. Check for correct direction of rotation
3. Check the separator for vibration. Some

1111111
vibration can occur for short periods during
the starting cycle, when the separator passes ~
through its critical speeds. This is normal and
passes without danger. Try to learn the
11.-.11
vibration characteristics of the critical speed
pattern.
IT
•
R •
Check for vibration
DANGER
•
Disintegration hazards
If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator

and keep bowl filled with liquid during
rundown.
The cause of the vibration must be identified
and rectified before the separator is
restarted. Excessive vibration may be due to
incorrect assembly or insufficient cleaning of
the bowl.
In the trouble-tracing chapter "7.1.1 Separator

vibrates" on page 162, a number of causes are
described that can create vibration.
31
4. 1 Operating routine 4 Operating Instructions
4. Check, if possible, the current consumption of

the motor starter to ensure that the separator A ...
has reached full speed.
At full speed the starter ammeter reading has
decreased from a high starting value to a low
steady value.
The time to reach full speed may not exceed
the limit given in chapter "8.1 Technical data"
Current increases when the coupling engages...
on page 178.
5. When running normally, open the closing
water valve (connection 376) for A
•
approximately 5 seconds to close the bowl.
4.1.3
1.
Running
Check that the feed has the correct flow and
temperature. See chapter "8 Technical
Reference" on page 171 for correct values.
... to decrease to
been reached
a stable value when full speed has
•
2. Adjust the oil outlet pressure to 1,5 bar.
3. Discharge by opening the valve tor opening
water (connection 372) until a discharge is
heard. For max. and min. time for discharge
intervals, see chapter "8 Technical
Reference" on page 171.
DANGER
Disintegration hazards •
Ensure that correct discharge intervals and
cleaning procedures are used.
Unbalance due to improper washing out of
solids may lead to contact between rotating
and non-rotating parts.
•
32
4 Operating Instructions 4. 1 Operating routine
4. For daily condition checks, see "5.2.1 Daily

checks" on page 41.
4.1.4 Normal stop

1. Carry out a sludge discharge before stopping
the separator. Otherwise the bowl must be
cleaned manually before the next start up.
The volume of the discharged sludge must be
compensated for by additional feed.
•
2. After discharge, turn off the feed and stop the
separator with the bowl filled with liquid.
3. Apply the brake.
•
The final action, apply the brake
•
•
33
4. 1 Operating routine 4 Operating Instructions
4.1.5 Safety stop
DANGER
Entrapment hazards
Make sure that rotating parts have come to a

complete standstill before starting any
dismantling work. The revolution counter and The separator must not be dismantled before
the motor fan indicate if the separator parts standstill
•
are rotating or not.
1. If the separator begins to vibrate excessively

during operation, stop it immediately by
pushing the safety stop; the separator motor
is switched off.
Keep the bowl filled during the run-down to
minimize excessive vibration.
' - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - '.1
2. Evacuate the room. The separator may be
hazardous when passing its critical speeds
Push the safety stop if excessive vibration
during the run-down.
DANGER
Do not discharge a vibrating separator.

Out-of-balance vibration can become worse
if only part of the sediment is discharged.
•
CAUTION
•
After a safety stop the cause of the fault must
be identified.
" all parts have been checked and the cause

remains unclear, contact Alfa Laval for
advice.
34
5 Service Instructions
Contents
5.1 Periodic maintenance 37 5.4 Check points at Major Service (MS) 65

5.1.1 Introduction 37 5.4.1 Bowl hood seal ring 65
•
5.1.2 Maintenance intervals 37 5.4.2 Bowl spindle cone and bowl
5.1.3 Maintenance procedure 39 body nave 65
5.1.4 Service kits 40 5.4.3 Bowl spindle; height position 65
5.4.4 Bowl spindle; radial wobble 66
• 5.2 Maintenance Logs 41 5.4.5 Brake 66

5.4.6 Buffer springs and ball bearing
5.2.1 Daily checks 41
housing 67
5.2.2 Oil change 41
5.4.7 Coupling friction pads 69
5.2.3 Intermediate Service (IS) 42
5.4.8 Corrosion '.-. 70
5.2.4 Major Service (MS) 44
5.4.9 Cracks 70
5.2.5 3-year Service (3S) 47
5.4.10 Disc stack pressure 70
5.4.11 Dosing ring 70
5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service 5.4.12 Erosion 70
(IS) 48 ~
5.4.13 Flexible plate in coupling' 71
5.3.1 Bowl hood seal ring 48
5.4.14 Guide surfaces 72
5.3.2 Bowl spindle cone and bowl
5.4.15 Inlet pipe and oil paring disc 72
body nave 49
5.4.16 Lock ring; priming 73
5.3.3 Corrosion 49
• 5.3.4
5.3.5
5.3.6
Cracks
Disc stack pressure
Dosing ring
52
53
55
5.4.17
5.4.18
5.4.19
5.4.20
Lock ring; wear and damage
Oil paring disc; height position
Operating mechanism
Operating paring disc; height
75
75
75
•
5.3.7 Erosion 55
position 75
5.3.8 Guide surfaces 57
5.4.21 Operating slide 76
5.3.9 Inlet pipe and oil paring disc 59
5.4.22 Sliding bowl bottom 76
5.3.10 Lock ring; wear and damage 60
5.4.23 Springs for operating mechanism 77
5.3.11 Operating mechanism 61
5.4.24 Worm; wear of groove 77
5.3.12 Operating slide 62
5.4.25 Worm wheel and worm; wear
5.3.13 Sliding bowl bottom 62 of teeth 77
5.3.14 Springs for operating mechanism 63 5.4.26 Worm wheel shaft; radial wobble 78
5.3.15 Worm wheel and worm; wear 5.4.27 Cover interlocking switch (option) 78
of teeth 63
5.4.28 Vibration switch (option) 78
5.3.16 Cover interlocking switch (option) 64
5.3.17 Vibration switch (option) 64
35
5 Service Instructions
5.5 Lifting instructions 79
5.6 Cleaning 81
5.6.1 External cleaning 81
5.6.2 Cleaning agents 82
5.6.3 Cleaning of bowl discs 83
5.6.4 CIP-system 84
5.7 When changing oil 85

5.7.1 Worm wheel and worm; wear
•
of teeth 85
5.7.2 Oil change procedure 88
5.8 Vibration 89
5.8.1
5.8.2
5.9.1
Vibration analysis
Vibration switch (option)
5.9 Common maintenance

Ball and roller bearings
89
90
91
91
•
5.9.2 Before shutdowns 94
•
•
36
5 SeN~elnstrucuons 5.1 Periodic maintenance
5.1 Periodic maintenance
5.1.1 Introduction
Periodic (preventive) maintenance reduces the
risk of unexpected stoppages and breakdowns.
Follow the maintenance logs on the following
pages in order to facilitate the periodic
maintenance.
• DANGER
• Separator parts that are either worn beyond

their safe limits or incorrectly assembled may
cause severe damage or fatal injury.
5.1.2 Maintenance intervals

The following directions for periodic maintenance
give a brief description of which parts to be
cleaned, checked and renewed at different
maintenance intervals.
The maintenance logs for each maintenance
interval later in this chapter give detailed
•
enumeration of the check points that must be
done.
Daily checks consist of minor check points to
carry out tor detecting abnormal operating
• conditions.
Oil change
The oil change interval is every 1000-1500 hours
or at least once every year if the total number of
operating hours is less than 1000-1500 hours.
When using a group D oil, time of operation
between oil changes can be extended from the
normal 1000-1500 hours to 2000 hours.
37
5.1 Periodic maintenance 5 Service Instructions
Intermediate Service (IS)

Intermediate Service consists of an overhaul of
the separator bowl, inlet/outlet and operating
device every 3 months or 2000 operating
hours. Seals in bowl and gaskets in inlet/outlet
device are renewed.
Major Service (MS)

Major Service consists of an overhaul of the
complete separator and includes an Intermediate
•
Service every 12 months or 8000 operating
hours. Seals and bearings in the bottom part are
renewed.
3-year Service (3S)

3-year Service consists of renewing the frame
feet. The feet get harder with increased use and
age. Intermediate and Major services are also
carried out.
•
Periodic maintenance schedule
ai/ change ~.
Intermediate Service = IS
Major Service = MS
3-year Service = 3S
35
.••••• • ••• • ••• ••• • •••

MS MS MS
IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS
~
•
Installation 1st year 2nd year 3rd year
38
5 Service Instructions 5.1 Periodic maintenance
5.1.3 Maintenance procedure

At each Intermediate and Major Service, take a
copy of the maintenance log and use it for
notations during the service.
An Intermediate and Major Service should be
carried out in the following manner:
1. Dismantle the parts as mentioned in the
maintenance log and described in chapter "6
Dismantling/Assembly" on page 95.
Place the separator parts on clean, soft
• 2.
surfaces such as pallets.
Inspect and clean the dismantled separator
parts according to the maintenance log.
•
3. Fit all the parts delivered in the service kit
while assembling the separator as described
in chapter "6 Dismantling/Assembly" on page
95. The assembly instructions have
references to check points which should be
carried out before and during the assembly.
•
•
39
5. 1 Periodic maintenance 5 SeNice Instructions
5.1.4 Service kits

Special service kits are available for Intermediate
Service (IS) and Major Service (MS), as well as
for servicing the frame feet (3S).
For other services the spare parts have to be
ordered separately.
Note that the parts for IS are not included in the

MS kit.
The contents of the service kits are described in Kits are available for Intermediate Service, Major
Service and for servicing the frame feet
the Spare Parts Catalogue.
NOTE •
•
Always use Alfa Laval genuine parts as
otherwise the warranty will become invalid.
Alfa Laval takes no responsibility for the safe

operation of the equipment if non-genuine
spare parts are used.
DANGER
Use of imitation parts may cause severe
•
damage.
40
5 Service Instructions 5.2 Maintenance Logs
5.2 Maintenance Logs
5.2.1 Daily checks

The following steps should be carried out daily.
Main component and activity Part Page Notes
Inlet and outlet

Check for leakage Connecting housing -
• Separator bowl
Check for vibration and noise
Horizontal driving device

89
• Worm wheel shaft and gear casing

Check for vibration and noise
Check Oil level in gear housing

89
30
.
-
-
-.11 •.
"'P"
Electrical motor
1)
Check for heat, vibration and noise
1) See manufacturer's instruction
5.2.2 Oil change

The oil change and check of worm gear should be carried out every 1000-1500a) hours of operation.
• Note: In a new installation, or after replacement of gear, change the oil and clean the gear housing
after 200 operating hours.
Page Notes
•
Main component and activity Part

Worm wheel shaft and gear housing
Check Worm wheel and worm 85

Renew Oil b) in gear housing 88
When the separator is running for short periods, the lubricating oil must be changed every 12 months even if the
total number of operating hours is less than 1000-1500 hours (2000 h).
a)
When using a group D oil, time of operation between oil changes can be extended from the normal 1000-
1500 hours to 2000 hours.
b)
See chapter "8,4 Lubricants" on page 184 for further information.
41
5.2 Maintenance Logs 5 Service Instructions
5.2.3 Intermediate Service (IS)

Name of plant: Local identification:
Separator: LOPX 71 OSFD-34 Manufacture No.lYear:
Total running hours: Product No: 881243-05-02
Date: Signature:

Inlet and outlet
Clean and inspect
Separator bowl
Threads of inlet pipe
Connecting housing
59
-
•
Clean and check Lock ring
Bowl hood
Top disc
Oil paring disc
60
48
-
59
•
Bowl discs 83
Distributor -
Distributing cone -
Sliding bowl bottom 62
Bowl body -
•
Bowl spindle cone and bowl 49
body nave
Operating mechanism 55,61
62,63
Check Corrosion
Cracks
Erosion
Galling of guide surface
49
52
55
58
•
Disc stack pressure 53
Renew O-rings and sealings -
Operating device
Clean and check Operating paring disc -
Renew O-rings -
42

Renew Oil in gear housing 88
Electrical motor
Lubrication (if nipples are fitted) See sign on motor -
Signs and labels on separator
• Check attachment and legibility Safety label on hood

Direction of rotation arrow
198
198
•
Power supply frequency 198
Monitoring equipment (option)
Function check Vibration switch 64
Cover interlocking switch 64
Note: Renew all parts included in the Intermediate

Service kit (IS).
•
•
43
5.2 Maintenance Logs 5 SeN~elnstrucuons
5.2.4 Major Service (MS)
Name of plant: Local identification:

Separator: LOPX 710SFD-34 Manufacture No./Year:
Total running hours: Product No: 881243-05-02
Date: Signature:
Main component and activity

Inlet and outlet
Clean and inspect
Part
Threads of inlet pipe

Page
59
Notes
•
Separator bowl
Clean and check
Connecting housing
Lock ring
Bowl hood
-
73,60
48
•
Top disc -
Oil paring disc 59
Bowl discs 83
Distributor -
Distributing cone -
•
Sliding bowl bottom 62
Bowl body -
Bowl spindle cone and bowl 49
body nave
Check
Operating mechanism
Corrosion
Cracks
55,61
62,63
49
52
•
Erosion 55
Galling of guide surface 58
Disc stack pressure 53
Height position of oil paring 75
disc
Renew a-rings and sealings -
44
5 Servkelnstrucffons 5.2 Maintenance Logs

Operating device
Clean and check Operating paring disc -
Check Height position of operating 75
paring disc
Renew Q-rings -
Vertical driving device
Clean and check Bowl spindle -
• Wear of groove in worm

Buffer springs and ball bearing
housing
77
67
•
Height position of bowl spindle 65
Radial wobble of bowl spindle 66
Renew Spindle bearings and o-rings 134
Radial wobble of worm wheel 78
shaft
Axial play of flexible plate 71
Renew Bearings. o-rings and sealings 148
•
Oil in gear housing 88
Brake
Clean and check Spring and brake shoe 66
• Renew
Friction coupling
Clean and check
Renew
Friction pad
Worm wheel coupling
Friction pads
66
-
69
Electrical motor
Lubrication (if nipples are fitted) See sign on motor -
45
5.2 Maintenance Logs 5 SeNice Instructions

Signs and labels on separator
Check attachment and legibility Safety label on hood 198
Direction of rotation arrow 198
Power supply frequency 198
Monitoring equipment (option)
Function check Vibration switch 64
Note: Renew all parts included in the Intermediate

Service kit (IS) and Major Service kit (MS)
•
•
•
•
46
5.2.5 3-year Service (3S)

The 3-year service should be carried out in
conjunction with a Major Service (MS). The extent
of the 3-year service is the same as for a major
service plus renewing of parts included in the
3-year Service kit (3S).
NOTE
Renew all parts included in the Intermediate
•
Service kit (IS), Major Service kit (MS) and
3-year Service kit (3S).
The 3S kit consists among other parts of vibration
• dampers for renewal of frame feet. How to renew

the frame feet is described below.
Frame feet, renewal

1. Disconnect pipes, hoses and cables
connected to the separator.
2. Remove the nuts (3, 4). 1
3. Lift the separator.
NOTE
2
•
When lifting a separator it must always hang
securely. See separate instruction in chapter
"5.5 Lifting instructions" on page 79.
• 4.
5.
6.
Renew the vibration dampers (1, 2).
Lower the frame. Check that the bolts do not
press against the edges of the holes.
Tighten the nut (3) to 20 Nm.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Vibration damper, upper
Vibration damper, lower
Nut
Lock nut
7. Hold the nut (3) firmly and secure with the

lock nut (4).
8. Connect the previously disconnected pipes,

hoses and cables.
47
5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service (IS) 5 Servicelnstrucffons
5.3 Check points at

Intermediate Service
(IS)
5.3.1 Bowl hood seal ring

Poor sealing between the bowl hood seal ring and
the sealing edge of the sliding bowl bottom will
cause a leakage of process liquid from the bowl.
Renew the bowl hood seal ring at each
Intermediate Service (IS).
•
Max. permitted indentation of the seal ring is 1 mm
•
Knock out the old ring by means of a pin inserted
in the holes intended for this purpose.
•
Fit the new ring as follows:
Press the ring into the groove with a straight
Removal of the seal ring
•
wooden board placed across the ring.
NOTE
If the new ring is too narrow, place it in hot
water (70-80 CC) for about 5 minutes.
If it is too wide, it will shrink after drying at

8D-90 cC for about 24 hours. Fitting of the seal ring
48
5 Serv~elnstrucljons 5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service (IS)

body nave
Impact marks on the spindle cone or in the bowl

body nave may cause poor fit and out-of-balance
vibrations.
The bowl spindle and the nave should also be
checked if the bowl spindle has been dismantled
or if the bowl runs roughly.
Corrosion may cause the bowl to stick firmly to
• the spindle cone and cause difficulties during the

next dismantling.
• .Remove any impact marks with a scraper
and/or whetstone.
• Rust can be removed by using a fine-grain emery

cloth (e.g. No. 320).
Finish with polishing paper (e.g. No. 600).
NOTE
Always use a scraper with great care. The
cone shape must not be deformed.
•
Remove impact marks from the nave and cone
5.3.3 Corrosion
•
Evidence of corrosion attack should be looked for
and rectified each time the separator is
dismantled. Main bowl parts such as the bowl
body, bowl hood and lock ring must be inspected
with particular care for corrosion damage.
DANGER
Inspect regularly for corrosion damage.

Inspect frequently if the process liquid is
Main bowl parts to check for corrosion
corrosive.
49
5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service (IS)
Always contact your Alfa Laval representative if

you suspect that the largest depth of the
corrosion damage exceeds 1,0 mm or if cracks
have been found. Do not continue to use the
separator until it has been inspected and given
clearance for operation by Alfa Lava!.
Cracks or damage forming a line should be
considered as being particularly hazardous.
Non-stainless steel and cast iron parts
•
Corrosion (rusting) can occur on unprotected
surfaces of non-stainless steel and cast iron.
Frame parts can corrode when exposed to an
aggressive environment.
Stainless steel
Stainless steel parts corrode when in contact with
either chlorides or acidic solutions. Acidic
solutions cause general corrosion. The chloride
•
corrosion is characterised by local damage such
as pitting, grooves or cracks. The risk of chloride
corrosion is higher if the surface is:
• Exposed to a stationary solution. Example of chloride corrosion in stainless steel

• In a crevice.
• Covered by deposits.
•
• Exposed to a solution that of low pH value.
Corrosion damage caused by chlorides on
stainless steel begins as small dark spots that
can be difficult to detect.
50
5 Serv~elnstrucffons 5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service (IS)
1. Inspect closely for all types of damage by

corrosion and record these observations
carefully.
2. Polish dark-coloured spots and other
corrosion marks with a fine grain emery cloth.
This may prevent further damage.
Polish corrosion marks to prevent further damage

DANGER
• Pits and spots forming a line may indicate

cracks beneath the surface.
All forms of cracks are a potential danger
• and are totally unacceptable.
Renew the part if corrosion can be suspected

of affecting its strength or function.
.~.
Other metal parts

Separator parts made of materials other than
steel, such as brass or other copper alloys, can
also be damaged by corrosion when exposed to
an aggressive environment. Possible corrosion
damage can be in the form of pits and/or cracks.
•
•
51
5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service (/S) 5 Service Instructions
5.3.4 Cracks
Cracks can initiate on the machine after a period
of operation and propagate with time.
• Cracks often initiate in an area exposed to

high cyclic material stresses. These are
called tatigue cracks.
• Cracks can also initiate due to corrosion in an
aggressive environment.
• Although very unlikely, cracks may also occur
due to the low temperature embrittlement of
certain materials.
The combination of an aggressive environment
and cyclic stresses will speed-up the formation of
cracks. Keeping the machine and its parts clean
•
and free from deposits will help to prevent
corrosion attacks.
DANGER
•
All forms of cracks are potentially dangerous

as they reduce the strength and functional
ability of components.
Always replace a part if cracks are present.
It is particularly important to inspect for cracks in

rotating parts and especially the pillars between
the sludge ports in the bowl wall. •
Always contact your Alia Laval representative if
you suspect that the largest depth of the damage
exceeds 1,0 mm. Do not continue to use the
separator until it has been inspected and cleared
for operation by Alia Laval.
•
52
5 Serv~elnstrucuons 5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service (IS)
5.3.5 Disc stack pressure
NOTE
Ensure that the disc stack pressure is
sufficient to maintain bowl balance.
Insufficient pressure in the disc stack can
cause vibration and reduce lifetime of ball
bearings.
• The lock ring (1) should press the bowl hood (2)
firmly against the bowl body (3). The hood in turn
should exert a pressure on the disc stack (4),
clamping it in place.
• 1. Lock ring
2. Bowl hood
3. Bowl bOdy
4. Disc stack
Compress the disc stack by tightening the lock

ring, see chapter "6.3.3 Assembly" on page 110.
Correct pressure is obtained when it is possible to
tighten the lock ring so far by hand that the -
«l-mark on the lock ring is positioned 60° - 90°
before the mark on the bowl body.
To achieve this, add an appropriate number of
discs to the top of the disc stack beneath the top
•
disc.
Then advance the lock ring by giving the spanner
handle some blows till the «l-marks are passed
and the bowl is fUlly assembled. t-marks on bowl body and lock ring in line
• If the «l-marks do not reach or pass each other,

the reason could be an incorrectly assembled
bowl or too many discs in the disc stack.
Reassemble and check.
53
5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service (/S) 5 SeNice Instructions
Complementary check using the compressing

tool
With the large lock ring correctly tightened and
the compressing tool mounted on the separator
bowl, turn the lever to position 1 for compression.
Compress the disc stack by pumping the

horizontal handle arm until the oil pressure is
released through the relief valve.
Measure the height (H 1) of the piston rod (see
illustration) with the slide calliper depth gauge.
Make a note of the reading obtained. Measure of disc stack pressure with use of a
Release the pressure in the compressing tool by

turning the lever to position O. The piston rod will
now move downwards slightly when the disc set
is released inside the bowl.
compressing tool
•
Measure once again the height (H2) of the piston
rod with the slide calliper and make a note of the
reading obtained.
If the difference between H1 and H2 is less than
1,5 mm, the disc stack pressure is correct. If it
•
exceeds 1,5 mm, the number of discs is
insufficient. Add one or more discs and repeat the
above procedure until the correct disc stack
pressure is obtained.
NOTE
•
An insufficient number of discs will create an
imbalance causing vibration.
54
5 Serv~elnstnJcilons 5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service (IS)
5.3.6 Dosing ring

Clean the nozzles (1) with a soft iron wire and
polish the surface (2) with steel wool.
./
Inspect the surface (3) in contact with the
operating slide. Remove any marks with a
whetstone or fine emery cloth (grain size 240).
• 1.
2.
Nozzles
Surface inside the dosing ring
• 5.3.7 Erosion
Erosion can occur when particles suspended in
the process liquid flow along or strike against a
surface. Erosion can become intensified locally
3. Surface in contact with the operating slide
Max. 1 mm
by flows of higher velocity.
DANGER Max. permitted erosion
Inspect regularly for erosion damage. Inspect
•
frequently if the process liquid is erosive.
Always contact your Alfa Laval representative if
•
the largest depth of any erosion damage exceeds
1,0 mm. Valuable information as to the nature of
the damage can be recorded using photographs,
plaster impressions or hammered-in lead.
Erosion is characterised by:
• Burnished traces on the material.
• Dents and pits having a granular and shiny
surface.
Surfaces particularly subjected to erosion are:
Surfaces particularly subjected to erosion
55
5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service (IS) 5 Service Instructions
1. The oil paring disc.

2. The top disc.
3. The pillars between the sludge ports in the
bowl wall.
4. The sealing edge of the bowl body for the
seal ring in the sliding bowl bottom.
5. The underside of the distributor in the vicinity
of the distribution holes and wings.
6. The surface of the sliding bowl bottom that
•
faces the conical part of the distributor.
7. The sealing edge of the sliding bowl bottom.
Look carefully for any signs of erosion damage.
Erosion damage can deepen rapidly and
consequently weaken parts by reducing the
thickness of the metal.
DANGER
•
Erosion damage can weaken parts by

reducing the thickness of the metal.
Pay special attention to the pillars between
the sludge ports in the bowl wall.
Renew the part if erosion is suspected of
affecting its strength or function.
•
•
56
5 Serv~elnstrucffons 5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service (/S)
5.3.8 Guide surfaces

Check surfaces indicated (1 and 2) for burrs or
galling. Rectify when necessary. 1
Repair of galling on guide surfaces; see following
pages. Before fitting the sliding bowl bottom,
clean (do not degrease) the contact surfaces (1).
Apply Alfa Lavallubricating paste or Molykote 1---
1000 Paste with a well-cleaned brush on surfaces
(1 and 2). Sliding bowl bottom
• NOTE
To avoid the risk of galling, the contact
surfaces (1) should be primed with a slide
•
lacquer at every Major Service (MS).
The slide-lacquered surfaces will be
destroyed if the surfaces are degreased.
Bowl body
Lubricate the O-ring and the seal ring with

silicone grease making sure they are not
damaged and properly seated in their grooves.
• 2
Operating slide
• Dosing ring
1,2= Alfa Lavallubricatlng paste or

Molykote 1000 Paste.
57
Repair of galling on guide surfaces
Galling (friction marks) may appear on guide
surfaces in the operating system, the bowl body
and the sliding bowl bottom. Surfaces subject to
repair are indicated by an arrow.
The example below describes the repair of the

lower guide surface of the bowl body nave.
Guide surface in the bowl body
Recommended tools for correction of galling:

- Emery cloth, 240 grade.
- Small power drill
- Degreasing agent.
- Fibre brush, 025mm.
•
•
- Fibre brush, 0 50 mm.
- Very fine single-cut file.
1. Clean the surface thoroughly with a

degreasing agent, i.e. white spirit. This is
important.
2. If the galling is excessive, first use the fine

single-cut file. The file should be used with
caution so that the damage is not made
worse.
( .....
•
Remove the high spots on the surface. Do not
use rotating files or similar. Remove the high
spots only - not the undamaged material.
•
58
5 Service Instructions 5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service (/S)
3. An emery cloth of 240 grade should be used

to smooth the edges and to remove any
burnt-in foreign matter.
---------~
'--_-----''---~~
~
.....Jg
4. Finish off by polishing the damaged spot with
•
the fibre brushes and brush wax. It is
recommended that the whole area where
galling may occur is polished. Polishing will
help smooth the whole of the damaged area,
•
even in the deepest parts.
Prime the repaired area with lubricating spray

Molykote 321 R. Read the correct procedure
under checkpoint "5.4.16 Lock ring; priming" on
page 73. Apply Alfa Laval lubricating paste or
Molykote 1000 Paste to the surface after priming.
5.3.9 Inlet pipe and oil paring disc

Damage to the threads and the top surface of
level ring may cause the paring disc to scrape
against the paring chamber cover even if the
~
oF
height has been adjusted correctly. ~
-
•
Screw the inlet pipe into the paring disc and
check that the inlet pipe turns easily.
~~
C·='::J
• Check the threads of the inlet pipe and oil paring disc
59
5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service (IS) 5 Service Instructions
-_.=...::...:..:-~~-----=--.:.:-=--.::....:=.-----=-=-~~------_-.:~=--.:..-..=-=-. ----------
5.3.10 Lock ring; wear and damage

Excessive wear or impact marks on threads,
guide and contact surfaces of the lock ring, bowl
hood and bowl body may cause hazardous
1
galling.
Check the thread condition by tightening the lock
ring (1) after removing the disc stack and bowl
hood O-ring (2) from the bowl.
DANGER
c: •
•
Wear on large lock ring thread must not
1. Lock ring
exceed safety limit. The <jl-mark on lock ring 2. Q-ring for the bowl hood
must not pass opposite <jl-mark by more than
the specified distance.
In a new bowl the alignment marks on the lock

ring and the bowl body are exactly opposite each
other.
If thread wear is observed, mark the lock ring at '1

/.
the new position of the alignment mark on the . I
bowl body by punching in a new mark. I
If the original <jl-mark on the lock ring passes the

<jl-mark on the bowl body by more than 25°
•
(which corresponds to A=100 mm), an Alfa Laval
representative must be contacted immediately.
If the marks become illegible. an Alia Laval

representative should be contacted immediately
•
to inspect thread wear and for determining the
The q,-mark on the lock ring must not pass the q,-mark
position of new alignment marks.
on the bowl body by more than 25"
60
5 SeNice Instructions 5.3 Check points at Intermediate SeNice (IS)
Damage
The position of the threads, contact and guide
surfaces are indicated by arrows in the
illustration.
Clean the threads, contact and guide surfaces
with a suitable degreasing agent.
Check for burrs and protrusions caused by
impact. WatCh your fingers for sharp edges.
If damage is established, rectify using a
whetstone or fine emery cloth (recommended
•
grain size 240).
If the damage is considerable, use a fine single-
cut file, followed by a whetstone.
• Clean and check thread. contact and guide surfaces

of the lock ring __
5.3.11 Operating mechanism { ".
Dirt and lime deposits in the operating

mechanism may cause poor discharge function or
no function at all.
Clean and polish surfaces with steel wool if 1
necessary.
• Reasons for dirt or deposits:

• Hard or unclean operating water. Change
water supply or install a water softener or a
•
fine filter.
• Sludge has been sucked down into bowl _ _------,..P;;;;--2
casing and into the operating system. Check
the installation and the venting system of both 3
the sludge tank and bowl casing drain.
1. Bowl body
2. Valve plug
3. Operating slide
4. Nozzles
5. Dosing ring
61
5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service (/S)
5.3.12 Operating slide

Poor sealing between the valve plugs on the
operating slide and bowl body may prevent
complete closing of the bowl.
Examine the sealing surfaces (1) of the bowl body

in contact with the valve plugs. Remove any
marks and lime deposits with a very fine grain
emery cloth.
Check the guiding surface (2) in contact with the
dosing ring. Remove any marks with a whetstone
(grain size 240).
1. Bowl body sealing surfaces in contact with the •

•
valve plugs
2. Operating slide guide surface in contact with the
dosing ring
Remove all the valve plugs. Tap in the new plugs.

Correct height of plugs: 13,4 mm.
•
I
611 1• - JTIIIIIT _. .
Tap in new valve plugs

5.3.13 Sliding bowl bottom
Poor sealing between the bowl hood seal ring and
the sealing edge of the sliding bowl bottom will
cause a leakage of process liquid from the bowl.
Check the sealing edge of the sliding bowl
bottom. If damaged either through corrosion or
Min 1.5 mm
•
erosion or other means, it can be rectified by
turning in a lathe. Maximum permissible reduction
of the original profile height (2,0 mm) is 0,5 mm.
NOTE
Never reduce the height outside the sealing
edge to reach the minimum profile height. Min. height of the profile on sliding bowl bottom
62
5 Service Instructions 5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service (IS)
If the seal ring for the sliding bowl bottom is to be

renewed, turn the sliding bowl bottom upside
down and inject compressed air through the hole
on the underside. This will press the ring
outwards far enough to be gripped easily.
WARNING
Risk for eye injury
•
Wear safety goggles. Removal of the seal ring in sliding bowl bottom using
compressed air
5.3.14 Springs for operating
• mechanism
Defective or broken springs may prevent
complete closing of the bowl.
Renew those springs which differ from other
springs in regard to length or are defective in
other respects.
• Check for defective or broken springs
• 5.3.15 Worm wheel and worm;

wear of teeth
As described in "5.7.1 Worm wheel and worm;
wear of teeth" on page 85 in this chapter.
63
5.3 Check points at Intermediate Service (/S)
5.3.16 Cover interlocking switch

(option)
When the button is pushed, check that the brown
and blue wires are short-circuited and the two
black wires are open circuit.
Check also the reverse when the button not

pressed.
See the illustration for exact measurement when
the button is operated
•o Contact closed
Contact open •
•
BK Black
BN Brown
BU Blue
GN-YW Green-Yellow
Measurements for operation range of the cover

interlocking switch button
5.3.17 Vibration switch (option)
NOTE
•
•
Before carrying out the function check
described below, check that a safety stop will
not cause serious interruption of the
operation.
Knock on the vibration switch cap a number of

times within one second (the number is decided
Vibration switch
by the system parameter settings). If the switch
functions correctly, the separator will perform a
safety stop.
How to adjust the setpoint is described in chapter
"5.8.2 Vibration switch (option)" on page 90.
64
5 Service Instructions 5.4 Check points at Major Service (MS)
5.4 Check points at

Major Service (MS)
5.4.1 Bowl hood seal ring

As described in "5.3.1 Bowl hood seal ring" on
page 48.
• body nave
As described in "5.3.2 Bowl spindle cone and
bowl body nave" on page 49.
• 5.4.3 Bowl spindle; height

position
If the bowl spindle has been removed, its height
position relative to the frame ring must be
checked.
,--...c=========::r--iA
• Place a steel rule across the frame ring.
Measure the distance between the spindle
top and the underside of the steel rule with a
depth gauge or rule.
• The distance (A) should be 24 ±1 mm.
•
• The height position is adjusted by adding or
removing height adjusting rings inside the
bottom bearing housing.
• NOTE
Before starting adjustment, tap the spindle
top a few times with a soft hammer to ensure
that the bottom bearing of the spindle is
properly seated in the bottom bearing
Measurement of the bowl spindle height (A)
housing.
65
5.4 Check points at Major Service (MS) 5 Service Instructions
5.4.4 Bowl spindle; radial wobble

The bowl spindle wobble should be checked if the
bowl spindle has been dismantled or if rough bowl
running (vibration) occurs.
NOTE
Spindle wobble will cause rough bowl
running. This leads to vibration and reduces
lifetime of ball bearings.
Check the wobble before mounting the bowl.

Before measuring, make sure that the buffer
plugs are properly tightened. •
•
•
Fit a dial indicator in a support and fasten it to
the frame.
Remove the brake cover to get access to the

~
~
~
':'~~:'
"Gl> "
•
Cll~~ ~
coupling drum. Use the coupling drum to
revolve the spindle manually.
\!
•
•
Measure the wobble at the top of the tapered
end of the spindle. Permissible radial wobble
is maximum 0,04 mm.
If wobble is too large, renew all the ball

if': : I
"
'I
;I
,I
1
,I
I1
\~
I,
"
d 11
bearings on the spindle.
i:
11 "
~I
Measure wobble after assembly. If it is still '1
" "
,\
11 l'
excessive, the spindle is probably damaged and !l 1'1 \
•
must be renewed. Measurement of the radial wobble
5.4.5 Brake
A worn or oily friction pad will lengthen the
braking period.
If the friction pad is worn:
• Remove the screws and exchange the friction

•
. pad.
NOTE
The screws are slotted at both ends.
\ \
The brake friction pad is fastened with screws
66
If the friction pad is oily:
• Clean the friction pad and the coupling drum

with a suitable degreasing agent.
• Roughen the friction surface of the friction
pad with a coarse file.
NOTE
Identify the cause of oily friction pad. If oil is
leaking from the gear housing, renew the
c
sealing ring between the two parts. '----------"-----'-----_----.!11
• Checking of spring and brake shoe:

Actions when the friction pad is oily
• Rust on brake parts may cause the brake to jam.

•
•
Remove any rust from the surface (1) of the
brake shoe and the corresponding guide
surface in the cap (2).
Rub in Molykote Paste on the surfaces.

_t.-::. I '.:,
(21
• Rennewplace the spring (3) if it has become '(3)
weak. This is indicated by chattering of the
'~ -----'~==~ )"

spring when the brake is in released position.
• Oil the spring when assembling. !

'----- _"O
1. Contact surface on the brake shoe for the spring

2. Guide surface in the cap for the brake shoe
3. Spring
• 5.4.6 Buffer springs and ball

bearing housing
Weakened or broken buffer springs or defective
•
contact surfaces for the buffers on the ball
bearing housing may give rise to separator
vibration (rough bowl running).
Sectional view of ball bearing hOUSing
67
Top bearing springs
In case of spring failure, the complete set of

springs should be renewed, even if only one
spring is affected.
~
6 - -2
~ 3
4 ~
I~
•
•
'----- U-"=''---
1. Ball bearing housing
2. Radial buffer
3. Buffer spring
4. Screw plug
Ball bearing housing
Examine the contact surface for the buffers on the

ball bearing housing. In case of defects
(indentations deeper than 0,5 mm), renew the
housing as well as buffers and springs.
~iMax,o'5mm •
"
•
Max. permitted indentations made by radial buffers
68
5.4.7 Coupling friction pads

Worn or oily pads in the coupling will cause a long
I{r ~.
acceleration period.
-",:/-
If the separator does not attain full speed within

about 10 minutes or if the bowl loses speed ,
during operation, the friction pads of the coupling
may be worn or oily.
Check the pads. If the pads are oily:
• Clean the pads and the inside of the coupling
drum with a suitable degreasing agent. Location of coupling friction blocks
• Roughen the friction surfaces of the pads with

a coarse file.
If the pads are worn:
•
• Remove the screws and renew the pads.
NOTE
The screws are slotted at both ends. A friction block is fixed with screw. spring washer and
holding bracket
Renew all pads even if only one is worn.
How to renew friction pads without dismantling

horizontal driving device:
• Remove the brake cap.

• Undo the screws of the holding brackets.
•
• Remove the holding brackets and friction
blocks.
I
• Remove the screws and renew the pads.
• Unscrew the holding bracket screws to remove the

friction blocks
Three screws fix the friction pad to the friction block
69
5.4 Check points at Major SeNice (MS) 5 Service Instructions
---~-----=----------'-"'---------_._----
Different friction blocks for different power

supply frequencies
If fitting new friction blocks, check that the blocks
~~
are correct for the power supply frequency. The
dimension A is different for 50 and 60 Hz
separators.
50 Hz:
60 Hz:
A = 20 mm
A = 5,5 mm
L ___+' , -.-J
Dimension A is different for 50 and 60 Hz installations

The thickness does not include the friction pad.
5.4.8 Corrosion
As described in "5.3.3 Corrosion" on page 49. •
5.4.9 Cracks
As described in "5.3.4 Cracks" on page 52.
•
5.4.10 Disc stack pressure
As described in "5.3.5 Disc stack pressure" on
page 53.
5.4.11 Dosing ring

As described in "5.3.6 Dosing ring" on page 55.
5.4.12 Erosion
•
As described in "5.3.7 Erosion" on page 55.
70
5 SeNice Instructions 5.4 Check points at Major Service (MS)
5.4.13 Flexible plate in coupling

The axial play (1) of the flexible plate should be
approximately 2 mm. = /
=
-I (
1
----"='- _ i
•
L-
Location of the axial play (1) in the flexible coupling
Check the play as follows:
• Measure the distance from the frame ring to the

coupling disc of the separator.
Measurement of distance for coupling in separator

frame
• Measure the distance from the motor coupling

disc to the motor flange.
•
X mm - Y mm = 2 mm.
If required, adjust the position of the motor

coupling disc.
~/-
"!T===d
<=
Measurement of distance for coupling on motor
71
5.4.14 Guide surfaces

Check surfaces indicated (1) for burrs or galling.
Rectify when necessary. 1:::::::::::p) 1
Repair of galling on guiding surfaces, see "5.3.8
Guide surfaces" on page 57.
Treat the guide surfaces with slide lacquer in the
1--
following way:
1. Mask the nave hole of the bowl body. Slide Sliding bowl bottom
lacquer must not enter this hole.
2. Carefully degrease the contact surfaces (1)
between the sliding bowl bottom and bowl
body. Dry the surfaces well.
3. Apply slide lacquer Molykote D321 R with a
•
well cleaned brush. Protect the surfaces
which should not be treated.
4. Air-cure the treated surfaces for 15 minutes.
5. Use a smooth fibre brush to polish to an
even, homogeneous contact film.
6. Apply slide lacquer a second time.
7. Air-cure the lacquer for a further 15 minutes.
8. Polish the film to a shiny surface. The film
should look like well-polished leather when
properly finished.
9. Finish the treatment by lubricating the contact Bowl body

surfaces (A) with Alia Laval lubricating paste
or Molykote 1000 Paste. Use a well-cleaned
brush. Rub it into the surface, do not leave
any excess paste.
10. Lubricate the O-ring and the seal ring with
1 = ~ At major service •
silicone grease and check that they rest
properly in their grooves.
J Alfa Lavallubricating paste or

Molykote 1000 Paste •
/ Slide lacquer
(Molykote '0 321 R) Paste
5.4.15 Inlet pipe and oil paring disc

As described in "5.3.9 Inlet pipe and oil paring
disc" on page 59.
72
5.4.16 Lock ring; priming

The arrows indicate positions of threads, guide
and contact surfaces to be primed.
Recommended agents for priming procedure:
• Degreasing agent
• Lubricating spray Molykote 321 R
• Small power drill
• 2 fibre brushes
• Threads. guide and contact surfaces to be primed
1. Clean the lock ring thoroughly with a
•
degreasing agent and wipe it off.
2. Spray the threads, gUide and contact
•
surfaces with slide lacquer Molykote 321 R. 'U~
~--~ ~"'-
Let the lacquer air-cure for about 15 minutes.
• ~-_~/
~~ I1
73
3. Use a
into
fib~erf~~~
the s I '
The black
ther when
sprapYe~y
sh to polish the slideilllacquer
pro
look like
finished.
well-polished ea
4. Spray
dry
he lock ring a second time and let it
for tabou t 15 minutes.
~-.
•
/~,~~
•
~~~
Polish the slide lacqu:~ast about a year.
Ih~d,
to a black shiny
5. "ri,re "'lch w,II 00 ""Ih Ih, ':
Proceed in the sadm:i~~~e guide surfaces 0
the bowl body and bowl body.
the bowl hood an
•
•
74
5 Serv~elnstructions 5.4 Check points at Major Service (MS)
5.4.17 Lock ring; wear and damage

As described in section "5.3.10 Lock ring; wear
and damage" on page 60.
5.4.18 Oil paring disc; height

position
The height position of the oil paring disc (1)
should be checked if the bowl spindle has been
removed or the bowl has been replaced.
• • Assemble the bowl completely and put the

frame hood in place and tighten it to the
frame ring.
•
• Measure the distance A according to the
figure. The distance should be 19,5 ±O,5 mm.
• Adjust the distance by adding or removing
height adjusting rings (2).
With inlet and outlet parts mounted:

• Revolve the worm wheel shaft by hand. If it
turns heavily or if a scraping noise is occurs,
incorrect height adjustment or wrong fitting of
the inlet pipe may be the cause.
Measurement of distance A
1. Oil paring disc
2. Height adjusting rings
•
5.4.19 Operating mechanism
As described in section "5.3.11 Operating
mechanism" on page 61.
• 5.4.20 Operating paring disc;

height position
If the bowl spindle has been removed or the bowl
has been replaced, the height position of the
operating device relative to the bowl spindle top
must be checked.
Templet supported on the spindle top
75
5.4 Check points at Major Service (MS) 5 Serv~elnstrucffons
o The operating paring disc device should be

assembled and fitted.
o Support the templet on the spindle top with

the measurement indication 177,3 lacing the
spindle.
o There should be a small gap between the

lower end of the templet and the upper side of
the paring disc, otherwise the paring disc
position is too high.
o Turn the templet so that the measurement

indication on the other side (178,3) faces the
o
spindle and the templet lower end supports
on the paring disc.
There should be a small gap between the
templet tongue and the spindle top, otherwise
•
o
o
the paring disc position is too low.
The height position is adjusted by adding or
by removing height adjusting rings (1) under
the distributing cover.
After adjustment rotate the spindle. If a
Templet supported on the operating paring disc
•
scraping noise occurs, re-adjust.
The height position can be adjusted with height
•
adjusting rings (1)
5.4.21 Operating slide
As described in section "5.3.12 Operating slide"
on page 62.
5.4.22 Sliding bowl bottom

As described in section "5.3.13 Sliding bowl
bottom" on page 62.
•
76
5.4.23 Springs for operating

mechanism
As described in "5.3.14 Springs for operating
mechanism" on page 63.
5.4.24 Worm; wear of groove

Renew the worm if the wear in the groove (1)
which receives the conveyor exceeds 3-4 mm.
•
If renewing the worm, it is recommended to renew
also the worm wheel, see "5.7.1 Worm wheel and
worm; wear of teeth" on page 85
• 5.4.25 Worm wheel and worm;

Measurement of wear in groove (1)
., .
wear of teeth
As described in section "5.7.1 Worm wheel and
worm; wear of teeth" on page 85.
•
•
77
5.4 Check points at Major Service (MS)
5.4.26 Worm wheel shaft; radial

wobble
Excessive wobble on the worm wheel shaft may
cause vibration and noise.
Clamp a dial indicator in a magnetic support and

fasten it to the surface for the worm wheel guard.
Turn the worm wheel shaft by hand.
Permissible radial wobble is maximum 0,10 mm.
If the wobble is greater, the worm wheel shaft
must be removed from the frame for closer o
examination. Get in touch with your Alfa Laval
representative as the worm wheel shaft may need
to be renewed.
•
•
Measurement of the radial wobble

•
(option)
As described in "5.3.16 Cover interlocking switch
(option)" on page 64.
•
As described in "5.3.17 Vibration switch (option)"
on page 64.
78
5 Service Instructions 5.5 Lifting instructions
5.5 Lifting instructions

Attach three endless slings or cables to the lifting
eyes (the screws must be tightened with
spanner).
The circumferense of each sling must be min. 2
metres.
NOTE
Machine weight without frame hood and bowl
•
is approx. 850 kg.
Do not lift the separator unless the frame hood
•
and bowl have been removed.
WARNING
Crush hazards
Use only the three special lifting eyes

(M16) for lifting the machine. They are to be
screwed into the special threaded holes
normally covered by the frame hood.
Other holes are not dimensioned for lifting
the machine. Lift the separator with the frame hood and bowl
removed
•
A falling separator can cause accidents
resulting in serious injury to persons and
damage to equipment.
79
5.5 Lifting instructions 5 Servicelnstrucffons
When lifting the bowl, use the special lifting tool

fastened on the bowl hood.
Max 12mm
NOTE
Check that the lock ring is properly tightened.
The height of the lock ring above the bowl
body must not exceed 12 mm, see
illustration.
Weight to lift is approx. 300 kg.
•
When lifting the bowl out of the separator
frame, the cap nut fixing the bowl to the bowl The lock ring must be properly tightened when lifting
spindle and the screws fixing the bowl body the bowl
to the operating water device must first be
removed.
•
•
80
5 Serv~elnstrucffons 5.6 Cleaning
5.6 Cleaning
5.6.1 External cleaning

The external cleaning of the frame and motor
should be restricted to brushing, sponging or
wiping while the motor is running or is still hot.
Never wash down a separator with a direct water
stream. Totally enclosed motors can be damaged
by direct hosing to the same extent as open
•
motors and even more than those, because:
• Many operators believe that these motors are

sealed, and normally they are not.
~"
•
• A water jet played on these motors will '-- ---3,0
produce an internal vacuum, which will suck Never wash down a separator with a direct water
the water between the metal-to-metal contact stream or playing a water jet on the motor
surfaces into the windings, and this water
cannot escape.
• Water directed on a hot motor may cause

condensation resulting in short-circuiting and
internal corrosion.
Be careful even when the motor is equipped with
a protecting hood. Never play a water jet on the
ventilation grill of the hood.
• Use a sponge or cloth and a brush when cleaning
81
5.6 Cleaning 5 Service Instructions
5.6.2 Cleaning agents

When using chemical cleaning agents, make sure
you follow the general rules and suppliers'
recommendations regarding ventilation,
protection of personnel, etc.
For separator bowl, inlet and outlet

A chemical cleaning agent must dissolve the
deposits quickly without attacking the material of
the separator parts.
• For cleaning of lube oil separators the most
important function of the cleaning agent is to
be a good solvent for the gypsum in the
sludge. It should also act as a dispersant and
•
emulsifier for oil. It is recommended to use
Alia Laval cleaning liquid for Iube oil
separators which has the above mentioned
qualities. Note that carbon steel parts can be
damaged by the cleaning agent if submerged
for a long time.
----
~f"~~=ir· •
CAUTION
Skin irritation hazard Alfa Laval cleaning liquid for lube and fuel oil
separators
Read the instructions on the label of the
plastic container before using the cleaning
liquid.
Always wear safety goggles, gloves and
protective clothing as the liquid is alkaline
and dangerous to skin and eyes.
•
For operating mechanism
Use 10% acetic acid solution to dissolve lime
•
deposits. The acid should be heated to 80°C.
For parts of the driving devices

Use white spirit, cleaning-grade kerosene or
diesel oil.
82
5 Service Instructions 5.6 Cleaning
Oiling (protect surfaces against corrosion)

Protect cleaned carbon steel parts against
corrosion by oiling. Separator parts that are not
assembled after cleaning must be wiped and
coated with a thin layer of clean oil and protected
from dust and dirt.
5.6.3 Cleaning of bowl discs

Handle the bowl discs carefully so as to avoid
damage to the surfaces during cleaning.
• NOTE
Mechanical cleaning is likely to scratch the
• disc surfaces causing deposits to form

quicker and adhere more firmly.
A gentle chemical cleaning is therefore
preferable to mechanical cleaning.
1. Remove the bowl discs from the distributor

and lay them down, one by one, in the
cleaning agent.
2. Let the discs remain in the cleaning agent
until the deposits have been dissolved. This Put the discs one by one into the cleaning agent
will normally take between two and four
hours.
•
3. Finally clean the discs with a soft brush.
• Clean the discs with a soft brush
83
5.6 Cleaning 5 Service Instructions
5.6.4 CIP-system
Alfa Laval has developed a CIP (Cleaning-In-
Place) system specifically designed for cleaning
the bowl without the need of dismantling.
....
•
GIP unit connected to separator
•
•
84
5 Servicelnstrucffons 5.7 When changing oil
5.7 When changing oil
5.7.1 Worm wheel and worm;

wear of teeth
To check at each oil change

Check the teeth of both the worm wheel and
worm for wear.
• See the" Tooth appearance examples" on page

87. Examine the contact surfaces and compare
the tooth profiles. The gear may operate
satisfactorily even when wom to some degree.
• •
•
Replace both worm wheel and worm at the
same time, even if only one of them is worn.
To avoid damaging the teeth when lifting the
bowl spindle: push the worm wheel to one
side first. 1 Worm
.;,:;;:~=- 2
2 Worm wheel
Position the spindle in correct place before
fitting the worm wheel.
When replacing the gear, always make sure that

the new worm wheel and worm have the same
number of teeth as the old ones. See chapter "8.1
Technical data" on page 173 for correct number of
teeth.
• DANGER
• Check that gear ratio is correct for power

frequency used. If incorrect, subsequent
overspeed may result in a serious
breakdown.
Check the gear ratio (number of teeth) when replacing

the gear
NOTE
Presence of metal chips in the oil bath is an
indication that the gear is wearing
abnormally.
85
5.7 When changing oil 5 Service Instructions
Important!
When using mineral-type oil in the worm gear
housing, the presence of black deposits on the
spindle parts is an indication that the oil base has
deteriorated seriously or that some of the oil
additives have precipitated. If pitting is found on
the worm gear, the cause could be that the
additives are not suitable for this purpose.
In all these cases it is imperative to change to a
high-temperature oil.
For further information, see chapter "8.4
Lubricants" on page 184.
•
•
86
5 Service Instructions 5.7 When changing oil
Tooth appearance examples

Satisfactory teeth:
Uniform wear of contact surfaces. Surfaces are
smooth.
Good contact surfaces will form on the teeth
when the gear is subjected to only moderate load
during its running-in period.
Satisfactory teeth
Worn teeth:
•
Permissible wear is as a rule 1/3 of the thickness
of the upper part of a tooth, provided that
• the wear is uniform over the whole of the
flank of a tooth
• • and all teeth are worn in the same way.
Spalling:
Small bits of the teeth have broken off, so-called
Worn teeth
spalling. This is generally caused by excessive

load or improper lubrication. Damage of this type
may not necessitate immediate replacement, but
careful checking at short intervals is of imperative
importance.
Pitting:
•
Small cavities in the teeth, so-called pitting, can
occur through excessive load or improper
lubrication. Damage of this type need not
necessitate immediate replacement, but careful
•
check at short intervals is of imperative
importance.
Pitting
87
5.7 When changing oil 5 Service Instructions
5.7.2 Oil change procedure
NOTE
Before adding or renewing lubricating oil in
the worm gear housing, the information c
1--1---1
concerning different oil groups, handling of
oils, oil change intervals etc. given in chapter
"8.4 Lubricants" on page 184 must be well '-F=----2
known.
'---_~===--3
1.
2.
3.
Oil filling plug
Sight glass
Oil drain plug
•
1. Place a collecting tray under the drain hole,
remove the drain plug and drain off the oil.
•
CAUTION
Burn hazards
Lubricating oil and various machine surfaces Burn hazards: The drained oil may be hot
can be sufficiently hot to cause burns.
2. Fill new oil in the worm gear housing. The oil

level should be exactly in the middle of the
sight glass: •
•
Oil volume: approx. 12 litres.
For oil brands see "8.4.3 Recommended oil
brands" on page 187.
NOTE
During operation the oil level must be slightly The oil level must not be above the middle of the sight
below the middle of the sight glass. glass
If the oil level is too high, the life of the rolling

bearings will be reduced due to high
temperature.
88
5 Service Instructions 5.8 Vibration
5.8 Vibration
5.8.1· Vibration analysis

Excessive vibration or noise indicates a
malfunction. Stop the separator and identify the
cause.
Use vibration analysis instrument to periodically
check and record the level of vibration. See the
illustration where to take measurements.
• NOTE
The level of vibration should not exceed
• 11,2 mm/s at full speed.
DANGER
Measuring points for vibration analysis
If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator

and keep bowl filled with liquid during
rundown.
The cause of the vibration must be identified
and corrected before the separator is
restarted. Excessive vibration can be due to
incorrect assembly or poor cleaning of the
bowl.
89
5.8 Vibration 5 Service Instructions

Adjustment of setpoint
The vibration switch is adjusted with the separator
in operation. The cover must be removed to gain
access to the setpoint adjusting screw (1).
1. Back-off the setpoint adjusting screw counter-
clockwise (A) two or three turns. Press the
reset button. If the armature does not remain
in the reset position, turn the adjusting screw
another turn or two until the armature stays in
•
position when the reset button is pressed.
2. Now turn the adjusting screw slowly
clockwise until the armature rocks. Mark this
position with a line immediately in front-of the
•
adjusting screw pointer (2).
3. Back-off the adjusting screw counter-
clockwise a three-quarter turn. Press the
reset button. If the armature now rocks, turn
the adjusting screw counter-clockwise
another quarter turn and so on until the
armature remains in the reset position.
4. Refit the cap and fasten with the screws.
Setpoint adjustment
1. Adjusting screw
NOTE 2. Pointer
Further adjustment may become necessary if A. Direction of increased set point
(admit higher vibration)
alarm occurs due to vibration from
surrounding equipment.
90
--~------ --
5 Serv~elnstrucffons 5.9 Common maintenance
5.9 Common
maintenance
5.9.1 Ball and roller bearings

Special-design bearings for the bowl spindle 1
I ~'f:--:l.L-2
The bearings used for the bowl spindle are
3
specified to withstand the speed, vibration,
temperature and load characteristics of high-
speed separators. 4
• Only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts should be

used.
1. Outer race
A bearing appears equivalent to the genuine may
•
2. Ball/roller
differ considerably in various respects: inside 3. Inner race
clearances, design and tolerances of the cage 4. Cage
and races as well as material and heat treatment.
NOTE
Using an incorrect bearing can cause a
serious breakdown with damage to
equipment as a result.
Do not re-fit a used bearing. Always replace
it with a new.
•
Dismantling
For bearings where no driving-off sleeve is
included in the tool kit, remove the bearing from
its seat by using a puller. If possible, let the puller
•
engage the inner ring, then remove the bearing
with a steady force until the bearing bore
completely clears the entire length of the
cylindrical seat.
The puller should be accurately centred during
dismantling; otherwise, it is easy to damage the
seating.
For bearings where no driVing-off sleeve is included in

NOTE the tool kit, use a puller when removing bearings
Do not strike with a hammer directly on the
bearing.
91
5.9 Common maintenance 5 Service Instructions
------------------------
Cleaning and inspection

Check shaft (spindle) end and/or bearing seat in
the housing for damage indicating that the
bearing has rotated on the shaft (spindle) and/or
in the housing respectively. Replace the damaged
part(s), if the faults cannot be remedied by
polishing.
Assembly
• Leave new bearings in original wrapping until
•
ready to fit. The anti-rust agent protecting a
new bearing should not be removed before
use.
• Use the greatest cleanliness when handling
•
the bearings.
• To facilitate assembly and also reduce the

risk of damage, first clean and then lightly oil
the bearing seating on shaft (spindle) or
alternatively in housing, with a thin oil.
Clean and oil the bearing seating before assembly
• When assembling ball bearings, the bearings

must be heated in oil to max. 125 ·C.
NOTE
Heat the bearing in a clean container.
•
Use only clean oil with a flash point above
250 ·C.
The bearing must be well covered by the oil
and not be in direct contact with the sides or
the bottom of the container. Place the
The bearing must not be in direct contact with the
container
•
bearing on some kind of support or
suspended in the oil bath.
92
5 Service Instructions 5.9 Common maintenance
WARNING
Burn hazards
Use protective gloves when handling the

heated bearings.
• There are several basic rules for assembling

cylindrical bore bearings:
•
Never directly strike a bearing'S rings,
cage or rolling elements while
assembling. A ring may crack or metal
fragments break off.
• Never apply pressure to one ring in order

to assemble the other.
Use an ordinary hammer. Hammers with
soft metal heads are unsuitable as
fragments of the metal may break off and
enter the bearing.
Make sure the bearing is assembled at a
right angle to the shaft (spindle).
• If necessary use a driving-on sleeve that
abuts the ring which is to be assembled with
an interference fit, otherwise there is a risk
.,.',
that the rolling elements and raceways may
be damaged and premature failure may
•
follow.
• Use a driving-on sleeve for bearings that are not

heated
93
5.9 Common maintenance 5 SeNice Instructions
Angular contact ball bearings

Always fit single-row angular contact ball
bearings with the wide shoulder of the inner race
facing the axial load (upwards on a bowl spindle).
The wide shoulder of the inner race must face the
axial load
5.9.2 Before shutdowns

Before the separator is shut-down for a period of
time, the following must be carried out:
• Remove the bowl, according to instructions in
•
chapter "6 Dismantling/Assembly" on page
95.
•
NOTE
The bowl must not be left on the spindle
during standstill for more than one week.
Vibration in foundations can be transmitted to
the bowl and produce one-sided loading of
the bearings. The resultant indentations in
the ball bearing races can cause premature
bearing failure.
• Protect cleaned carbon steel parts against

corrosion by oiling. Separator parts that are
not assembled after cleaning must be wiped
and protected against dust and dirt.
• If the separator has been shut-down for more
than 3 months but less than 12 months, an
Intermediate Service (IS) has to be made. If
the shut-down period has been longer than
•
12 months, a Major Service (MS) should be
carried out.
94
6 Dismantling/Assembly
Contents
6.1 Introduction 96 6.7 Horizontal driving device (MS) 148

6.1.1 General directions 96 6.7.1 Exploded view 148
•
6.1.2 References to check points 97 6.7.2 Dismantling 150
6.1.3 Tools 97 6.7.3 Assembly 155
6.2 Inlet/outlet, frame hood (IS) 98
• 6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
Exploded view
Dismantling
Assembly
6.3 Bowl hood and disc stack (IS)

98
99
100
102 ....
6.3.1 Exploded view 102
6.3.2 Dismantling 104
•. 6.2
6.3.3 Assembly 110
6.4 Bowl body and 6.3

operating mechanism (IS) 116
6.4.1 Exploded view 116 6.4
6.5
•
6.4.3 Assembly 121
6.6
6.5 Operating water device (IS) 125
•
6.7
6.5.3 Assembly 130 ~
g
6.6 Vertical driving device (MS) 134

6.6.3 Assembly 142
95
6.1 Introduction 6 Dismantling/Assembly
6.1 Introduction
6.1.1 General directions

The separator must be dismantled regularly for
cleaning and inspection.
The recommended intervals are stated in chapter

"5.1.2 Maintenance intervals" on page 37.
DANGER
Entrapment hazard •
Make sure that rotating parts have come to a
complete standstill before starting any
dismantling work.
The revolution counter and the motor fan
indicate if separator parts are rotating or not.
•
The revolution counter indicates if the separator still is
The frame hood and heavy bowl parts must be rotating
lifted by hoist. Position the hoist directly above the
bowl centre. Use an endless sling and a lifting
hook with catch.
These parts must be handled carefully.
Do not place parts directly on the floor, but on a
clean rubber mat, fibreboard or a suitable pallet.
NOTE
•
Never interchange bowl parts
To prevent mixing of parts, e.g. in an
installation comprising several machines of
the same type, the major bowl parts carry the
machine manufacturing number or its last
•
three digits.
96
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6.1 Introduction
6.1.2 References to check points

In the text you will find references to the Check
point instructions in chapter 5. The references
appear in the text as in the following example:
tI Check point
"5.3.5 Disc stack pressure" on page 53.
In this example, look up check point Disc stack
pressure in chapter 5 for further instructions.
•
6.1.3 Tools
Special tools from the tool kit must be used for
dismantling and assembly. The special tools are
specified in the Spare Parts Calalogue and are as
• illustrated together with the dismantling/assembly

instructions.
NOTE
:.
'";,
When lifting parts without weight
specifications, always use lifting straps with
the capacity of at least 500 kg.
•
•
97
6.2 Inlet/outlet, frame hood (IS) 6 Dismantling/Assembly
6.2 Inlet/outlet, frame

hood (IS)
6.2.1 Exploded view
1. Rectangular ring
2. Q-ring
•
3. Inlet pipe
4. Support 3
5. Rectangular ring
6.
7.
8.
Connecting housing
Screw
Protecting washer
4
•
9. Height adjusting ring(s)
5
10. Hood
11. Screw ~~~~8

12. Washer 9
10
11 •
12
•
--------
98
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6.2 Inlet/outlet, frame hood (/S)
6.2.2 Dismantling
DANGER
Entrapment hazards
1. Make sure that rotating parts have come

indicates if separator parts are rotating or
• 2.
not.
To avoid accidental start, switch off and
dismantling work.
• The frame hood and the heavy bowl parts must

be lifted by means of a hoist. Position the hoist
exactly above the bowl centre. Use an endless
sling and a lifting hook with catch.
The parts must be handled carefully. Don't place
parts directly on the floor, but on a clean rubber
mat, fibreboard or a suitable pallet.
1. Disconnect and remove the hose for
displacemenVsealing water.
2. Unscrew the inlet pipe and lift out carefully.
Left·hand thread!
•
• 3. Undo the coupling nuts of inlet and outlet
piping at the pipe support.
99
6.2 Inlet/outlet, frame hood (IS) 6 Dismantling/Assembly
4. Swing aside the support for the inlet

connecting housing.
5. Loosen the fastening bolts of the outlet
connecting housing.
6. Disconnect the pipe and swing it aside. Take
care of the a-ring and clamp ring.
7. Remove the outlet connecting housing.
~
~
~
8. Remove the six screws for the frame hood
and lift it off by using two lifting eyes. •
•
6.2.3 Assembly
1. Put the frame hood in place and tighten it with ::-... ~~----
the six screws. .
. V' Check point

"5.4.18 Oil paring disc; height position" on
page 75 (only when Major Service).
2. Fit the outlet connecting housing on the top of

the paring disc. Do not tighten the fastening
screws yet! •
3.
4.
Fit the coupling nut, the clamp ring and the
(lubricated) a-ring onto the outlet pipe.
Join the pipe and the outlet connecting
housing.
~
~
•
~
5. Tighten the fastening screws of the outlet
. connecting housing.
'-"
100
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6.2 Inlet/outlet, frame hood (IS)
6. Lubricate the rectangular ring between the

inlet support and outlet connecting housing.
7. Place the inlet support, connected to the oil
inlet piping, on top of the outlet connecting
housing.
8. Lubricate the O-ring of the inlet pipe.

Fit the inlet pipe and tighten it firmly.
•
Left-hand thread!
• 9. Tighten the pipes at the pipe support.
10. Connect the displacemenUsealing water

hose.
11. After the separator has been assembled
completely, see "4.1.1 Ready for start" on
page 30
r \
." j \
DANGER
• When power cables have been connected,

incorrect, vital rotating parts could unscrew
•
causing disintegration of the machine.
101
6.3 Bowl hood and disc stack (IS)
6.3 Bowl hood and disc

stack (IS)
6.3.1 Exploded view
1
2
15
3
-
16
4 17
-
18
6 19
7
8
~
10
~
11
-I
-
12
13
14----
102
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6.3 Bowl hood and disc stack (IS)
1. Paring chamber cover
2. a-ring
3. Oil paring disc
4. Lock ring
5. a-ring
•
6. Bowl hood
7. a-ring
8. Seal ring
• 9. a-ring
10. Top disc
11. Bowl discs
12. Wing insert
13. Bowl discs
14. Distributor
15. Distributing cone
16. a-ring
• 17. Sliding bowl bottom
18. Rectangular ring
•
19. Bowl body
103
6.3 Bowl hood and disc stack (/S) 6 Dismantling/Assembly
6.3.2 Dismantling
1. Unscrew the paring chamber cover using the
spanner and remove the oil paring disc.
Left-hand thread!
2. Apply the brake and unscrew the lock ring as

described below.
•
•
NOTE
Use an Alia Laval compressing tool
(optional) to reduce shocks to bearings and
keep thread wear minimized when
unscrewing the large lock ring.
Unscrewing lock ring without using a

compressing tool
a. Unscrew the lock ring using the spanner.
Left-hand thread!
•
•
Unscrewing lock ring with a compressing
tool
a. Fit the lifting tool on the bowl hood.
104
b. Fit the compressing tool by screwing the

pillar of the tool into the threads of the
distributor using the horizontal handle.
The control lever on the compressing tool
should be in position O.
• c. Turn the control lever to position 1 for

compression.
Compress the disc stack by pumping the
horizontal handle until the oil pressure is
released through the relief valve.
d. Unscrew the large lock ring using the

spanner.
Left-hand thread!
•
•
105
6.3 Bowl hood and disc stack (IS) 6 Dismantling/Assembly
e. Release the pressure in the compressing

tool and remove it from the lifting tool.
->
3. Remove the lock ring.
NOTE
•
The lock ring must be kept lying horizontally
or it may become distorted. Even slightest
distortion could make it impossible to refit. •
4. Separate the bowl hood from the bowl body
as described below before lifting off the bowl
hood.
Separating bowl hood without using a
compressing tool
a. Screw the spindle plate into the lifting
tool. Unscrew the spindle a few turns if
the plate is not in contact with the lifting
•
tool.
b.
+ li
Screw home the spindle until the bowl
':':: ---~
•
hood loosens from the bowl body.
c. Remove the spindle plate from the lifting
tool.
106
Separating bowl hood with a compressing

tool
a. Remove the lifting tool from the bowl
hood.
pole of the tool into the threads of the
distributor using the horizontal handle.
The control lever on the compressing tool
should be in position O.
c. Fit the lifting tool on the bowl hood.
• d. Turn the control lever to position 2 for

expansion.
Separate the bowl hood from the bowl
•
body by pumping the horizontal handle.
e. Remove the lifting tool and the .:.. ,.~.
compressing tool. Then refit the lifting

tool.
5. Lift off the bowl hood using a hoist. Be careful

not to scratch the bowl hood seal ring.
CAUTION
Crush hazards
If the top disc is stuck into the bowl hood,
•
remove it now before it accidentally falls out.
107
6. Remove the top disc.
•
7. Fit the lifting tool into the distributor and lift
the distributor with disc stack out of the bowl
body using a hoist.
8. Fit the lifting tool into the distributing cone and
•
lift it out.
108
9. Fit the lifting tool onto the sliding bowl bottom

and lift it out by a hoist.
~
'------='------'"
;;
g
10. Remove the deposits and clean all parts

thoroughly in a suitable cleaning agent. See
chapter "5.6 Cleaning" on page 81.
•
•
109
6.3.3 Assembly
.... Check point
"5.3.3 Corrosion" on page 49,
"5.3.4 Cracks" on page 52,
"5.3.7 Erosion" on page 55,
"5.3.8 Guide surfaces" on page 57,
"5.3.10 Lock ring; wear and damage" on
page 60,
"5.3.13 Sliding bowl bottom" on page 62.
1. Lubricate the guide surfaces of the bowl body
and sliding bowl bottom with lubricating
•
paste. See chapter "8.4 Lubricants" on page
184.
2. Fit the lifting tool to the sliding bowl bottom
and lift it into the bowl body using a hoist.
For correct position of the sliding bowl
bottom, see below.
•
~
'-----==------~,'.
;
3. Bring the assembly mark on the sliding bowl

bottom in line with the guide lug on the bowl
body to ensure that the sliding bowl bottom
~... ._----~-~ ')
enters into the correct position.
F 1
§
r------1
I
•
•
4. Fit the distributing cone onto the sliding bowl
bottom.
Check that the guide pins on the underside of
the distributing cone enter the recess in the
sliding bowl bottom.
110
5. Assemble the discs one by one on the

distributor. The distributor has one guide rib
for the correct positioning of the discs.
.
CAUTION
Cut hazard
Sharp edges on the separator discs may

cause cuts.
• For correct number of discs above and below

the wing insert when the machine was new,
see the Spare Parts Catalogue.
• 6.
The number of bowl discs above the wing
insert may be increased to adjust the disc
stack pressure.
Fit the lifting tool to the distributor and lift the
distributor with disc stack into the sliding bowl
\\
bottom using a hoist.
Check that the guide pins in the distributing

cone fit into the recesses on the underside of
• the distributor.
• 7. Fit the top disc onto the distributor. Lubricate

the O-ring on the top disc.
t,/ Check point
"5.3.1 Bowl hood seal ring" on page 48.
111
8. Fit the lifting tool to the bowl hood and lift it

using a hoist. Check that the Q-ring and the
seal ring of the bowl hood are properly fitted
and lubricated.
Lower the bowl hood straight down onto the
disc stack, otherwise it may get stuck. Be
careful not to scratch the bowl hood seal ring.
~ li
In set of tools without compressing tool.
•
9.
In set of tools with compressing tool.
For correct position of bowl hood, see next
illustration. .
Check that the guide recess on the bowl hood

enters the guide lug in the bowl body.
I I
•
t: ::J
L
I
9 1
- j
I
I I
I 0 I
10. Remove the lifting tool.
11. Lubricate the lock ring threads, contact and •
•
guide surfaces with lubricating paste.
tI' Check point

"5.4.16 Lock ring; priming" on page 73 (only
when Major Service).
112
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6.3 Bowl hood and disc stack (/S)
12. Tighten the lock ring.
NOTE
Use an Alfa Laval compressing tool
(optional) to reduce shocks to bearings and
keep thread wear minimized when
unscrewing the large lock ring.
Tightening of lock ring without using a

compressing tool
• a. Tighten the lock ring using the spanner

for lock ring.
Left-hand thread!
• ......
b. Tighten until the assembly marks are at

least in line.
t/ Check point
NOTE
The assembly marks must never pass each
•
./
/ I
other more than 25 0 which corresponds to
A=100 mm.
(M~/i
•
113
Tightening of lock ring using a

compressing tool
a. Fit the lifting tool onto the bowl hood.

pole of the tool into the threads of the
distributor by the horizontal handle.
•
The control lever on the compressing
tool, should be in position O.
•
c. Turn the control lever to position 1 for
compression.
Compress the disc stack by pumping with
the horizontal handle until the oil
pressure is released through the relief
valve.
•
d. Tighten the lock ring using the spanner
for lock ring.
Left-hand thread! •
I~I
114
e. Tighten until the assembly marks are at

least in line.
V Check point
NOTE
The assembly marks must never pass each
other more than 25 0 which corresponds to .... 0 / /'---
(M~/
A=100 mm.
•
•
f. Release the pressure in the compressing
tool by turning the control lever to position
oand then remove the compressing and
lifting tools.
13. Fit the oil paring disc.

V Check point
"5.3.9 Inlet pipe and oil paring disc" on page
59.
14. Fit and tighten the paring chamber cover

using the spanner.
Left·hand thread!
•
•
115
6.4 Bowl body and operating mechanism (/S) 6 Dismantling/Assembly
6.4 Bowl body and

operating
mechanism (IS)
116
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6.4 Bowl body and operating mechanism (IS)
6.4.2 Dismantling
1. Unscrew and remove the cap nut.
Left-hand thread!
2. Unscrew the three screws in the bottom of the

bowl body.
•
• 3. Fit the lifting tool into the bowl body bottom
with the three screws.
(6)
t.......-_---.!.-l_7---.!.-f_ _i
Release the bowl body from the spindle by
using the lifting tool as a puller. Turn the
handle at top of the lifting tool until the bowl
body comes loose from the spindle taper.
•
Turn the handle two more turns in order to
avoid damaging the paring disc device.
• 4. Lift out the bowl body using a hoist.
117
6.4 Bowl body and operating mechanism (IS) 6 Dismantling/Assembly
5. Thread a strap through two sludge ports and

turn the bowl body upside down using a hoist.
WARNING
Crush hazards
Support the bowl body when turning to

prevent it from rolling.
•
6. Loosen the screws tor the spring support
successively a little at a time. Remove the
screws.
•
-
•
•
7. Remove the spring support and the springs.
•
•
118
8. Unscrew the screws for the dosing ring.
•
L-
• ---"O~
9. Dismantle the dosing ring from the bowl body
•
with the special puller.
• Proceed in the following way:

a.
b.
Screw the nuts against the heads of the
screws.
Place the puller on the operating slide
and screw the screws into the dosing
ring.
.\
c. Force off the dosing ring by tightening the
nuts crosswise. Remove the puller when
the dosing ring is loose.
•
•
1.19
10. Fit two lifting eyes (M1 0) or two screws from

the puller into the dosing ring and lift it off
from the bowl body.
•
•
11. Fit two lifting eyes (M1 0) or two screws from
the puller into the operating slide and lift it off
from the bowl body.
•
•
'----- ~
--'''"-'--'0
120
12. Place the operating slide with the valve plugs

facing upwards.
13. Remove any thick deposits in the frame hood
and clean all other parts thoroughly in a - .....
...•~ ..
suitable cleaning agent. See chapter "5.6
Cleaning" on page 81.
..'. . .....
6.4.3 Assembly
•
V' Check point
"5.3.3 Corrosion" on page 49,
"5.3.4 Cracks" on page 52,
"5.3.6 Dosing ring" on page 55,
"5.3.7 Erosion" on page 55,
• "5.3.8 Guide surfaces" on page 57,

"5.3.11 Operating mechanism" on page 61,
. "5.3.12 Operating slide" on page 62,
"5.3.14 Springs for operating mechanism" on
page 63.
1. Lubricate the guide surfaces of the bowl body,
operating slide and dosing ring with
lubricating paste. See chapter "8.4
Lubricants" on page 184.
2. Fit the operating slide onto the bowl body.
Check that the guide pin in the bowl body
enters the hole in the operating slide.
•
•
121
3. Fit the dosing ring.

Check that the guide pin in the bowl body
enters the hole in the dosing ring.
•
•
4. Apply only a thin film of lubricating paste on
the screws for the dosing ring.
NOTE
If there is too much lubrication paste applied,
•
the surplus will collect between the operating
slide and bowl body with risk of malfunction.
•
Tighten the dosing ring screws to a torque of
20 Nm. The screws should first be tightened
diametrically, then tightened symmetrically
around the bowl.
If torque is too low, there is a risk that the

bolts will loosen by themselves when the
.•
separator is in operation. If torque is too high,
the dosing ring as well as the bolts will be
deformed. This may lead to sticking of the
operating slide which moves inside the
dosing ring.
122
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6.4 Bowl body and operating mechanism (/S)
5. Lubricate the guide surfaces of the spring

support. See chapter "8.4 Lubricants" on
page 184.
Fit springs and support.
6. Tighten the three screws for the spring
support successively by hand a little at a time.
Finally tighten the screws to a torque of
25Nm.
• 7. Wipe off the spindle top and nave bore in the

•
•
-- -- .. - "-
• bowl body. For rost protection, lubricate the

tapered end of the spindle with a few drops of
oil (no other lubricant shall be used). Spread
it over the surface carefully. Wipe off surplus
oil with a clean cloth.
V Check point
"5.3.2 Bowl spindle cone and bowl body
nave" on page 49.
NOTE
Too much oil on the surface between the
spindle and bowl body, or if other lubricant is
used, will reduce the friction between the two
parts. This may result in a relative rotation
• between the parts, which can lead to seizure,

scoring and possible welding.
123
6.4 Bowl body and operating mechanism (/S)
8. Turn the bowl body using a hoist to its up-

right position with a strap threaded through
two sludge ports.
WARNING
Crush hazards
Support bowl body when turning to prevent it

from rolling.
•
9. Fit the lifting tool into the bowl body bottom
with the th ree screws.
Turn the handle at the top of the lifting tool so
that the central screw is home.
•
o
= =
10. Lower the bowl body using a hoist until the
central screw rests on the spindle top. Then
screw up the central screw so that the bowl
body sinks down onto the spindle.
Remove the tool.
11. Rotate the bowl body and align it so that the

three screw holes in the bowl body bottom •
•
are exactly above the three holes in the
distributing ring.
Tighten the three screws firmly.
12. Lubricate the cap nut threads with Molykote

1000 Universal Paste.
Tighten the cap nut firmly.
Left·hand thread!
124
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6.5 Operating water device (IS)
6.5 Operating water

device (IS)
6.5.1 Exploded view
•
2
1. O-ring T
2. Distributing ring
•
3. Operating paring disc
4. O-ring
3
5. Cover
6. Gasket 4
7. Distributing cover
8. Height adjusting ring

5
•
•
125
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6.5 Operating water device (/S)
6.5.2 Dismantling
1. Slacken the screws of the paring disc with a
hexagon wrench and unscrew with a suitable
screw driver.
•
•
2. Lift out the paring disc device.
•
•
L- _ j
127
_6._5_0.:...p_e~_a_ti-..:ng~w-=.:a-=te_r_-=.:d-=-e__ ce~(/_S)~
vi__ 6 Dismantling/Assembly
3. Loosen and pUll out the operating water inlet

pipes.
•
•
L- -==- "~
4. Loosen the screws and lift out the distributing
cover.
•
•
128
5. To dismantle the paring disc device turn it

upside down and remove the screws.
~ .~
ff
~~
~
as
~A
• I I
• 6.
7.
Remove deposits and clean all parts
thoroughly in a suitable cleaning agent. Pay
special attention to the channels. See chapter
"5.6 Cleaning" on page 81.
Check the parts for damage and corrosion.
•
•
129
6.5 Operating water device (IS) 6 Dismantling/Assembly
6.5.3 Assembly
1. Put the distributing cover in place. Do not
tighten the screws (this will make it easier to
fit the operating water inlet tubes).
•
2. Fit the operating water inlet pipes into the
distributing cover and connect the water
hoses. •
•
•
130
3. Fasten the distributing cover.
• 4. Assemble the paring disc device. Do not
•
forget the gasket on its underside.
•
•
131
6.5 Operating water device (IS)
5. Align the three holes (1) in the paring disc

with the three holes (2) in the distributing
cover.
•
•
6. Fit the paring disc device in its place.
•
•
132
7. Tighten the screws of the paring disc.
t/ Check point
"5.4.20 Operating paring disc; height
position" on page 75. Only at Major Service
(MS).
•
•
•
•
133
6.6 Vertical driving device (MS) 6 Dismantling/Assembly
6.6 Vertical driving device

(MS)
22
6 --- , I
23
13 24
25
14
I
____J 26
7
8 - - - 17
27
28
29
30
.'
9
10
31
32
33
34
•
35
38 -
-
134
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6.6 Vertical driving device (MS)
1. Protecting plate
2. D-ring
3. Protecting collar
4. Guard
5. D-ring
6. Ball bearing housing
7. Spring casing
8. Gasket
•
9. Oil fan
10. Ball bearing
11. Screw
12. Screw
•
13. Screw
14. Spring washer
15. Buffer
16. Spring
17. Buffer plug
18. Bowl spindle
19. Stop sleeve
20. Ball bearing
21. Worm
22. Ball bearing ,
23. Conveyor
.
24. Ball bearing
25. Spacing washer
•
26. Ball bearing
27. Washer
28. Ball
29. Support ring
•
30. Height adjusting ring
31. Spacing sleeve
32. Bottom slee ve
33. Slotted pin
34. Ball
35. Bottom bearing housing
36. Washer
37. Screw
38. Gasket
135
6.6.2 Dismantling
1. Unscrew the six screws and remove the hood
and o-ring.
NOTE
Clean the space in the bowl casing
thoroughly before starting to dismantle the
bowl spindle to prevent contaminations
falling down into the oil gear housing.
• 2. Unscrew the three screws and remove the

protecting plate, O-ring and protecting collar.
•
\
~-
3. Unscrew the six screws and remove the
guard and O-ring.
•
•
137
4. Loosen (but do not remove) the six screw

plugs for the buffers with a spanner and a
hammer.
5. Unscrew the six screw plugs and remove the

springs. Move the spindle top a few turns in a
circle while pressing outwards. This will
disengage buffers from the ball bearing
housing.
•
6. Remove the six buffers from the spring
casing.
•
7. Unscrew the six screws holding the spring

casing.
•
•
138
8. Prize out the ball bearing housing from the

spring casing with a screw driver.
9. Remove the spring casing and gasket.
•
10. Drain the oil from the worm gear housing.
CAUTION
• Burn hazards
Lubricating oil and various machine surfaces

can be hot and cause burns.
11. Remove the brake cover and revolution

counter cap and their gaskets.
•
• 12. Knock out the taper pin from the worm wheel
stop ring.
L- ....:::",~ -'o ,"
139
13. Push the worm wheel to one side before

removing the spindle. If worm wheel is stuck
use a piece of wood to loosen it.
~
L- -',oo
14. Fit the lifting tool onto the spindle and lift out
using the hoist.
•
•
15. Pull 011 the ball bearing (1) together with the
~
spacing washer (2) and upper ball race (3) for
the axial bottom ball bearing.
16. Remove the conveyor (4) for worm. 5 ~,~
1 23
17. Remove the oil fan (5).
18. Remove the worm and stop sleeve from the

spindle. Pull 011 ball bearings from the worm.
Use a washer (a) as a support for the puller. •
•
140
19. Drive off the top ball bearing from the sleeve
0
spindle with the driving-off sleeve. Use a A
L-.
wooden plank or similar as a soft base for the
spindle top.
,.
~
W~
o I1 G
,
~
~I
)L.
r-'"
•
20. Lift out the axial bottom ball bearing and the
washer beneath using the lifting pin.
•
21. Lift out the bottom sleeve using the lifting pin.
";; I'
•
• 22. Knock out the slotted pin (1) from the spacing
sleeve (2) and remove it. Unscrew support
plug (3) using two screws (4) with threads 1/
4"-20 UNC to make height adjusting ring (5)
accessible.
23. Remove deposits and clean all parts
chapter "5.6 Cleaning" on page 81.
141
6.6.3 Assembly
1. Fit the bottom sleeve with mounted parts
(rings and sleeve) into the bottom bearing
housing. Use the lifting pin.
.~ 1I
Check that one ball is fitted both on top and

bottom of the bottom sleeve.
2. Fit the washer and the ball bearing onto the

bottom sleeve.
•
•
When mounting ball bearings on the spindle
and worm as described below, the bearings
must be heated in oil to max. 125 'C.
WARNING
Burn hazards •
heated bearings.
•
NOTE
If in doubt how to mount roller bearings
correctly, see the detailed description in
chapter "5.9.1 Ball and roller bearings" on
page 91.
3. Heat the ball bearing and fit it on the spindle.
142
V' Check point

"5.4.24 Worm; wear of groove" on page 77.
"5.7.1 Worm wheel and worm; wear of teeth"
on page 85
4. Heat the two ball bearings and fit them on the
worm.
•
• 5. Fit the stop sleeve (1) and the worm (2) on
~~
the spindle.
~~
'-- 1 -'2=.c,_ _---.J~
6. Fit the ball bearing (1) on the spindle. Then fit

the spacing washer (2) and upper ball race
(3) for the axial bottom bearing. The ball race
must be heated.
• 7.
8.
Fit the conveyor (4) and the oil fan (5).
Fit the lifting tool to the spindle and lift it using

a hoist.
143
9. Carefully lower the spindle into the frame and

guide the spindle into the correct position in
the bottom bearing housing so the ball
bearings enter their seats. If the ball bearings
do not completely enter their seats, tap the
spindle top gently with a soft hammer.
V' Check point

"5.4.6 Buffer springs and ball bearing
housing" on page 67.
•
•
10. Fit the spring casing with gasket and ball
bearing housing. Position the flat surfaces of
the ball bearing housing in front of the buffer
holes in the spring casing.
11. Tighten the six screws for the spring casing.
•
•
12. Fit the buffers, springs and screw plugs.
144
13. Tighten the six screw plugs.
-'1'5:; 0 = 1]1
• 14. Fit the guard with O-ring and tighten the six
•
screws.
15. Fit the protecting collar with O-ring and

protecting plate.
• NOTE
Check that the protecting collar is in the
bottom position before tightening the
• protecting plate.
Tighten the three screws for the protecting

plate.
\
"'~-- ~
'--------~ --=~----=--------,g
145
16. Fit the hood with 0-ring and tighten the six
screws.
..... Check point

"5.4.3 Bowl spindle; height position" on page
65.
17. Match the worm wheel with the teeth in the

worm of the bowl spindle. Knock the taper pin
into the worm wheel stop ring.
..... Check points

"5.4.26 Worm wheel shaft; radial wobble" on
•
page 78,
"5.4.4 Bowl spindle; radial wobble" on page
66.
•
18. Fit the protecting cover with gasket. /' \
19. Pour oil into worm gear housing. The oil level
c- -===- -',"•~
•
•
should be exactly in the middle of the sight
glass.
For correct oil volume and recommended oil
brands, see chapter "8.4 Lubricants" on page
184.
L -----=~===:=:::::
~
~
146
t/ Check point
"5.4.5 Brake" on page 66.
20. Fit the brake cover and revolution counter
cap and their gaskets.
•
•
-.
•
•
147
6.7 Horizontal driving device (MS) 6 Dismantling/Assembly
6.7 Horizontal driving

device (MS)
6.7.1 Exploded view
3 2
•
12
6 5 4
•
17 16 15 14 13
•
21 20 19 18
•
29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22
148
6 Dismantling/Assembly 6.7 Horizontal driving device (MS)
1. Ball bearing
2. Screw
3. Spring washer
4. Round nut
5. Lock washer
6. Bearing shield
7. Spring washer
8. Nut
• 9. Di/shield
10. Taper pin
11. Stop ring
•
12. Worm wheel
13. Ball bearing
14. Sealing ring
15. Sealing washer
16. Q-ring
~
17. Worm-wheel shaft with coupling drum
18. Nave
19. Friction block
20. Friction pad
21. Holding bracket
22. Ball bearing
•
23. Spacing sleeve
24. Ball bearing
25. Lock washer
26. Round nut
• 27. Gasket
28. Coupling disc
29. Elastic plate
149
6.7 Horizontal driving device (MS)
6.7.2 Dismantling
DANGER
Entrapment hazards
1. Make sure that rotating parts have come

indicates if separator parts are rotating or
2.
not.
To avoid accidental start, switch off and
dismantling work.
•
The parts must be handled carefully. Don't place
parts directly on the floor, but on a clean rubber
mat, fibreboard or a suitable pallet.
•
If the bowl spindle has been removed according
to earlier description, points 1-5 below are already
done. Proceed with point 6.
1. Drain the oil from the worm gear housing.
CAUTION
Burn hazards
Lubricating oil and various machine surfaces

can be hot and cause burns.
•
2. Remove the brake cover and revolution
counter cap and their gaskets. •
L-
~
--""
150
3. Knock out the taper pin from the worm wheel

stop ring.
•
4. Remove the protecting cover with gasket.
• 5. Unscrew the two nuts holding the oil shield.

The shield can not be removed from the
housing before the bearing shield is moved.
•
• 6. Unscrew the four screws for the bearing
shield and remove illogether with the oil
shield.
'-- -'0 ~
151
7. Unscrew and remove the round nut and lock

washer.
•
'-- ---.J 8
8. Remove the ball bearing.
•
'-- ==~ _ ___""__=_ _---.J0 ~
9. Remove the stop ring and worm wheel with
ball bearing.
•
10. Pull off the ball bearing from the worm wheel.
Use a washer as a support for the puller.
•
152
11. Disconnect the motor cables. Note the

positions of cables in the terminal box to re- \
connect correctly (for correct direction of ~§:J)
rotation). ----_.~
12. Remove the electric motor using a hoist.
• 13. Remove the flexible plate and unscrew the

'----- ----"0....='----- -" I
• six screws for the coupling disc and remove

it.
14. Remove the worm wheel shaft with friction
•
clutch pulley.
153
6.7 Horizontal driving device (MS)
15. To dismantle the nave, unscrew the round nut

with the pin spanner and remove the lock
washer.
•
16. Pull off the nave with the puller and remove
the friction blocks.
•
17. Remove the sealing washer using two screws
with 1/4"-20 UNC threads.
18. Remove the sealing ring from the sealing

washer.
•
19. Remove deposits and clean all parts
chapter "5.6 Cleaning" on page 81. •
154
6.7.3 Assembly
1. Lubricate the O-ring on the sealing washer
periphery and the sealing ring with silicone
grease. Fit the sealing washer in frame and
check that the sealing ring is fitted in the
correct direction, as illustrated.
V' Check point

• "5.4.7 Coupling friction pads" on page 69.
2. Fit the friction blocks (3) with pads (2) on the
nave and lock them with holding brackets (4).
• 3.
Lubricate the ball bearings.
For recommended lubricants, see chapter
"8.4 Lubricants" on page 184.
Fit the ball bearings (1) and spacing sleeve
(5) with the driving on sleeve tool to force the
ball bearings into their correct positions.
e~:::J II
4. Tighten the round nut with the pin spanner
and secure it with the lock washer.
•
• 5. Fit the worm wheel shaft.
'-- --'-'- ~
--',,0
155
..... Check point

"5.4.25 Worm wheel and worm; wear of
teeth" on page 77.
6. Heat the ball bearing and fit it on the worm
wheel.
When mounting the ball bearings on the

worm wheel and shaft, the bearings must be
W
heated in oil to max. 125°C (225 OF).
WARNING
.~ Burn hazards

heated bearings.
•
NOTE
•
If in doubt how to mount roller bearings
correctly, see the detailed description in
chapter "5.9.1 Ball and roller bearings" on
page 91.
7. Fit the worm wheel with the ball bearing and

fit the stop ring.
•
8. Fit the ball bearing.
L- -==- ~
---.J O •
L- -=---=--__ ~
---"'''''--_ _ -l0
156
9. Knock the ball bearing into its seat with the

driving-on sleeve tool.
10
C I1
•
• 10. Tighten the round nut with the pin spanner
and secure it with the lock washer.
fDcrn 1I
•
11. Fit the bearing shield together with the oil
shield. Tighten the four screws for the bearing
shield.
157
12. Tighten the two nuts holding the oil shield in

the bearing shield.
•
13. Fit the coupling disc with gasket and tighten
the six screws. " necessary, use the driving-
on sleeve.
14. Fit the flexible plate.

.
•
V" Check point
"5.4.13 Flexible plate in coupling" on page
71.
15. Fit the electric motor.

\
•
DANGER
-===_~_~
__::J)
•
When power cables have been connected
and the separator is completely assembled
see"4.1.1 Ready for starf' on page 30,
incorrect, vital rotating parts could unscrew
causing disintegration of the machine.
158
The remaining description in this section implies

that the bowl spindle is mounted in the frame. If
not, proceed with the assembly instruction for the
vertical driving device in chapter "6.6.3 Assembly"
on page 142.
16. Match the worm wheel with the teeth in the

worm of the bowl spindle. Knock the taper pin
into the worm wheel stop ring.
V Check point
"5.7.1 Worm wheel and worm; wear of teeth"
on page 85.
•
• 17. Fit the protecting cover with gasket.
18. Pour oil into worm gear housing. The oil level
should be exactly in the middle of the sight
glass.
• For correct oil volume and recommended oil

brands see chapter "8.4 Lubricants" on page
184.
•
V Check point
"5.4.5 Brake" on page 66.
19. Fit the brake cover and revolution counter

cap and their gaskets.
159
7 -Trouble-tracing
Contents
7.1 Mechanical functions 162

7.1.1 Separator vibrates 162
•
7.1.2 Smell 163
7.1.3 Noise 163
7.1.4 Speed lOO low 163
7.1.5 Starting power too high 164
•
7.1.6 Starting power too low 164
7.1.7 Starting time too long 164
7.1.8 Retardation time too long 165
7.1.9 Water in worm gear housing 165
7.2 Separating functions 166

7.2.1 Liquid flows through the bowl
casing drain and/or sludge outlet 166
7.2.2 Bowl opens accidentally during
operation 167
7.2.3 Bowl fails to open for sludge
discharge 167
7.2.4 Unsatisfactory sludge discharge 168
•
7.2.5 Unsatisfactory separation 168
7.2.6 High pressure in oil outlet 168
7.3 Vibration switch (option) 169
• 7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
Vibration switch does not reset
Impossible to adjust setpoint to
obtain tripping
Vibration switch does not reset
169
169
169
161
7.1 Mechanical functions 7 Trouble-tracing
--
7.1 Mechanical functions
7.1.1 Separator vibrates
NOTE
Some vibration is normal during the starting and stopping sequences when the separator
passes through its critical speeds.
DANGER
Disintegration hazards •
If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator and keep bowl filled with liquid during rundown.
The cause of the vibration must be identified and corrected before the separator is restarted.
Excessive vibration may be due to incorrect assembly or poor cleaning of the bowl.
•
Cause Corrective actions Page
Bowl out of balance due to: Dismantle the separator and check the 110
- poor cleaning assembly and cleaning
- incorrect assembly
- incorrect disc stack compression
- bowl assembled with parts from other
separators
Uneven sludge deposits in the sludge

space
Height adjustment of the oil paring disc or

Dismantle and clean the separator bowl
Stop the separator, measure and, if

104
65, 75
•
bowl spindle is incorrect
Bowl spindle bent (max 0,04 mm)
Bearing is damaged or worn

necessary, adjust the height(s)
Renew the bowl spindle
Renew all bearings

66
134, 148
•
Vibration damping rubber cushions are. Renew all rubber cushions 47
worn out
Spindle top bearing spring is broken Renew all springs 134
162
7 Trouble-tracing 7.1 Mechanical functions
7.1.2 Smell
Normal occurrence during start while the None -

friction blocks are slipping
Brake is applied Release the brake -
Oil level in gear housing is too low Check oil level and add oil if necessary 30
• 7.1.3
Cause
Noise
Corrective actions Page
•
Oil level in gear housing is too low Check oil level and add oil if necessary 30
Height adjustment of the oil paring disc or Stop the separator, measure and adjust 65, 75
bowl spindle is incorrect the height(s)
"~'
Worm wheel and worm are worn Renew worm wheel and worm ~85
Bearing is damaged or worn Renew all bearings 134,148
Incorrect play between coupling pulley Adjust the play

.71
and elastic plate
7.1.4 Speed too low
• Cause
Brake is applied
Corrective actions
Release the brake

Page
•
Coupling pads are oily or worn Clean or renew friction pads 69
Bowl is not closed or leaking Dismantle the bowl and check 102
Motor failure Repair the motor -

Bearing is damaged Renew all bearings 134, 148
Incorrect gear transmission (60 Hz gear Stop and change the gear transmission 85,134,
for 50 Hz power supply) to suit the power supply frequency 148
Incorrect coupling friction blocks (60 Hz Change the friction blocks to suit the 69
blocks for 50 Hz power supply) power supply frequency
163
7.1 Mechanical functions 7 Trouble-tracing
7.1.5 Starting power too high
Incorrect friction blocks (50 Hz blocks for

60 Hz power supply)
~ DANGER
Stop immediately and change the friction 69

blocks to suit the power supply frequency
Wrong direction of rotation Change electrical phase connections to the -

motor
Brake is applied Release the brake -

•
7.1.6
Cause
Starting power too low
Incorrect friction blocks (60 Hz blocks for

Corrective actions
Stop immediately and change the friction

Page
69
•
50 Hz power supply) blocks to suit the power supply frequency
Friction pads are oily or worn Clean or renew friction pads 69
Motor failure Repair the motor -
7.1.7 Starting time too long
Cause
Brake is applied
Corrective actions
Release the brake

Page
- •
Friction pads are oily or worn
Height position of oil paring disc or

operating device is incorrect
Motor failure
Renew or clean friction pads
Stop, check and adjust the height
Repair the motor

69
69, 75
-
•
Bearing is damaged or worn Renew all bearings 134,148
164
7 Trouble-tracing 7. 1 Mechanical functions
7.1.8 Retardation time too long
Brake friction pad is worn or oily Renew or clean brake friction pad 66
7.1.9 Water in worm gear housing
• Bowl casing drain is obstructed Clean the casing and the drains properly.
The drains have connection Nos. 462 and
463 on the Basic size drawing.
Solve the reason for obstruction.
85,175
• Leakage at top bearing
Condensation
Clean worm gear housing and change oil.
Renew seal ring and change oil
Clean worm gear housing and

change oil
.-..-
134,88
88
•
•
165
7.2 Separating functions
7.2 Separating functions
7.2.1 liquid flows through the

bowl casing drain and/or
sludge outlet
Sludge discharge or water draining in None (normal) -

progress
Strainer in operating water line is clogged

or water pressurelflow is too low
Clean the strainer and check water
pressure/flow:
Closing water pressure, 20-30 kPa
-
•
•
Closing water flow
Channels in operating water device are Clean the operating water device 125
clogged
o-ring at the paring chamber cover Renew the O-ring 102

(small lock ring) is defective
Paring chamber cover (small lock ring) Renew the paring chamber cover 102
defective
Seal ring in oil paring disc is device Renew the seal ring 102
defective
Oil paring disc is defective Renew the paring disc 102
•
Seal ring in the bowl hood is defective Renew the seal ring 102
Sealing edge of the sliding bowl bottom is Smoothen sealing edge of the sliding bowl 62
defective bottom or renew it
•
Valve plugs defective Renew all valve plugs 62
Bowl speed is too low See section ''7.1.4 Speed too low" on page -
163 in this chapter
166
7 Trouble-tracing 7.2 Separating functions
7.2.2 Bowl opens accidentally

during operation
Strainer inthe operating water supply is Clean the strainer -

clogged
No water in the operating water system Check the operating water system and -
make sure the valve(s) are open
Water connections to the separator are Rectify -
•
incorrectly fitted
Upper nozzle in the dosing ring is Clean the nozzle. Carry out an Intermediate 55
clogged Service (IS)
•
Square-sectioned ring in sliding bowl Renew the square-sectioned ring. Carry out 62
bottom is defective an Intermediate Service (IS)
Valve plugs are defective Renew all plugs. Carry out an Intermediate~, 62
Service (IS) -
Supply valve for opening water is leaking Rectify the leak . -
7.2.3 Bowl fails to open for sludge

discharge
• Strainer in the operating water supply is

clogged
Seal rings in operating water device are

Clean the strainer
Renew the seal rings

-
125
•
defective
Water flow is too low Check the opening water flow; -

min.18 litres/minute
Dosing ring is too firmly tightened Check the tightening torque 122
Lower nozzle in the dosing ring is Clean the nozzle. Carry out an Intermediate 55
clogged Service (IS)
Seal ring in the operating slide is Renew the seal ring. Carry out an 116
defective Intermediate Service (IS)
167
7.2 Separating functions 7 Trouble-tracing
7.2.4 Unsatisfactory sludge

discharge
Dosing ring is too firmly tightened Check the tightening torque 122
Valve plugs in the operating slide are too Renew with correct valve plugs 62
high
Sludge deposits in the operating system Check and clean the operating system 116,125
7.2.5
Cause
Unsatisfactory separation
Corrective actions Page
•
Incorrect separation temperature
Throughput is too high
Disc stack is clogged

Adjust
Adjust
Clean disc stack

-
-
83
•
Sludge space in bowl is filled Clean and reduce the time between sludge 83
discharges
Bowl speed is too low Examine the motor and power transmission 85, 148
including the gear ratio
7.2.6 High pressure in oil outlet

Cause
Throughput is too high

Corrective actions
Adjust
Page
-
•
Valve(s) in the oil outlet line is closed
Bowl disc stack is clogged

Open the valve(s)
Clean disc stack

-
83 •
168
7 Trouble-tracing 7.3 Vibration switch (option)
7.3 Vibration switch

(option)
7.3.1 Vibration switch does not

reset
Dirt or iron particles on magnets Clean magnets -
• Leaf spring is broken
Reset coil is open

Return to Alfa Laval for repair
Check for continuity and proper coil

-
-
•
resistance
7.3.2 Impossible to adjust

setpoint to obtain tripping
Incorrect air gap between hold-down Readjust the air gap with the stop pin screw
, -
magnet (lower) and armature in switch
7.3.3 Vibration switch does not
•
reset
• Defective switch Renew and verify by manually moving the -

armature to the latched (tripped) position
and listen for an audible click. Verify contact
by performing a continuity check
Incorrect position Check that the switch plunger is just free of -

the armature when in the set (un-tripped)
position
169
8 Technical Reference
Contents
8.1 Technical data 173
•
8.2 Basic size drawing 175
8.2.1 Dimensions of connections 176
8.2.2 Connection list 177
8.2.3 Interface description 179
• 8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
8.2.7
General
Definitions
Component description and signal
processing
Function graph and running
180
179
179
limitations 182
8.3 Water quality 183
8.4 Lubricants 184

8.4.1 Lubrication chart. general 184
8.4.2 Recommended lubricating oils 186
8.4.3 Recommended oil brands 187
• 8.4.4
8.5 Drawings
Recommended lubricants 190
193
•
8.5.1 Foundations 193
8.5.2 Electric motor 194
8.5.3 Machine plates and safety labels 198
8.5.4 Vibration sensor (option) 200
8.5.5 Cover interlocking switch (option) 200
8.6 Storage and installation 201

8.6.1 Introduction 201
8.6.2 Storage and transport of goods 201
8.6.3 Planning of installation 203
8.6.4 Foundations 205
171
8 Technical Reference 8.1 Technical data
8.1 Technical data

Alfa Laval ref 55504
NOTE
The separator is a component operating in an integrated system including a monitoring
system. If the technical data in the system description do not agree with the technical data
in this instruction manual, the data in the system description shall apply.
Product number 881243-05-02
•
Separator type LOPX 71 OSFD-34
Application Continuous clarification of lubricating oil.

Intended for both land and marine applications.
The flash point of the oil to be separated must be
•
min. 60 QC.
Density of operating water, max. 1 000 kg/m 3
Density of sediment/feed, max. 1 350/1 100 kg/m 3
Hyd rau lic capacity, max. 19400 litres/hour
Feed temperature, min./max. 0/100 QC
Ambient temperature, min./max. 5-15/55 QC The min. temperature is

dependent of the used oil type.
See "8.4.2 Recommended
lubricating oils" on page 186.
Bowl speed, max. 5175/5148 r.p.m., 50/60 Hz
Motor shaft speed, max. 1500/1800 r.p.m., 50/60 Hz
• Revolution counter
No. of teeth;
• on worm, 50 Hz
118-125/142-150 r.p.m., 50/60 Hz
20
•
- on worm, 60 Hz 21
• on worm wheel, 50 Hz 69
- on worm wheel, 60 Hz 60
Lubricating volume approx. 12 litres
Motor power rating 12 kW
Power consumption, max. 16 kW (at starting up)
Power consumption, normal 4,8/6,8 kW (idling/at max. capacity)
Discharge volume, nominal 4,8 litres fixed discharge volume
Discharge interval, min./max. 1/240 minutes
Bowl volume 13,3 litres
173
8.1 Technical data 8 Technical Reference
Starting time, min./max. 3/4 minutes
Stopping time with brake, min./max. 4/7 minutes
Max. running time without flow;

- empty bowl 180 minutes
• filled bowl 180 minutes
Sound power level Bel(A) ISO 3744, 4,5 m3/h
Sound pressure level 84 dB(A) ISO 3744, 4,5 m3/h
Vibration level, separator in use, max. 11,2 mm/s (RMS)
•
Weight of separator 1 120 kg
(without motor)
Weight of separator 850 kg
(without frame hood and bowl)
Weight of bowl
Weight of motor
244
72
kg
kg
The materials in contact with process fluid (excluding seals and a-rings) are brass, bronze and
stainless steel. Cast iron frame.
•
•
•
174
8 Technical Reference 8.2 Basic size drawing
8.2 Basic size drawing

Alfa Laval ref. 558583
760
701
• ,
JJO
•
Om K.
• 590
• L-_~
7
~
--=- I
---'.o
A. Maximum vertical displacement B. Maximum horizontal displacement

at the sludge connection during at the in/outlet connections during
operation ±1O mm operation ± 15 mm
175
8.2 Basic size drawing 8 Technical Reference
8.2.1 Dimensions of connections

I
x$
ISO G
- '/.
~
ISO-G ~.
E9 fSO=G1!Iz
ar;-
ISO-G2l'2
I
~?OO
I
.@.
•
~105J
~"4 ,
.®J.
FI]ISO-R2l'2
~
:!:
•
$ ~
Data for connections, see chapter All connections to be installed non-loaded

"8,2.2 Connection list" on page 177 and flexible
•
•
176
8.2.2 Connection list

Alfa Laval ref. 554579 rev. 3
Connection No. Description Requirementsllimits
201 Inlet for product
- Allowed temperature Min. 0 QC, max. 100 QC
206 Inlet to liquid seal or displacement liquid, water Fresh water
- Instantaneous flow 1,8 litre/minute
• 220
- Pressure (Min.lMax.)
Outlet for light phase (oil)

200/600 kPa
• 221
222
- Counter pressure
Outlet for heavy phase (water)
Outlet for solid phase

0- 400 kPa
The outlet after the

separator should be
installed in such a way
that you can not fill the
frame top part with sludge.
(Guidance of sludge pump
or open outlet)
,
372 Inlet of discharge liquid See demand in,chapter
"8.3 Water quality" on
page 183
• -
-
Instantaneous flow
Time
18 litres/minute
3 seconds/discharge
•
- Pressure (Min.lMax.) 200/600 kPa
376 Inlet for make-up liquid. See demand in chapter

"8.3 Water quality" on
page 183
- Pressure (Min.lMax.) 22/32 kPa
372 + 376 Discharge and make-up liquid
- Consumption 1,4 litres/discharge
177
8.2 Basic size drawing 8 Techn~alReference
Connection No. Description Requirementsllimits
377 Outlet for operating liquid (discharge and make-up

liquid)
(463) Drain of frame top part, upper
462 Drain of frame top part, lower
701 Motor for separator
- Max. deviation from nominal frequency. ± 5% (momentarily 10%
•
during a period of
maximum 5 seconds).
753 Vibration sensor (delivered as option). See "8.2.3 Interface

Mechanical switch description"
-
-
-
Type
Vibration measurement range
Switch rating, resistive load max.

Mechanical switch
oto 4,5 g from 0 to 300 Hz

5A12 V DC
•
2 A24 V DC
1 A48 V DC
0,5 A120 V DC
7 A460 VAC
50/60 Hz
- Reset coil power supply max. 14 W 48 V DC
760 Cover interlocking switch (delivered as option) See "8.2.3 Interface

description"
-
Type
Switch rating, resistive load max.

Mechanical switch
3 A 500 V •
•
178
8.2.3 Interface description

Alfa Laval ref. 557138. rev 3
8.2.4 General
In addition to the Connection List this document
describes limitations and conditions for safe
control, monitoring and reliable operation.
At the end of the document a function graph and
running limitations are found.
• 8.2.5 Definitions
Stand still (Ready for start) means:
• • The machine is assembled correctly.

• All connections are installed according to ;
Connection List, Interconnection Diagram
and Interface Description.
Start means:
• The power to the separator is on.

• The acceleration is supervised to ensure that
a certain speed has been reached within a
certain time. See technical data.
The start procedure continues until full speed has
been reached and a stabilization period has
passed (about 1 minute).
• Normal stop means:

• Stopping of the machine at any time with
brake applied.
• • The bowl must be kept filled.
179
Safety stop means:

The machine must be stopped in the quickest and
safest way due to vibrations or process reasons.
Comply to following conditions:
• The bowl must be kept filled.

• Sludge ejection must not be made.
• The machine must not be restarted before the
reason for the safety stop has been
investigated and action has been taken.
• In case of emergency condition in the plant,

the machine must be stopped in a way that is
described in EN 418.
•
8.2.6 Component description and
signal processing
•
Separator motor 701
The separator is equipped with a 3-phase DOL-
started (direct on line) motor. The separator can
also be started by a YID starter, but then the time
in Y-position must be maximized to 5 seconds.
Vibration sensor 753 (option)

The vibration sensor is an acceleration sensitive
instrument with a mechanical switch.
Signal Processing
The vibration sensor gives an open contact when

the vibration exceeds the preset value.
If too high vibration occurs the separator must be
stopped with automatic Safety Stop.
•
180

(option)
The cover of the separator can be equipped with
an interlocking switch as option.
When the cover is closed the interlocking circuit in
the control system is closed and the separator
could be started.
Signal Processing
• The circuit is closed when the frame hood of the

separator is closed.
The interlocking switch should be connected so
that starting of the motor is prevented when the
• separator hood is not closed.
Discharge
Signal processing
The control system shall contain a memory
function for registration of the number of initiated
discharges.
At indication of the absence of a discharge, the
operator or the control system must initiate a new
discharge. At indication of the absence of two
consecutive sludge discharges, an alarm must be
given and action must be taken.
•
•
181
8.2.7 Function graph and running

limitations
-
A .~
•• -
-
B
••
•
- ,
e
.,
•
D
-.
E
A. Stand still
B. Starting mode
.
•
•
C. Running mode
D. Stop mode
E. Safety stop mode
182
8 Technical Reference 8.3 Water quality
8.3 Water quality

Alfa Laval ref. 553406 rev.3
Specific requirements regarding the quality of water

Water is used in the separator for several different functions: Discharge-
mechanisms, liquid seals, as cooling media and for flushing.
Bad quality of the water can with time cause erosion, corrosion andlor
operating problems in the separator and must therefore be treated to meet
certain demands.
The following requirements are of fundamental importance.
• 1.1 TUrbidity-free water, solids content < 0,001 % of volume.

Deposits must not be allowed to form in certain areas in the
separator.
• 1.2 Max particle size 50 m.
2. Total hardness ~ 180 mg CaC0 3 per litre.

Chalk deposits can build-up if the water is hard (corresponds to
10 °dH or 12,5 °E). Increased operating temperature accelerates the
'.
chalk built-ups.
3. Chloride content ~ 100 ppm NaCI (equivalent to 60mg CI/I).
Chloride ions contribute to corrosion on the separator surfaces in
contact with the operating water, including the spindle. Corrosion is a
process that is accelerated by increased separating temperature, low
pH, and high chloride ion concentration. A chloride concentration
above 60 mgll is not recommended.
•
4. pH >6
Increasing acidity (lower pH) increases corrosion; this is accelerated
by increased temperatures and high chloride ion content.
•
For test methods, contact any Alfa Laval representative.
If these demands cannot be met, the water should be pretreated
according to Alfa Laval's recommendations.
Alfa Laval accepts no liability for consequences arising from
unsatisfactorily purified water supplied by the customer.
183
8.4 Lubricants
8.4 Lubricants
8.4.1 Lubrication chart, general

Affa Laval ref. 553216-01 rev. 5
Lubricating points Lubricants
Bowl spindle ball bearings and buffers are Lubricating oil as specified in "8.4.2
lubricated by oil mist Recommended lubricating oils" on page 186
•
Bowl spindle taper Lubricating oil (only a few drops for rust
protection)
Buffers of bowl spindle Lubricating oil
Bowl:
Sliding contact surfaces and pressure loaded
surfaces such as lock rings, threads of lock rings,
bowl hood, and cap nut
Pastes as specified in "8.4.4 Recommended
lubricants" on page 190
If not specified otherwise, follow the supplier's
recommendation about method of application
•
Rubber seal rings Grease as specified in "8.4.4 Recommended
lubricants" on page 190
Friction coupling ball bearings The bearings are packed with grease and
sealed and need no extra lubrication
Electric motor (if nipples are fitted) Follow manufacturer's instructions
Alfa Laval Lubricating Oil Groups:

• Group A oil: a high quality gear oil on
•
paraffin base with stable AW (anti wear)
additives.
• Group B oil: a high quality gear oil on
paraffin base with stable EP (extreme
pressure) additives.
• Group 0 oil: a synthetic base oil with
additives stable at high operating
temperatures.
Do not mix different oil brands or oils from
different oil groups.
Always use clean vessels when handling
lubricating oil.
184
8 Technical Reference 8.4 Lubricants
Great attention must be paid not to contaminate

the lubricating oil. Of particular importance is to
avoid mixing of different types of oil. Even a few
drops of motor oil mixed into a synthetic oil may
result in severe foaming.
Any presence of black deposits in a mineral type

oil is an indication that the oil base has
deteriorated seriously or that some of the oil
additives have precipitated. Always investigate
why black deposits occur.
If it is necessary to change from one group of oil

brand to another it is recommended to do this in
connection with an overhaul of the separator.
Clean the gear housing and the spindle parts
thoroughly and remove all deposits before filling
the new oil.
NOTE
Always clean and dry parts (also tools)
before lubricants are applied.
~ I .
NOTE
Check the oil level before start. Top up when
necessary. Oil volume see "4.1.1 Ready for
start" on page 30.
• It is of utmost importance to use the lubricants

recommended in our documentation. This does
not exclude, however, the use of other brands,
• provided they have equivalently high quality

properties as the brands recommended. The use
of oil brands and other lubricants than
recommended, is done on the exclusive
responsibility of the user or oil supplier.
Applying, handling and storing of lubricants

Always be sure to follow lubricants
manufacturer's instructions.
185
8.4 Lubricants 8 Technical Reference
8.4.2 Recommended lubricating

oils
Alfa Laval ref. 553219-15 rev. 0
Two different groups of lubricating oils are

approved for this separator.
They are designated as Alia Lavallubricating oil
groups A and O.
The numerical value after the letter states the
viscosity grade.
•
The corresponding commercial oil brands are
found in chapter "8.4.3 Recommended oil
brands" on page 187.
Ambient temperature °C AlIa Laval lubricating oil Time in operation
between +15 and +60
between -10 and +60

group
AJ320
0/220
Oil change interval
1 000 - 1 500 h
2000 h
•
between ±O and +60 0/320 2000 h
Note:
• In a new installation or after change of gear
transmission, change oil after 200 operating
hours.
•
• When the separator is operated for short
periods, lubricating oil must be changed
every 12 months even if the total number of
operating hours is less than stated in the
recommendations above.
•
•
Check and prelubricate spindle bearings on
separators which have been out of service for
6 months or longer.
In seasonal operation: change oil before

every operating period.
•
186
8.4.3 Recommended oil brands
Alfa Laval lubricating oil group A/320

AJfa Laval ref. 553218-11
Viscosity grade VG (ISO 3448/3104) 320
Viscosity index VI (ISO 2909) > 95
Manufacturer Designation
• Alia Laval 546099-80

546099-81
546099-82
546099-83
20 litres
4 litres
208 litres
1 litres
• BP
Castral
Esso Standard Oill

Svenska Statoil/Exxon
Bartran 320
Alpha ZN 320
Nuto 320
Teresso 320
Terrestic 320
Lubmarine/Beijer Polytelis 320

(ELF Brand designation
according to ELF)
Mobil DTE Oil AA '.

Gencirc Ta 320
•
08/Kuwait (Gulf) Harmony AW 320
Shell Tellus C 320

Vitrea 320
Tellus 320
• Texaco/Caltex Regal R&O 320

Paper Machine HD 320
187
Alfa Laval lUbricating oil group 0/220

Alia Laval 542690-80 20 litres

542690-81 4 litres
542690-82 208 litres
•
542690-83 1 litres
BP Enersyn HTX 220
Castrol Alpha Syn T 220
Chevron
Esso/ExxonlStatoil
Lubmarine/ELF
U Itragear 220
Terrestic SHP 220, Teresso SHP 220
Epona SA 220
•
Mobile (Engen) SHC 630
08/Kuwait IGul1 Schumann 220
Shell Paolina 220
•
•
188
Alfa Lavallubricating oil group 0/320

Alia Laval ref. 553218-06

Alia Laval 542690

Separation AB - blue
Castrol Alpha Syn T 320
• Lubmarine/Beijer
(ELF Brand designation
according to ELF)
Epona SA 320
• Optimol Olwerke
08/Kuwait
Chevron
Optigear HT 320
Schumann 320
UItrag ear 320
Esso/EXXON/Standard Oill Terrestic

Svenska Statoil SHP 320
Mobil SHC 632 -~.'.
Shell (Delima HT 320)'

(Paolina 320)
..
) = available in a few countries
• These oils must be used when the frame

temperature is about 80 °C.
If you can't measure the temperature: about
• 80 °C is reached when you can touch the

lower frame surface for a short time only.
189
8.4.4 Recommended lubricants
Pastes and bonded coatings for non-food

applications
Manufacturer Designation Alfa Laval No. Application
Gleitmolybdan Gleitmo 805 K or

805 K varnish 901
Gleitmo Paste G rapid 537086-04
Oow Coming Molykote paste

spray
varnish
1000
0321 R
0321 R
537086-02
535586-01
535586-02
All pressure
loaded
surfaces
•
Rocol
Klueber
Russian Standard
Antiscuffing paste (ASP)
Wolfracoat C paste
VNII NP 232
•
Gost 14068-90
Silicone grease
Manufacturer Designation Alfa Laval No.
•
Oow Coming Molykote 111 compound
100 gr 539474-02
25 gr 539474-03
Gleitmolybdan Silicone paste 750
Wacker Silicone Paste P

(vacuum paste)
•
190
Greases for ball and roller bearings

Alfa Laval ref. 553217-D1 rev.2
Manufacturer Designation Alfa Laval No.
BP Energrease MMEP2
Energrease LS2
Castrol Spheerol SW2 EP

Spheerol EPL2
Chevron Duralith grease EP2
• Exxon
Mobil
Beacon EP2
Mobilith SHC 460

Mobilux EP2
• Gulf
08
Shell
Gulflex MP2
Rembrandt EP2
Caililhia EP Grease T2
Alvania EP Grease 2 or R.A
SKF LGEP2 or LGMT2
Texaco Mullifak AF B2
Mullifak premium 2,3
Russian Standard Fiol 2M, Litol 24

.~
TU 38.201.188
•
•
191
8 Technical Reference 8.5 Drawings
8.5 Drawings
8.5.1 Foundations
A/fa Laval ref. 554893
..- ~A
• '700
min.
I
o
• ..--+._._. I
460
205 I
!
wB / /.
~'-'-'-'-'-'I •
I i ..· k ·
.I I min
....-tI7··.... I
./ .:. I .:...... .
2000
I
{E .
.-
-i-._.- -
.J..._._I- _.-L I
j
I :·---.........:C ...·-. +....:::/·

./ I
I
F
•
1
1'2?0~ E·
Ll-._._. ._.__
• A.
B.
Min. lifting capacity 1000 kg
Max. height of largest
Recommended free floor space for unloading
during service
component incl. lifting tool
C. Centre of separator bowl Min. access area for overhead hoist
D. 4 holes 0 17 for anchorage (no fixed piping within this area)
E. Service side Centre of gravity
F. Tightening torque 20 Nm (without motor)
Locked with lock nut
G. MI6 Minimum property class 8.8
Vertical force not exceeding 20 kNlfoot
Horizontal force not exceeding 20 kNlfoot
193
8.5 Drawings 8 Technical Reference
8.5.2 Electric motor

n.
12
..
:::
A
A = Four holes, 0 18 •
Standards
Size
Weight
Poles
IEC 34-1.IEC 72
160 M
75-90 kg
4
•
Method of cooling IC 41 (IEC 34-6)
Specification TEFC. Europe standard

Marine variants
Type of mounting Degree of

(lEG 34-7) protection
(IEC 34-5)
•
IM 1001
'0
0 IM 3001 IP 44
0 IM 3011
0
Article No. Output
kW
IM 3031
Freq Hz Voltage V
•
539827-10 11 60 220 D
539827-11 11 60 380 D
539827-12 11 60 440 D
539827-13 1) 11 60 575 D
539827-15 11 50 400 D
194
539827-17 11 60 460 D
220 D parall.
539827-18 11 60
440 D serie
539827-20 1) 11 60 460 D
539827-21 11 50 200 D
539827-22 11 50 220 D
539827-23 11 50 380 D
539827-24 11 50 415 D
•
539827-25 11 50 500 D
539827-26 11 50 660 D
539827-27 11 60 200 D
• 1) CSA labelled
•
•
195
8.5 Drawings 8 Techn~alReffirence
1- =--------~-
Atfa l.av.31 re.f 552813 rev. 2
l 4xPgZS
Mux cable
diulTI. Z9m
m
596
1Zh9 5 T
11--
---AjJ·
I~
h
'11
\.QQJ 0
D~
!
I I I J
~l~0j I>?t 1-: I
~:; :--s
'0
M16~.
•
I
.u"" 0
47k5. 10 1l1-6
-
'-- 486
-, ----
j
Manufacturer
Manuf. drawing
Slandards
ABB Motors
3GZV 1000 007-4
.
IEC 34-senes. 7279
. and 85
•
Size 160M
Type M2AA 160M-4

Weight 62 kg
Poles 4
I ron class F
Insu a I 6209-2Z/C3 _
•
Bearings NDE 6209-2Z1C3
DE
rn IC 41 (IEC 34-6)
Method of coo I g ed three-phase
Spec. Totally enclos rvice 3)
•
motor for manne se
Type 0 f mounting De9ree of

protection
<=) IM 1001 .
0 IM 3001 IP 55
0 IM 3011 IP 55
0 I
IM 3031
I
IP 55
J
196
1
Article No Output Speed Freq Voltage Current Pow.fac st I 1 ) Therm 2)
1 Note
kW RPM Hz V A cos <p 'C
552813-01 11,5 1445 50 200 D 44,5 0,85 5,6
552813-02 11,5 1445 50 220 D 40,5 0,85 5,6
552813-03 11,5 1445 50 380 D 23,5 0,85 5,6
552813-04 11,5 1445 50 415 D 21,5 0,85 5,6
552813-05 11,5 1445 50 440 D 20,5 0,85 5,6
552813-06 11,5 1445 50 500 D 18,9 0,85 5,6
552813-07 13 1745 60 220 D 47 0,85 5,6 D-ser
•
440 D 23,5 D-par
552813-08 13 1745 60 230 D 45 0,85 5,6 D-ser

460 D 22,5 D-par
552813-09 13 1745 60 575 D 18 0,85 5,6 CSA-
•
plated
552813-10 11,5 1445 50 380 D 23,5 0,85 5,6

13 1745 60 440 D 23,5
522813-111 11,5 1440 50 690Y 12,9 0,85 5,6

400D 22,5
552813-12 13 1740 60 460D 22,5 0,85 5.6
552813-13 13 1740 60 460D 21,5 0,85 5,6
1) 1st /I=starting current Irated current at direct

on line starting.
2) Thermistors tripping temperature if applicable
3) The motors can be designed to fulfill requirements of

following Classification Societies:
Lloyds Register of shipping (LRS) (Essential Service)
•
Det Norske Veritas (DnV) (Essential Service)
Germanischer L10yd (GL) (Essential Service)
Bureau Veritas (BV) (Essential Service)
American Bureau of shipping (ABS) (Essential Service)
Registro Italiano Navale (RINA) (Essential Service)
•
USSR Register of Shipping (RSU) (Essential Service)
Japanese Classification
Society (NKK) (Essential Service)
Required classification society must always be specified

when ordering. Factory test certificate to be enclosed at the
delivery.
Rated output (kW) vaiid for temp-rise max. 90 "C.
197
8.5.3 Machine plates and safety

labels
6 3
--'-$----
I
-t--+--1
•
I •
• k AIf1I Lsval • 1. Machine plate
Separator LOPX 71 OSFD-34
Manufacturing serial No I Year XXXX
Product No 881243-05-02
• • Machine top part 560979-02

Bowl
Machine bottom part

Max. speed (bowl)
554057-04
549313-01/02 (50/60 Hz)

5175 r.p.m.(50 Hz), 5148 r.p.m. (60 Hz)
•
Direction of rotation (bowl)
Speed motor shaft
El. current frequency
Recommended motor power
1500 r.p.m. (50 Hz). 1800 r.p.m. (60 Hz)
50/60 Hz
12 kW (50 Hz), 14 kW (60 Hz)
•
Max. density of feed 1100 kg/m 3
Max. density of sediment 1300 kg/m 3
Max. density of operating liquid 1000 kg/m 3
Process temperature min.lmax. 01100°C
198
3. Safety label
Text on label:
&. DANGER
011.
~
DANGER
-"""......
Read the instruction manuals before installation, -""""""-
operation and maintenance. Consider inspection
intervals.
Failure to strictly follow instructions can lead to
fatal injury.
If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator and
•
keep bowl filled with liquid during rundown.
Out of balance vibration will become worse if bowl
is not full.
Separator must stop rotating before any
• dismantling work is started.
4. Name plate
~~ Alfa Laval
6. Arrow
Indicating direction of rotation of horizontal driving
device.
8. Power supply frequency
50Hz
• 60Hz
199
8.5.4 Vibration sensor (option)

A/fa Laval ref. 557311, rev. 1
Type: Mechanical velocity

Switch rating, voltage: Max. 460 V AC
Reset coil: 24 V DC, 48 V DC,
117VAC60Hz
Interconnection diagram
For other technical information see chapter 1-2 Reset coil
"8.2.2 Connection list" on page 177 and "8.2.3 3 No
4 Common
Interface description" on page 179.
5 NC
6-8 Heater
R Reset button
•
(option)
For other technical information see chapter
"8.2.2 Connection list" on page 177 and
•
"8.2.3 Interface description" on page 179.
Switch rating
AC (VA) DC (W)
12 V 75 7
24 V 200 7
48 V 280 9
127 V
230 V
500
550
13
•
BK
BN
Black
Brown
•
BU Blue
GN Green
YW Yellow
Interconnection diagram
200
8 Technical Reference 8.6 Storage and instal/ation
8.6 Storage and

installation
8.6.1 Introduction
Most of the instructions are specifications, which
are compulsory requirements.
These specifications are sometimes completed
with non-compulsory recommendations, which
•
could improve the installation quality.
Additional installation information, such as
drawings and component installation instructions,
can be found previous in this chapter.
• 8.6.2 Storage and transport of

goods
Storage
Specification
Upon arrival to the store, check all components
and keep them:
1. Well stored and protected from mechanical
damage and theft.
•
2. Dry and protected from rain and humidity.
3. Organized in the store for ease of access
during installation.
•
A separator can be delivered with different types
of protection:
201
8.6 Storage and installation 8 Technical Reference
• Fixed on a pallet.
The separator must be stored in a room well
protected from mechanical damage and theft
and also dry and protected from rain and
humidity.
Fixed on a pallet
•
• In a wooden box which is not water tight.
--
-
The separator must be stored dry and
protected from rain and humidity. - .' -- hii
-
~.
(
~
•
¥ ",
/
- ~
',~/ ( Ill]
i ~~
li-{)'."
;;t ~
~.
~', ~ ~
In a wooden box which is not water tight
• In a special water-resistant box for outdoor

storage.
~- ~;
•
The separator and its parts have been treated
with an anti-corrosion agent. Once the box
has been opened. store dry and protected
from rain and humidity.
•
The packaging for outdoor storage is to
special order only.
In a special water-resistant box for outdoor storage
202
8 Technical Reference 8.6 Storage and installation
Transport
Specification
• During transport of the separator, the frame
hood and bowl must always be removed
from the machine.
• When lifting a separator it must always be

hung securely. See chapter "5.5 Lifting
instructions" on page 79.
•
WARNING
Crush hazards
•
Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting
instructions.
• During erection, all inlets and outlets to

separators and accessories must be covered
to be protected from dirt and dust.
8.6.3 Planning of installation
Introduction
•
The space required for one or more separators
can be calculated by consulting the drawings in
the chapters "8.2 Basic size drawing" on page
175, "8.5.1 Foundations" on page 193 and
instructions for ancillary equipment, electrical and
•
electronic equipment and cables.
Check the drawings when planning the installation
203
Important measurements
Important measurements are the minimum lifting
height for lifting tackle, shortest distance between
I
driving motor and wall, free passage for
(,
dismantling and assembly, maintenance and
operation.
Plan your installation with sufficient room for the
controls and operation so that instruments are
easily visible. Valves and controls must be within
convenient reach. Pay attention to space Suitable space must be obtained for the maintenance
requirements for maintenance work, work work
•
benches, dismantled machine parts or for a
service trolley.
•
Space for separator
The separator shall be placed in such a way that
suitable space for maintenance and repair is
obtained.
Specification
• See chapter "8.5.1 Foundations" on page 193
for the service space required with the
separator installed.
Recommendation
• The spanner for the large lock ring should
have sufficient space to make a complete
turn without touching any of the ancillary
equipment surrounding the separator.
Lifting height for transport of bowl •

•
Specification
• A minimum height is required to lift the bowl,
bowl parts and the bowl spindle, see chapter
"8.5.1 Foundations" on page 193.
Recommendation
204
8 Technical Reference 8.6 Storage and installation
• When two or more separators are installed,

the lifting height may have to be increased to
enable parts from one separator to be lifted
and moved over an adjoining assembled
separator.
Space for oil changing

Specification
The plug for gearbox oil draining must not be
blocked by floor plate arrangement, etc.
• Recommendation
• It should be possible to place a portable
collecting tray under the gearbox drain plug
•
for changing oil.
Place the separator in such a way that makes the oil

8.6.4 Foundations change easy
NOTE
When lifting a separator it must always be
hung securely. See chapter "5.5 lifting
instructions" on page 79.
Specification
•
•
205
• The separator should be installed at floor

level, see chapter "8.5.1 Foundations" on F
page 193.
• When a separator is installed on a ship, the
separator should be installed in such a way
that the centre line of the electric motor is
parallel with the centre line of the ship. The A
electric motor should preferably be pointing
aft.
A
• The separator must be installed on a strong
and rigid foundation to reduce the influence of F = Forward
A = Aft
•
vibrations from adjacent machinery.
• The foundation should be provided with a

cofferdam.
• Fit the separator frame on the foundation as

follows:
Place the separator frame without
cushions in position.
Check that the bolts do not press against
the edges of the holes, otherwise the
•
elasticity of the mounting of the separator 2
frame will be impeded.
Fit height adjusting washers required.
Check that the separator frame is
horizontal and that all feet rest on the
1. Vibration damper, upper
foundation. 2. Vibration damper, lower
Lift the separator frame, fit the vibration 3. Nut
•
4. Lock nut
dampers (1, 2), lower and check that the
bolts do not press against the edges of
the holes.
Tighten nut (3) with 20 Nm. Hold firmly
and secure with the lock nut (4). Repeat
for the other frame feet.
206
Reader's Comment Form
Dear reader,
It is our ambition to produce as useful and instructive manuals as possible. Should you have any
comments (positive or negative) regarding this manual, please note them down and send them to
us. You can do this by copying this page and sending it by fax, or you could mail it, or hand it over
to your local Alfa Laval representative.
Alfa Laval Separation AB, Separator Manuals, dept. SKL, S-147 80 Tumba, Sweden.
Fax: +46853065029.
•
Your name: Company:
Address: City:
Country:
• Product
Date:
LOPX 710SFD-34 Book No.: 1270882-02' V1
. Yes.~: No
Is it easy to find what you are looking for by using the table of contents? 0 0
Are the chapter and section headings clear and adequate? 0 0
Is the information presented in the correct order for your purposes? 0 0
Does the information in the manual cover your needs? 0 0
Is it easy to understand the instructions in the manual? 0 0
• Is the terminology sufficiently explained?

Are the illustrations easy to understand?
0
0
0
0
•
Your comments:
207
Order Form
II you wish to order extra copies 01 this manual, please copy this page and give it to your local
AlIa Laval representative. who will advise you 01 current prices.
Your local AlIa Laval representative will also be able to help you with inlormation regarding any
other manuals.
Your name: Company:
• Address:
Country:
City:
• Product:
Quantity:
LOPX 71 OSFD-34 Book No.:
Date:
1270882-02 V1
Comments:
•
•
209
Index
A Disc stack pressure 70

Dosing ring 55
Assembly Erosion 55
Bowl body and operating mechanism 121 External cleaning 81
Bowl hood, disc stack and sliding bowl Flexible plate in coupling 71
bottom 110 Guide surfaces 57,72
General directions 96 59
•
Inlet pipe and oil paring disc
Horizontal driving device 155 Lifting instructions 79
InleUoutlet, frame hood 100 Lock ring - priming 73
Operating water device 130 Lock ring - wear an d damage 75
Tools (special) 97 Oil change procedure 88
Vertical driving device 142
•
Oil paring disc - height position 75
Operating mechanism 61
B Operating paring disc - height position 75
Operating slide 62
Bearings Repair of galling 58
Maintenance directions 91 Sliding bowl bottom 62
Replacement on bowl spindle 134 Springs for operating mechanism 63
Replacement on horizontal driving device 148 Vibration analysis 89
Bowl 48 Vibration switch - adjustment of set point 90
Assembly 110,121 Vibration switch - function check 64
Dismantling 104,117 Worm - wear of groove 77
Bowl discs Worm wheel and worm - wear of teeth 85
Cleaning 83 Worm wheel shaft - radial wobble 78
Disc stack pressure 53 Clarifier
Bowl spindle Definition 27
Assembly 142 Description 24
Dismantling 137 Cleaning
•
Brake CIP-system 84
Design and function 18 Cleaning agents 82
Renewing of friction pad 66 Cleaning of bowl discs 83
External cleaning 81
C Connection list 177
•
Connections
Centrifugal separation 16
Description 179
Check points
Dimensions 176
Ball and roller bearings 91
Corrosion 49
Before shutdowns 94
Coupling
Bowl hood seal ring 48
Function 19
Bowl spindle - height position 65
Renewing of friction pads 69
Bowl spindle - radial wobble 66
Cover interlocking switch (option)
Bowl spindle cone and bowl body nave 65
Brake
Design and function 20
66
Buffer springs and ball bearing housing
Drawing 200
67
Cleaning agents
Cracks 52
82
Cleaning of bowl discs 83
Corrosion 49
Coupling friction pads 69
Cracks 52
211
0 Guide surfaces
Intermediate Service 57
Daily checks 41 Major Service 72
Density of feed 173 Repair of galling 58
Disc 53
Disc stack pressu re 53 H
Dismantling
Bowl body and operating mechanism 117 Horizontal driving device
Bowl hood, disc stack and sliding bowi Assembly 155
bottom 104 Dismantling 150
General directions 96
Horizontal driving device 150
InleVoutlet, frame hood 99
Operating water device 127 Installation 203
•
Tools 97 Interface
Vertical driving device 137 Definition 27
Drawings Description 25
Basic size draWing 193 Interface description 179
Cover interlocking switch (option) 200 Intermediate service 37.42
Dimensions of connections
Electric motor
Foundations
Machine plates and safety labels
Vibration sensor (option)
176
194
193
198
200
L
Lifting instructions
Lock ring
Priming
Wear and damage
79
73
60
•
E Lubricants
Electric motor Lubrication chart, general, oil groups 184
Drawings 194 Oil change interval 186
See Motor 194 Oil change procedu re 88
Emergency stop. See Safety stop Oil level 88
Erosion 55 Recommended greases 191
Exploded views Recommended lubricating oils 186
Bowl body and operating mechanism 116 Recommended oil brands 187
Bowl hood, disc stack and sliding bowl Recommended pastes and bonded coatings 190
bottom 102 Volume of lubricating oil 173
InleVoutlet, frame hood
Operating water device
Vertical driving device
148
98
125
134
M
Machine plates and safety labels
Main parts
198
18
•
•
Maintenance intervals 38
F Maintenance logs
Foundations 3-year Service (3S) 47
Drawing 193 Daily checks 41
Installation 205 Intermediate Service (IS) 42
Frame feet Major Service (MS) 44
Installation 205 Oil change 41
Replacement 47 Maintenance, general information
Friction coupling Ball and roller bearings 91
Function 19 Before shutdowns 94
Cleaning 81
G Lifting instructions 79
Maintenance intervals 37
Gear Maintenance procedure 39
Number of teeth 173 Oil change procedure 88
Wear of teeth 85 Service kits 40
Vibration analysis 89
212
Major service 37,44 Running 32
Materials 173 Safety stop 34
Metal surfaces Sensors and indicators 20
Cleaning and cleaning agents 81,82 Separating function 24
Corrosion 49 Sludge discharge cycle 25
Cracks 52 Start 31
Erosion 55 Storage and transportation 201
Motor Technical data 173
Cleaning 81 Service instructions. See Check points
Coupling 71 Service kits 40
Drawing 194 Shutdown 94
Power consumption 173 Start 31
Stopping procedure 33
N Storage 201
• Noise
0
173 T
Technical data
Throughput
173
•
Oil. See Lubrication Capacity 173
Operation 30 Definition 27
Transport 201
p Trouble tracing - mechanical functions
Noise 163
Power consumption 173 Retardation time too long 165
Power transm ission 19 Separator vibrates 162
Process capacity 173 Smell 163
Purification 163
Speed too low
Definition 27 164
Starting power too high
Starting power too low 164
R Starting time too long 164
Water in worm gear housing 165
Ready for start 30
Revolution counter Trouble tracing - separating functions
Bowl fails to open
, 167
Design and function 20
Number of revolutions Bowl opens accidentally 167
173
•
Unsatisfactory separation result 168
Trouble tracing - vibration switch
S Impossible to adjust setpoint to obtain tripping 169
Safety Instructions 9 Vibration switch does not reset 169
Separation
•
Basic principles 16 V
Process main parts 21
Separating function trouble tracing Vertical driving device
166
Separation temperatures Dismantling 137
17
Separator Vibration
Basic size drawing During start 31
175
Safety stop 34
Brake 19
Connection list Trouble tracing 162
177
Foundations Vibration analysis 89
193
Installation planning Vibration switch (option)
203
Interface description Adjustment of setpoint 90
179
Lifting instructions Description and signal processing 180
79
Drawing 200
Main parts 21
Mechanical power transmission Function check 64
19
Normal slop Trouble tracing 169
33
Overview 18
Ready for start 30
213
---------_.
w
Warning signs 13
Weight 173
Worm gear
Function and description 19
Num ber of teeth 173
Wear of teeth 85
•
•
•
•
214
A L F A L A V A L S E PAR A T o N
LOPX 710SFD·34
Spare parts catalogue Catalogo parti di ricambio

Reservdelskatalog Catalogo de pecas
sobressalentes
Ersatzteilkatalog
Varaosaluettelo
Catalogue de pieces de
rechange KQTQAoyoa
QVTOAAOKTlKWV
Catalogue de piezas de
recambio Reserveonderdelen-
catalogus
KaTaIlOr 3anaCHblX
yaCTeL-1 Reservedelskatalog
Product No. 881243-05-02/1

Book No. 1270883-02 V3
~~ Alfa Laval
A l F A l A V A l SEPARAT o N
LOPX 710SFD·34
•
•
Spare parts catalogue Catalogo parti di ricambio
• Reservdelskatalog
Ersatzteilkatalog
Catalogue de pieces de
Catalogo de pecas
sob ressalentes
Varaosaluettelo
• rechange
Catalogue de piezas de
recambio
KaTanor 3anaCHblX
KQTQAoyoa
QVTQAAQKTlKWV
Reserveonderdelen-
catalogus
4aCTelil Reservedelskatalog
Product No. 881243-05-02/1

Book No. 1270883-02 V3
~: Alfa Laval
•,;
"c
"<
"
o
$
r
"c:
Cl
er
C
C
c
C
"G.
§
c
c
c
c ,
c
Ct
·
•
G'
Alia Laval Separation AB

Separator Manuals, dept. SKEL
S-147 80 Tumba, Sweden
Telephone: +46 8 53 06 50 00
Telelax: +46 8 53 03 1040
I
Printed in Sweden, 00-02
© Alfa Laval Separation AB 2000

This publication or any part thereol may not be
reproduced or transmitted by any process or
means without prior written permission 01
Alia Laval Separation AB.
Not approved 000223 08.19

Contents
1 Read this first 5
1.1 General information 7
1.2 Translation list 19
2 Machine bottom part 22

2.1 Driving device horizontal 24
•
2.2 Driving device vertical 26
2.3 Guard 28
2.4 Guard 30
•
)
3 Separator bowl 32
,,
,
~ 4 Machine top part 34
0
,0
4.1 Discharge funnel 36
"~ 4.2 Paring disc device 38
)
"~
)
4.3 Inlet and outlet device 40
)
~ 4.4 Feed and discharge piping 42
0
J
n
< 5 Parts for motor mounting, motor
">.
;; adapter gUide'" 250 mm 44
-,>
6 Parts for motor mounting, NEMA standard 46
I~
, 7 Set of tools 48
"
•
8 Vibration monitoring unit 52
9 Cover interlocking kit 54
10 Intermediate service kit 56
11 Major service kit 58
12 Service kit for foundation feet 60
13 Tool box 62
14 Cross reference list 65
3
1 Read this first
1 Read this first
r.~ Alfa Laval
-
-
=
•
r;;;l The name plate - the guide for finding the correct spare part numbers.
L..:::J See also Warnings in chapter "1.1 General information" on page 7.
r;;l
Maskinskylten - en guide till det ralla reservdelsnurnret.
~ Se aven Varningar i kapitel "1.1 Allman inforrnation" pi!. sidan 8.
Id;I Das Typenschild - ein Hinweis zur korrekten Ersatzteilnummer.

L::...J Siehe auch Warnhinweise in Kapitel "1.1 AlIgemeine Informationen" auf Seite 9.
Ifr"I La plaque de la machine - un guide pour trouver le numero de piece de rechange correct.
~ Voir ace propos les mises en garde du chapitre "1.1 Inforrnations generales" en page 1O.
r;;J La placa-marca de la maquina - guia del numero correcto del repuesto. Consulte tambien las
L...::.J Advertencias del capitulo "1.1 Informaci6n General" en la pagina 11.
~ <lJl1pMeHHaR Ta6m14Ka MaWI1Hbl - yKasaTel1b npaBI111HOrO HOMepa sanacHoil 4aCTI1.
L:.:...J CM. TalOKe npeAynpe>KAeHI1R B rnaBe "1.1 06U\l1e CBeAeHI1R" Ha CTpaHI1Lle 12.
IItl La targhella della macchina - guida al corrello numero dei ricambi.
~ Vedere anche le Avvertenze nel capitolo "1.1 Informazioni generali" a pagina 13.
• rptl
L!:...J
A placa do fabricante da maquina - um guia do numero correto das partes sobressalentes.
Consultar tarnbem os Avisos no capitulo "Informayao Geral1.1" da pagina 14.
IfIl Konekilpi - opastin oikeaan varaosanumeroon.
~ Katso myos kappaleessa 1.1 sivulla 15 olevaa kohtaa "Yleiset tiedot ".
r;jI
H mvoKioo Tile; ~Ilxovl'je; E:[VOl 0 oOlly6e; TOU OWOTOU OVTOAAOKTlKOU. L'.e:iTE: E:n[OIle; ne;
~ np0E:IOonOLI'jOE:Ie; TOU KE:<pOAO[OU "1.1 rENIKEr nI\HPO<lJOPIEr", OTIl OE:Aioo 16.
r-;;II
Het gegevensplaatje - een wegwijzer naar het juiste onderdeelnummer.
~ Zie ook Waarschuwingen in hoofdstuk "1.1 Algemene informatie", op blz. 17.
'd;l Typeskiltet - en gUide til det relle reservedelsnummer.
~ Se ogsi!. under Advarsler i kapitel "1.1 Generelle oplysninger" pi!. side 18.
5
1 Read this first
1.1 General information
Safeguard your commitment to quality by always using genuine

Alfa Laval spare parts.
Remember, Alfa Laval cannot accept responsibility for the failure of a
separator equipped with non-original spare parts. We guarantee the
quality and reliability of our products.
• ~ WARNINGB
When changing certain parts in the separator bowl assembly, the

vibration level may increase. This can result in shorter life time of
components like rolling bearings and gears. If severe unbalance
occurs, the rotating bowl assembly can come into contact with the
frame causing damage to equipment and injuries to personnel.
It is strongly recommended that the exchange of parts is
supervised by an Alfa Laval service engineer. Alfa Laval
assumes no liability for damage to property or injury to personnel
resulting from unauthorized installation of those parts.
~ WARNINGC
• Certain bowl parts carry milling marks from the balancing of the
complete separator bowl. These parts must not be replaced
without rebalancing the complete bowl. The rebalancing should
be made by an Alfa Laval service shop.
7
LOPX 710SFD-34
Folj dill kvalitetsUinkande genom all endast anviinda AlIa Laval

originalreservdelar.
Kom ih<\g all AlIa Laval inte tar n<\got ansvar lor lel p<\ en separator
som inneh<\lIer icke-originaldelar. Vi garanterar kvaliteten och
driftsiikerheten hos v<\ra egna produkter.
~ VARNINGB
•
Om vissa delar i separatorkulan byts ut, kan vibrationsniv<\n
komma all oka. Della kan i sin tur leda till lorkortad livsliingd p<\
t.ex. lager och viixlar. Om kraftiga vibrationer uppst<\r, kan den
roterande kulan komma all sl<\ i stativets delar, vilket kan medlora
..
'C"
IX
<
allvarlig maskin- och personskada. Det iir diirfor av stor vikt all '"
o
utbyte av kulans delar overvakas av en serviceingenjor fn'ln :;;
Alfa Lava!. AlIa Laval tar inget ansvar for maskin- eller r
personskador som kan uppkomma p<\ grund av all delar bylls ut '"
U
c:{I
av icke auktoriserad personal.
E
c
c:
C
IX
G
C
c
c
c
c
~
c
VARNINGC e
•
G.
Vissa av separatorkulans delar har urfriista sp<\r som resultat av '3

balansering av hela kulan. Dessa delar kan inte bytas ut utan all
en ombalansering av kulan gors. For all biista resultat ska
uppn<\s, ska den komplella kulan siindas till en AlIa Laval
serviceverkstad fOr ombalansering.
•
8
1 Read this first
Sichern Sie sich Ihren Anspruch aul Qualitat durch ausschlieBliche

Verwendung von original Alia Laval Ersatzteilen.
Beachten Sie bitte, daB Alia Laval keine Verantwortung fOr den
Auslall eines Separators Obernirnmt, der mit Nicht-Originalteilen
ausgestattet ist. Wir garanlieren fOr die Qualitat und Zuverlassigkeit
unserer Produkte.
• ~ WARNUNGB
Durch den Austausch bestimmter Teile in der Separatortrommel-

Baugruppe, kann ihr Schwingungspegel steigen. Dies kann zu
einer kOrzeren Lebensdauer von Teilen, wie z.B. Walzlagern und
Getrieben, fOhren. Bei einer schweren Unwucht kann die
rotierende Trommelbaugruppe in Kontakt mit dem Gestell kom-
men, was zu Beschadigungen der AusrOstung od er Personenver-
letzungen fOhren kann. Es wird dringend emplohlen, den
Austausch von einem Alfa Laval Service-Ingenieur beauf.
sichtigen zu lassen. Alia Laval Obernimmt keine Haftung fOr
eine Geratebeschiidigung oder Personenverletzung aulgrund
einer ungenehmigten Montage dieser Teile.
o
>
"
• ~ WARNUNGC
• Bestimmte Trommelteile haben Frasmarken vom Auswuchten

der kompletten Separatortrommel. Diese Teile dOrlen nicht ohne
eine Neuauswuchtung der kompletten Trommel ausgetauscht
werden. Die Neuauswuchtung sollte in einer Alia Laval Service-
werkstatt erfolgen.
9
LOPX 710SFD-34
Respectez votre engagement de qualite en utilisant toujours des

pieces de rechange d'origine Alia Laval.
Attention, Alia Laval decline toute responsabilite en cas de panne

d'un separateur equipe de pieces de rechange qui ne sont pas
d'origine. Nous garantissons la qualite et la liabilite de nos produits.
Lt. AVERTISSEMENT B
Le remplacement de certaines pieces du bol du separateur risque

•
d'augmenter le niveau de vibrations, et donc de reduire la duree
a
de vie des composants tels que les paliers roulements et les
engrenages. En cas de desequilibre trop important, le bol en
rotation risque d'entrer en contact avec des pieces du bati,
o
provoquant ainsi des deteriorations de I'equipement et des ~
blessures du personnel. Nous vous incitons lortement lairea S;
realiser le remplacement sous la surveillance d'un technicien u
!::
[I
de maintenance Alfa Laval. Alia Laval n'assume aucune E
responsabilite en cas de deterioration du materiel ou de blessure c
c
du personnel resultant d'une installation non approuvee de ces C
pieces. '"
G.
§
c
c
c
c
E
•
G
Lt. AVERTISSEMENT C 3
Certaines pieces du bol presentent des marques de reperage

effectuees lors de I'equilibrage du bol du separateur. 11 ne laut
pas remplacer ces pieces sans avoir au prealable procede un a
nouvel equilibrage de I'ensemble du bol. Cet equilibrage doit etre
realise dans un atelier de reparation Alia Laval.
•
10
1 Read this first
Proteja su compromiso con la calidad utilizando siempre repuestos

originales Alia Laval.
Recuerde que Alia Laval no acepta ninguna responsabilidad por el
lallo de una separadora equipada con repuestos no originales.
Alia Laval garantiza la calidad y la liabilidad de sus productos.
• ~ ADVERTENCIA B
Cuando se cambian ciertas piezas del conjunto del rotor de la

separadora, puede que se produzca un aumento del nivel de
vibraciones, 10 que puede provocar un desgaste de algunos com-
ponentes, como los rodamientos de rodillos y los engranajes. Si
se produce un desequilibrado importante, el conjunto del rotor en
movimiento puede rozar con el bastidor, causando serios danos
al equipo y al personal. Se recomienda encarecidamente que el
cambio sea supervisado por un tecnico de mantenimiento de
Alfa Laval. Alia Laval no se hace responsable de los dafios
materiales 0 dafios personales provocados por la instalaci6n no
auto rizada de esas piezas.
~ ADVERTENCIA C
• Algunas piezas del rotor lIevan marcas estampadas para el

equilibrado del rotor completo de la separadora. Siempre que se
cambien estas piezas se debe equilibrar de nuevo todo el rotor,
operaci6n que debe ser realizada por un experto de un centro de
servicio Alia Laval.
11
LOPX 710SFD-34
AnA o6ecne4eH~A Ka4eCTBa pa60Tbl Bawero o6opYAoBaH~A

~cnonbsY~Te TonbKO nOAn~HHble sanaCHble AeTan~ KOMnaH~~
AlIa Lava!.
nOMH~Te: KOMnaH~A Alia Laval He HeceT OTBeTCTBeHHOCTb sa

HapyweH~A pa60Tbl cenapaTopa, Ha KOTOpOM yCTaHoBneHbl He
nOAn~HHbre sanaCHble AeTan~. Mbl rapaHT~pyeM Ka4eCTBO ~
HaAe>KHOCTb Hawe~ npOAYKll~~.
npE,QynPE>K,QEHl1E B
•
B cnY4ae saMeHbl HeKOTopblX 4aCTe~ YCTpO~CTBa 6apa6aHa
cenapaTopa MO>KeT nOBbrC~TbCA ypoBeHb B~6pall~~.3To MO>KeT
np~BeCT~ K COKpallleH~1O cpOKa cny>K6bl KOMnOHeHTOB, TaK~X
KaK nOAw~nH~K~ ~ np~BOA. B cnY4ae sHa4~TenbHoro
A~c6anaHca, YCTPO~CTBO BpalllalOlllerOCA 6apa6aHa MO>KeT
BO~T~ B KOHTaKT co CTaH~HO~, 4TO np~BeAeT K CepbeSHoMy
•
"c
'"<
"
o
j;
nOBpe>KAeH~1O o6opYAOBaH~R ~ TpaBMaM o6cnY>K~BalOlllero S;
U
nePCOHana. HaCTOATenbHO peKoMeHAyeTcA, 4T06bl saMeHa r
6blna npOKOHTpOnl1pOBaHa I1H>KeHepOM no o6cnY>KI1BaHI1IO cr
C
KOMnaHl111 Alfa Laval. KOMnaH~A AlIa Laval He HeceT H~KaKO~ c
c
OTBeTCTBeHHOCT~ sa nOBpe>KAeH~A co6CTBeHHOCT~ ~n~
~
TpaBMbl nepCOHana B pesynbTaTe HepaspeweHHO~ YCTaHOBK~ G.
C
3T~X AeTane~. c
c
,
c
c
c
3
npE,QynPE>K,QEHl1E C
Ha HeKoTopblX 4aCTAX 6apa6aHa nOCTaBneHbl OTMeTK~ nocne

6anaHc~poBK~ 6apa6aHa cenapaTopa nonHOCTblO. 3T~ 4aCT~
He MOryT 6blTb saMeHeHbl 6es nOBTopHO~ 6anaHc~pOBK~ Bcero
YCTpO~CTBa 6apa6aHa cenapaTopa. nOBTOpHaA 6anaHc~pOBKa
•
AOn>KHa 6blTb npo~sBeAeHa B peMOHTHOM lleHTpe AlIa Lava!.
12
1 Read this first
Salvaguardate la qualita del vostro separatore utilizzando sempre

ricambi originali Alia Lava!.
Ricordate che la Alia Laval non accetta alcuna responsabilita in caso
di diletti al separatore dovuti all'utilizzo di ricambi non originali. La
Alia Laval garantisce la qualita e I'affidabilita esclusivamente dei
propri prodotti.
• ~ AVVERTENZA B
In seguito alia sostituzione di alcune parti del tamburo del separa-

tore, i1livello di vibrazioni pub aumentare. Questo pub compor-
tare la riduzione della vita utile di componenti quali cuscinetti a
rulli ed ingranaggi. In caso di elevato spostamento, il tamburo pub
entrare a contatto con le parti del telaio provocando seri danni
all'attrezzatura e lesioni alle persone. Si raccomanda caldamente
di lar controllare la sostituzione da un tecnico di assistenza
Alfa Laval. La Alia Laval non assume alcuna responsabilita per
danni alle cose 0 lesioni al personale dovuti all'installazione non
autorizzata delle suddette parti.
?
>
~. ~ AVVERTENZA C
,
Alcune parti del tamburo dipendono dal bilanciamento comples-
•
sivo del tamburo del separatore. Le suddette parti non possono
essere sostituite senza procedere ad un nuovo bilanciamento.
Per ottenere i migliori risultati, rivolgersi ad un centro assistenza
Alia Laval per iI ribilanciamento dell'intero gruppo.
13
LOPX 710SFD-34
Preserve 0 seu compromisso com a qualidade utilizando sempre

peyas originais Alia Lavai.
Nao se esqueya de que a Alia Laval nao assume quaisquer
responsabilidades pela avaria dum separador que nao esteja
equipado com peyas originais. Por isso, asseguramos a garantia da
qualidade e liabilidade dos nossos produtos.
~ AVISOB
Ao mudar determinadas peyas no conjunto do rotor da separa-

•
dora, podeni. provocar um aumento da vibrayao. Tal podera origi-
nar a reduyao do tempo de durayao dos componentes, tais como
rolamentos de roletes e engrenagens. Gaso se verilique um
desequilibrio acentuado, 0 conjunto do rotor girat6rio podera
o
entrar em contacto com a estrutura, vindo a provocar danos no $
r
equipamento e lerimentos pessoais. Recomenda-se vivamente ~
U
que a substituiyao de peyas seja vistoriada por urn tecncico de r
servit;:o da Alia Laval. A Alia Laval nao assume qualquer iI
C
responsabilidade por danos em bens ou lerimentos pessoais c
c
resultantes da instalayao nao autorizada daquelas peyas. ~
G:
~
c
c
c
c
c
c
~ AVISOC
•
'3
Determinadas partes do rotor contem marcas de atrito do bal-

anceamento do rotor do separador completo. Estas peyas nao
devem ser subslituidas sem reequilibrar 0 rotor completo.
o reequilibro deve ser executado por uma centro de assistencia
Alia Laval.
•
14
Not approved 000223 08.1 9
1 Read this first
Varmista kayttamiesi tuotteiden laatu kayttamalla aina aitoja ja

alkuperaisia AlIa Laval -varaosia.
Muista, ettei Alia Laval voi vastata sellaisen separaattorin
toiminlahairiosla, jossa on kaylelly muila kuin alkuperaisia varaosia.
Me lakaamme omien tuotteidemme laadun ja luotettavuuden.
• ~ VAROITUSB
•
,
,2
,,~
,
~
Kun separaattorin kuula-asennelman tiettyja osia vaihdetaan, sen
tarinan laso voi kasvaa. Tama voi johlaa joidenkin osien, kuten
vierinlalaakereiden ja hammasvaihteiden, kayttoian Iyhenemi-
seen. Jos asennelma joutuu pahasti epatasapainoon, pyoriva
kuula-asennelma voi koskettaa runkoa ja aiheuttaa laite- ja henki-
lovahinkoja. Suosittelemme, etta AlIa Lavalin huoltoinsinoori
5 valvoo vaihtoa. AlIa Laval ei ota vasluuta omaisuudelle lai henki-
~ lokunnalle aiheutuneista vahingoista, mikali ne johluvat naiden
)
)
) osien vaarin suoritetusta asennuksesta.
ii
j
o
,5,;
~ VAROITUSC
Tietyissa kuulan osissa on merkinnat koko separaattorikuulan

tasapainotuksesta. Naita osia ei saa vaihtaa ilman, etta koko
• kuula tasapainotetaan. Tasapainolus on annettava Alia Laval-

korjaamon hoidettavaksi.
15
LOPX 710SFD-34
6l00CPOAiou: H] i5tOI-JE:uoi] am; YlO nOlOTJlTO XPJlOll-lOnOlWVTOe;

nOVTOTC yvi]OLQ OVTOAAOKTlKO Alfa Lava!.
LOe; uncv8ul-Ji~oul-Jc OTl Jl Alfa Laval i5cv OVOA0I-Jj30VCl cu8uvJl YLQ

TJl j3AOj3Jl i5l0XWplOTi]pO nou i5cv c(VQl c~OnAIOl-Jtvoe; I-Jc OU8CVTlKO
OVTOAAOKTlKO. EyyUWI-JOOTC TJlV nOlOTJlTo KOl TJlV o~lomoTio TWV
npo'iovTWV I-JOe;.
~ npOI:OXHB
'OTOV OAAO~CTC OpWl-Jtvo C~OPTi]I-JOTO OTO OUOTJlI-JO TOU

•
TUl-JnOVOu TOU i5l0xwpIOTi]po, Jl OTo8I-JJl Kp0i500I-JWV I-Jnopc( vo
OU~Jl8d. AUTO I-Jnopd vo tXCl oov onoTtACOI-JO I-JlKPOTCpJl
i5l0PKCIO ~wi]e; TWV C~OPTJlI-JOTWV, onwe; POUACI-JOV KQl
YPOVO~lO. LC ncp(nTWOJl ooj3opi]e; tAACllilJle; ~uyooTo8I-JlOJle;,
TO ncplOTpCCPOI-JCVO OUOTJlI-JO TOU TUl-JnOVOU I-Jnopc( vo tA8cl o
:;;
OC cnocpi] I-JC TO nAO(OlO, npOKOAWVTOe; ~Jll-Jlte; OTO I-JJlXOVJlI-JO !j;
KQl TPOUI-JOTlOI-JO TOU npoowmKOU. Ol onolcali!inoTc (J
!::
QhhQyte; C!;QPTlll-JciTwv nptncl VQ Y(VOVTQl uno TIlV 0:
cn(~hcljJll IJIlXQVlKOU Tile; Alfa Laval. H Alfa Laval i5cv cptPCI

E
cc
K0I-II-I(o cu8uvJl YLQ UAIKte; ~Jll-llte; i] YlQ TPOUI-I0Tl0I-I0 TOU
npoowmKou AOYW Tono8tTJlOJle; OUTWV TWV C~OPTJlI-IOTWV ono
~
G.
I-IJl C~OUOl0i50TJll-ltVO OT0I-I0. C
c
c
c
c
c
:§
•
G.
~ npOI:OXHC
3
OPlOl-ltVO C~OPTi]I-IOTO TOU TUl-lnOVOu cptpouv ixvJl

cppc~OpiOI-JOTOe; ono TJl ~uyooTo8l-1l0Jl OAOKAJlPOU TOU
ouoTi]I-I0TOe; TOU TUl-lnOVOu TOU i5l0XWPlOTi]pO. AUTO TO
C~OPTi]I-IOTO i5cv nptncl vo OVTlKOTOOT08ouv Xwp(e; VO
•
~OVOY(VCl ~uyoOTo8l-1l0Jl OAOKAJlpOU TOU OUOTi]I-I0TOC; TOU
TUl-lnOVOu TOU i5LQXWPIOTi]pO. H cnovo~uyooTo8l-1l0Jl nptncl
vo yiVCI OC KonOlO ono TO cmOKCUOOTlKO KtVTpO TJle;
Alfa Lava!.
16
1 Read this first
Doe geen concessies aan kwaliteit en gebruik altijd originele

Alfa Laval-reserveonderdelen.
Wij wijzen u erop. dat Alfa Laval geen verantwoordelijkheid kan
aanvaarden voor defecten aan een separator die is uitgerust met niet-
originele reserveonderdelen. Wij garanderen de kwaliteit en de
betrouiNbaarheid van onze producten.
• ~ WAARSCHUWING B
,,~.
Als er bepaalde onderdelen van de separatortrommel worden
vervangen, kan het trillingsniveau veranderen. Dit kan leiden tot
5 een verkorte levensduur van onderdelen als rollagers en tandwie-
5, len. Als er sprake is van een ernstige mate van onbalans, kan de
,, roterende trommel in contact komen met het frame. wat kan lei-
5 den tot ernstige schade aan goederen of tot persoonlijk letsel.
,5 Het is dan ook ten sterkste aan te raden om onderdelen te laten
:l
) vervangen onder supervisie van een onderhoudstechnicus
)
~
van Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval aanvaardt geen enkele aansprakelijk-
D
J
heid voor schade aan goederen of persoonlijk letsel als gevolg
n
,
<
J
:;
van onoordeelkundige installatie van die onderdelen.
,">
'I
~. ~ WAARSCHUWING C
• Gp bepaalde onderdelen van de trommel zitlen freesmarkeringen

van het uitbalanceren van de gehele separatortrommel. Deze
onderdelen mogen niet worden vervangen zonder dat de gehele
trommel opnieuw wordt uitgebalanceerd. Het opnieuw uitbal-
anceren moet gebeuren in een onderhoudswerkplaats van
Alfa Lava!.
17
LOPX 710SFD-34
Beskyt din investering i kvalitet ved altid at anvende originale

reservedele tra Alta Laval.
Husk at Alta Laval piltager sig intet ansvar tor tejl i separatorer, der er
udstyret med uoriginale reservedele. Vi indestilr tor vore produkters
kvalitet og driftssikkerhed.
~ ADVARSELB
Ved udskiftning at visse dele i separatorkuglen, kan vibrations-

•
niveauet blive toregel. Delle kan torkorte levetiden tor komponen-
ter som kuglelejer og tandhjul. I tiltrelde at kraftige vibrationer kan
den roterende separatorkugle komme i kontakt med rammedele,
hvilket kan medtere alvorlig beskadigelse at udstyr og person-
skade. Det anbetales pil det kraftigste, at udskiftningen sker o
S;
under tilsyn at en servicetekniker tra Alia Laval. Alfa Laval r
piltager sig intet ansvar tor ting- eller personskade som telge at '"
U
r
ikke-autoriseret montering at disse dele. U
C
c
c
~
G.
§
c
c
~
c
c
ADVARSELC c
c
Visse kugledele er torsynet med mrerker tra atbalanceringen at

den samlede separatorkugle. Ved udskiftning at disse dele skal •
3
•
der toretages en ny atbalancering at den samlede kugleenhed.
Atbalanceringen ber toretages at et Alta Laval-servicecenter.
18
1 Read this first
1.2 Translation list

Oversattningslista
Obersetzungsliste
Liste de traduction
Lista de traducciones
8 (B 0 G
Reservdelsnummer Teil-Nr. Numero de piece Pieza No.
Anta! Anzahl Quantita Cantidad
• Benamning
Anmarkningar
Bezeichnung
Anmerkungen
Denomination
Remarques
Descripci6n
Notas
1:-
,,5
,
Maskinlyp Maschinentyp Type de machine Tipo de ma-quina
,,, Produktnr Produktnummer Numero de produit Numero de producto
~
,9 Maskinblocksbenamning Bezeichnung des De'lnomination de partie Descripci6n de secci6n
~ Maschinenblocks de machine de la rnaquina
)
)
~ Maskinblocksnr Maschinenblock Nr. Partie de machine fl2 No. de secci6n de
D maquina
J
n
i
J Undergruppsbenamning Bezeichung der Denomination de Descripci6n de
1: Untergruppe sous-ensemble subconjunto
:;
,,
0 U ndergruppsnr Untergruppe Nr. N2. de sous-ensemble Numero de subconjunto
•
,
Se sidan
Figurhanvisning
Siehe Seite
Bildhinweise
Voir page
ReI. de fig.
Vease la pagina
Referencia de figura
• Produktnamn
Utbyte n6dvandiggor
ombalansering av kulan
Produktname
Austausch erfordert
Wiederauswuchtung der
Trommel
Nom du produit
Le remplacement
necessite le
reequilibrage du bol
Nombre del producto
El racmbio requiere el
reequilibrado del rotor
Se separat Siehe separate Voir liste separee des Vease la lista de piezas
reservdelslista Ersatzteilliste pieces de rechange separada
Levereras ej som Nicht als Ersatzteil Non Iivre comme piece No se entrega oomo
reservdel geliefert de rechange pieza de recambio
19
LOPX 710SFD-34
Translation list
CnOBapb nepeBAa
Lista traduzioni
Lista para tradu~ao
Kiiiinnosluttelo
G OD 0 IT]
,QeTanb Nil Nr. parte Numero de peca Varaosanumero
•
Kon-Bo Quantita Quantidade Lukumaara
Ha~MeHoBaH~e Descrizione Descricao Nimitys
•
npHMeYaHHA Note Notas Huomatuksia
c.:
MawHHa nma Tipo macchina Tipo de maquina Konetyyppi C
'"<c.:
ApnlKyn No Nr.produtto No. do produto TuoUeen no
0
~
r
HaJIlMeHOaaHHe 5noKa Descrizione unita Descricao da unidade eta Koneenosan nimitys :-
U
MaWHHbl macchina maquina r
{I
E
onoK MaWl1Hbl Nil Nr. unita macchina Numero de unidade da Koneenosan no C
maquina C
C
HaJ.1MeHOBaHlo1e rpynnbl Descrizione sottogruppo Descriao do subconjunto Ataryhman nimitys
'G:"
C
c
c
c
c
rpynna No Nr. sottogruppo Numero de 5ubconjunto Alaryhman no c
c
c
•
G.
CM. CTpaHHIlY Vedi pagina Vease la pagina Ks sivu
3
CCbUlKB Ha 3CK1II3 Rif. fig. Referencia de figura Kuvaviile
HaMMeHosaHlIIe
apTlIIKyna
3aMeHs TPe6yeT
6aJ'laHClIIPOBKlo1 6apa6aHa
Nome prodotto
La sostituzione comporta
la iequilibratura del
tamburo
Nombre del producto
El racmbio requiere el
reequilibrado del rotor
Tuotteen nimi
VaihdeUaessa kuula
tasapainoitettava
uudelleen
•
CM.OT,Q9nbHblv. Vedi Iista separata delle Vease la lista de piezas Katso erillista
nepe""9Hb 3anaCHblX parti di ricambio separada varaosalueUeloa
""aCTev.
He nOCTaBneHa BMeCTe C Non fomito come parte di No se entrega como Ei toimitela varaosana
3anaCHblMlII ""aCTAMlII ricambio pieza de recambio
20
1 Read this first
Translation list
rAorrAPI
Vertaallijst
OVersalttelseliste
GO GO ~
I\ple~6c; aVTaAAQKTlKOU Onderdeelnr. Reservedelsnummer
LUvOhO Hoeveelheid Antal
• ne::pLYP04lri
napQlllPr10E:ll~
Beschrijving
Opmerkingen
Betegnelse
Bemaerkninger
•
,
,,:1
,,,
,,
Tunoc; 1J1lXaVTU.l QTOc;
APl8J.loC; npOtQVTOe;
Machinetype
Produktnr.
Maskinlype
Produktnr.
?
j
, ne::plypmpr;
OUYKpon'IIJQTOC; 1J1lXOvrl<:
Machineblokbenaming Maskinbetegnelse
?
)
)
) APl81-l0c; OUYKpon'U.laT~ Machineblokbenamning Maskinnr.
0 ~~xaVli~
J
0
< nCptypo<pri Subgroepbenamning Undergruppsbetegnelse
J
unOOUYKpoTril-laT~
~
,
, Aple~~
unOOUYKpoTril-laT~
Subgroepnr. Undergruppenr.
,
>
•
BA-Em: m:Ali5a Zie blz. Se side
" napanol-lm; O£ £lKOVQ Afb. ret. Figurhenvisning
• Ov0IJQo[o npOlovToC;
AVToi\i\aYTi anmT(;l
e::navappU6IJIOIl
loopponloc; TOO
nilJnavou
Produktnaam
Vervangning vereist
herbalanceren van de
kogel
Produktnavn
Udskriftning kraever ny
afbalcering af kuglen
B"tne: e:li5lKTi "(oTa Vervangning vereist van Se spaat reservedelsliste

aVTaA"aKTlKWV de kogel
lJ.e:v napai5iOETQl wc: Niet geleverd als Levereres ikke som

aVTaA"aKTlKo reserveonderdeel reservedel
21
LOPX 710SFD-34
2 Machine bottom part
Machine unit number or

Subassembly description
549313-
Ref Part No Description -01 -02 Notes
Quantity
•
;:
~
!j;
(f
!:
u
E
c
c
~
c
C
"ca,
a
•
,.
;:
22
2 Machine bottom part
23
LOPX 710SFD-34
2.1 Driving device horizontal

538011-
Ref Part No Description -84 ·85 Notes
Quantity
24
Not approved 00022308.19
• e •
1Lli-UL v, M"",.u,,,U,,\UUC,\ULU\UI</UOo.>'UL lV1
1 3 2 4 5 7 8 28 30 29 9 10 12 11
...
l\)
I:)
.. .. . ~ ..
-- . ~.
~
~
o'
(1)
::r
o
rJ·
o
::I
~
z
9-
"
"0
"0
Cl
< 18 1A 1C 1D IF 1E
'ao".
o
~
'"?'o
~
<0
25 17 18 16 15 14 23 24 22
I\)
~
~.
0-
o
2{ 21A{ ~,\~ .'-:::.~-

5
::I
I\)
(J1
~
LOPX 710SFD-34
2.2 Driving device vertical

539921-
Ref Part No Description ·80 -81 Notes
Quantity
•
;;:
S;
!j;
u
!:
{I
E
c
c
~
c
5
,
'cex"
ex
08 Screw
()~eioi~@j&>llili)
'td Pi'i#ig EH'."; ;.>',.
•
"T
;;:
•
Protecting plate
05 Screw
26
2.2 Driving device vertical 2 Machine bottom part
, 36
~
35
34
33 17
32 '--
I
~13
30
• 21 12
•
~
'i
0
0
0
" r
I
20
22
~
) §-23
"
~
)
I 25
)
)
6--24
6
J 27 26
0
c13
t
"? 31 10
~
?
> 19
-
"
"
S 18
•
j ~
11
I
i 2
I
I
I ,I 3
I
_J
I
27
LOPX 710SFD-34
2.3 Guard

71128
Ref Part No Description Notes
•
•c'"
"<
'"
;s;
S;
);
(J
C
(I
E
c
c:
~c
5
"
C
0:
0:
•
T
;;:
28
2.3 Guard 2 Machine bottom part
• 1----3
•
10
~
;]
,o
"
~
)
~
)
)
)
il
J
o 1----2
<
%.
;;:
o
>
•
" 1
~ >-.. ~~
:-------.... - ~.. ...
•
lii:;> '_._"
.~ ::--j
I
~
7--'t-~
I 11
4
29
LOPX 710SFD-34
2.4 Guard

SUbassembly description
65221
Quantity
•
;:
i
r;;
u
c:0:
C
C
c:
~
c
C
-
"c
""
•
.,.
;:
30
2.4 Guard 2 Machine bottom part
,
, 8
~
5
Q, 7
• ~1 ~jl-j] 1
•
;;
~
?0
,
0
4
"
<
)
"<
)
)
~
0
:;
0
!
J
;;
;
,
>
•
-
"
I
"
9
• I
I
~ ~\
~>' ·'1{:1
~~~~:;:, .. ,- .. ~
10
3 ". .
(~
,.. .l:t. >-b.~:,-::q:
}':-P-'., (}-("'.K,
F,· .,;- ~:.: l~:!;:.~:~.;. (.
3A
31
LOPX 710SFD-34
3 Separator bowl

554057-
Ref Part No Description -04 Notes
•
;:
S;
S;
u
!:
0:
E
c
Co
~c
5
,I\:
C
0:
0:
Lt=
B+C •
-r
;:
32
3 Separator bowl
-------------"'"'.
........=::/
y----17
29 -----t""==~
•
7-----16
~~~;7
27--+-
))j----13
26 --./(I
25-l§~~~~ \----1 A
24---ll
+---1
C""'/J---l C
~~=-11
22 -----£'"1-"'"
23-------+
• 21
20 -------Il
19---.U;i
j
I
.-
5
6
7
18 --------,t 12
9
10
.... _-----------
33
LOPX 710SFD-34
4 Machine top part

560979-
Quantity
03
•
23
24 ;;:
;;;
:~~, .. , . I:·.·.. S;
27 u
!:
28 II
~:"A',.·•••. I
E
c
c:
30
31
~c
~
••.•. , . 5
34 '"
C
0:
35 0:
~>
38
•
.,.
;;:
34
4 Machine top part
33--~
32----
34--------~~W
~6---31
30,====~~~
29
28A
If--11
-10
• '.
2 8 - - l :'<~
'>::~~;~:~/I
19----___. ..~tJ
~"
'~""
\I
35
2t---+-v~~i~~~:~, ·"' L.. "'.~ •

3-~
o
>
,"
• A
• 1-----\-
24
38 26 22
23
_--:20
15,-------;;;._,..,~"'="'~
25
35
LOPX 710SFD-34
4.1 Discharge funnel

SUbassembly description
521707-
1 69024
2 69025
69026
69027
•
9 70492
s
;;;
';
u.
t::
II
E
cc
~
c
S
-
"C
IX
IX
•
,.
s
36
4. 1 Discharge funnel 4 Machine top part
• ·~-----2
:..+-----1
L--I®(!1;Q~--4
I
1,---3
37
LOPX 710SFD-34
4.2 Paring disc device

536779-
Quantity
1 555112 02 Distributing cover
2 536718 02 Distributing ring
5
·•• • • ~~i~~~T~I~llg~I • • •. • •· • • •• • ·• • • I·•• ·•·
536775 05 Gasket
6 221706 10
38
4.2 Paring disc device 4 Machine top part
39
LOPX 710SFD-34
4.3 Inlet and outlet device

Subassembty description
549238-
Quantity
•
;:
$
';;
(J
c:
ex
C
C
c:
~
c
S
-
,
"c
ex
"T
;:
40
4.3 Inlet and outlet device 4 Machine top part
a>----7
+---1
41
LOPX 710SFD-34
4.4 Feed and discharge piping

548618-
•
•
~"
<
"
;:
~
r;;
Cl
c:
1I
C
C
c:
~
c
5
'"cex
~
ex
•
"
,.
;:
42
4.4 Feed and discharge piping 4 Machine top part
10 --jrrrfJ.
9-~
.-._-""
8 - - - -.......":'J"/
•
•
;;:
~
~
j
"
~
j
~
)
)
+---12
~
D
J
11----+
2
.J
?;;:
• ~~~-14
--13
--10
-i---1
6.1--<:T
6 ------<;,-
43
LOPX 710SFD·34
5 Parts for motor mounting, motor adapter guide 0 250 mm

538030-
Ref Part No Description ·89 Notes
Quantity
•
;s:
S;
t;;
U
C
c:
E
c
c:
~
c
5
"c
ex
ex
•
,.
;s:
44
5 Parts for motor mounting, motor adapter gUide (jJ 250 mm
•
•
~
~
~
0
0
~
~
8
9
~
~
~
~
)
) 3
)
i5 1
J
0
~
J
~
~
~
>
7
•
~
~
6
~
•
-5
4
45
LOPX 710SFD-34
6 Parts for motor mounting, NEMA standard

Type 254/256 TC (C-flange)
541429-
•
;:
~
S;
u
!::
er
C
C
c
~
c
5
,
'"cex
,.
;:
46
6 Parts for motor mounting, NEMA standard
• 3
C
•
~
~
~
5
~
0
0
~
~ 6
~
:> 2
~
~
)
)
~
0
J
0
<
~" 1
~
~
4
>
~
J. ~
47
LOPX 710SFD-34
7 Set of tools

555535-
Quantity
Without compression tools .!
With compression tools
'~+Brjd!f~!li'~jlll'I'll;"';"';'
81 Lifting tool
01 wrench
•
15 A
158
555591
'j;!~;II ,~iw
543309
543310
•
c.:
C
"<
c.:
s:
S;
·;1~@ j;
u
15 E !:
16 80 Spindle u
E
~1 ~fjal~~M;~~mM...'I
.
············s;;~k~i····9ii6;····iii2;i
c
c:
~
20 Socket 314" (1/2") c
,·ti.§ii9@(:iilfufuHi?71}"'········ 5
"
C
0:
0:
•
,.
s:
48
7 Set of tools
1 2 3
~
4 5 6
cm-
W
t@ ) ~O r ~1
• 7
~
J Q;=J)
8 9
•
.,
~
,
0
0
« -ij 0\, ~) ) ....... ~
,
~
,
:J 10 11 12
~
~
)
)
~
D
J
A
n
i
.J
~
~
?
>
13 14 15
C&A
-
"
:> '- - B
e'~-
" D-ll IJ [lE
:. 16 17
== DJ
18
19 20 21
49
LOPX 710SFD-34

555535-
Quantity
•
s
:,;
S;
Cl
!::
0:
E
cc
~
c
5
'"
~
C
0:
0:
•
T
S
50
7 Set of tools
22 23 o 24
25 26
• ~ .-:,:-./.
~
27 28 29
~ )
~
30 31 32
~ 0 = 0
51
LOPX 710SFD-34
8 Vibration monitoring unit

536498-
Re' Part No Description ·80 Notes
Quantity
•
•
"~
<
"
s
'u.S;"
!::
<I
C
C
c
~
c
S
'",
C
0:
0:
•
,.
s
52
8 Vibration monitoring unit
• le
if
t
•
~ lD
~
~
0
0
~
~ ---...:::-
~ 18
~
~
~
1
~ (\)
)
)
)
ii
J 3
0
t
~
~ 2
~
lE
~
0
O~~
>
12}
-
~
lA 4
?
I
r~
0'
~
I
•
11 6
5
53
LOPX 710SFD-34
9 Cover interlocking kit

556212-
Quantity
1
2
551337 01 Limit switch
221121 15 Screw ;1 I I I I I I
•
•
~
"c
'"<
"
:s:
~
!>:
rJ
C
"
E
c
c:
~
c
5
-'"
..
C
0:
0:
T
:s:
54
9 Cover interlocking kit
4--1
55
LOPX 710SFD-34
10 Intermediate service kit

554610-
Quantity
•
;;;:
$
);
u.
!::
ex
C
C
c
~
c
5
-'"
c
ex
-
"T
;;;:
56
10 Intermediate service kit
57
LOPX 710SFD-34
11 Major service kit

548153-
Frame hood' Frame ring

Inlet tubel Operating waler device
~~r~~e~;;eit.;jt(ii':i6:,It9fTll'i~:
Brake/ Frame bottom part
I~::~::"::ioo~vv:e:r:/:fFi rame bottom
•
Bottom bearing! Vertical driving device
Bottom bearing! Vertical driving device
~!i~II;:~!~~I~I}
Top bearing! Vertical driving device
•
Top bearingl Vertical driving device
.!1ffl.!jjgi~9iy~ryi%\!!ii~i!jjim~io/!··.··• •·• • ·.·.ii
C~!liii9j'9PIi®#@\J"iti~I . dfMijg.~Y~i
Frame top partJ Cover for top bearing
Friction coupling! Horizontal driving device c'"
'!\'iiii!i1mMt~~W·.t!'iiifffi!'i!~~!#x!i!!i "<
fijiO~ffii?®P!1!igt!:l,*i#iij@:clWifuj·~i
Friction coupling! Horizontal driving device '"
Worm wheel shafU Horizontal driving device ;;:
\'i'?m1••i@i@·®~!!!t!§i!#iii\i#!~fum~!#gi!! ;;;
WPtrn_:Yro~J#:_H_9tJ#9h4ilJ~~N1r.g:~&l~:::::':::,:::::':;::::· ij;
Seal washerl Horizontal driving device u
!::
Seal washerl Horizontal driving device II
,er.@~gry:§~RWlgt:B~ry.¥Wk!::p.~:y¥@~·:::tm: E
e'l!wi:t@,w~@I·.t!§tiiti!#.#:MI)9.·!!~~\9i:(
cc
~
c
5
",c
"g:
•
,.
;;:
58
11 Major service kit .
59
LOPX 710SFD-34
12 Service kit for foundation feet

548542-
•
;:
~
S;
u
!:
"
E
c
c:
~
c
C
-"
c
..
ex
ex
.,.
;:
60
12 Service kit for foundation feet
61
LOPX 710SFD-34
13 Tool box

558533-
Ret Part No Descriptio n -80 Notes
Quantity
7 558533 10 Padlock 11 1 1 I 1 I 1
•
;:
~
r;;
u
C
0:
C
C
C
~
c
5
,
'"cex
ex
•
"T
;:
62
13 Too/box
63
Not approve d 000223 08.19
14 Cross reference list
...•. ·.•··.,,~rt No ..p~!ie ...•••.•.• iPart No

15
6
15
25
14
•
60
22
60
22
48
65
LOPX 710SFD-34
4
1
14
13
12
•
;s:
$
~
u.
C
c:
~c:
~
c
5
-"
C
0:
0:
21
30
29
tI
,.
;s:
10
10
66
14 Cross reference list
54861881 34 35 2212601 05 26 36
548629 80 42 11 2216261 01 46 3
548746 03 58 11 221775924 34 12
548746 03 26 15 221776713 34 36
548747 06 58 14 221804304 44 4
• 54924601
549248 02
549249 02
549264 80
549276 01
40
32
32
32
22
1
29
23
17
30
55133701 54
553186 01 42 7
553565 02 32 13
553596 80 32 1
554242 81 34 22
555604 03 48 14 A
555721 80 48 16
55573780 48 11
555743 80 50 27
• 555746 80 50 29
560612 80 32 20
560612 80 32
560631 80 32
56171903 50
2210941 18 46
67
•
•
.
'
~~
AlfaLaval
~~
AlfaLavaI
LOPX 707n09n1 0 Separation System
Component Description
• Control Unit EPC-400

Emergency Stop
• Water Transducer
Soleniod Valve Block, Water
Soleniod Valve Block, Air
Pressure Pipe Assembly
Flow Indicator
Change Over Valve
Regulating Valve
Flexible Hose, Oil
• Flexible Hose, Water

Printed Jul1995
Book No. 1810198-02 V1
AffaLaval
EPC-400
• Control Unit
•
r~
o [-O-O~O""'O:-:O::-CO;:O=O'~[I--"I@
(oooooooJ--:@
'i.:::::::::::::::::'---
•
•
Product No. 31830-6149-1
31830-6149-2
31830-6149-3
31 830-6228-1
31830-6228-2
31830-6228-3
Printed Nov 1998

Book No. 1818053-02 V3
>" .. Alfa Laval Marine & Power. . '.'

•
•
•
•
prior notice.
Laval company.

S-14780Tumba
Sweden

Contents
1 Overview 1 6.3 Location of Cable Entries 20
2 Function Description 3
6.4 Terminal Protectors 21
2.1 Application 3 7 Spare Parts 23
• 2.2
2.3
Working Principle
Design
2.3.1 Front Panel
3
4
4
• 3
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
label Inside the Front Panel
Control Module
Power Supply
Operation
5
5
6
3.1 Process Operation 7
3.2 Parameter Setting 7

3.2.1 Overview 8
3.2.2 Setting Procedure 8
4 Maintenance 11
4.1 Preventive Maintenance 11
• 4.2
4.1.1 lamp Test
Corrective Maintenance
4.2.1 Fuses and Related
11
12
• 4.3
5
Functions
Replacement of
Control Module
Technical Data
12
13
15
5.1 Specification 15
5.2 Dimensions 16
5.3 Circuit Diagram 17
6 Installation 19
6.1 Mounting 19
6.2 Cable Routing 20
1818053-02
1 Overview
EPC-400 control unit is used within a

separation system for automatic control of the
separation process.
The unit is microprocessor based and
• comprises output functions for control of

ancillary equipment and input functions for
monitoring and alarm. The EPC-400 is
•
programmable to suit different separator
systems and different operation conditions.
The programming can easily be adjusted to
new conditions or new experience.
•
•
1818053-02 1
2 Function Description
2.1 Application
The EPC-400 control unit is used in ALCAP
separation systems.
• 2.2 Working Principle
•
The EPC-400 is used for monitoring and
control of the separation process. It controls
starting, separation, sludge discharge and
stopping sequences.
The process is monitored via input signals

from sensors, etc., and an alarm is given if
preset values are exceeded.
The unit also contains a PI-controller for

temperature control which can operate an Alfa
Laval Heatpac electric heater or a steam
heater or any other heater with control valve
(for steam I hot water Ithermal oil).
• The control unit can be programmed for

different separator systems and for different
conditions within the system. The
• programming is made by setting parameters,

such as type of equipment, temperature limits,
times, etc. Some parameters are set at
installation whilst process parameters are
easily accessible for adjustment during
operation.
1818053-02 3
2 Function Description EPC-400
2.3 Design
2.3.1 Front Panel

The front panel of the EPC-400 control unit
provides a display and LEDs (light emitting
diodes) for alann and process infonnation,
and push-buttons for on/off and manual iO
process control. I
•
Four push-buttons are located to the right on I
the panel. The upper three (1-3) are used for
process functions and the lower (4) is used for
alarm reset. The push-buttons are also used for
parameter selection and setting.
On and off functions corresponding to the

push-buttons are indicated on the LEDs (6-8)
above the display. The LEDs under the 16
12
\
13
1\
I
~oooooooo I
876
, ,
!
__ J
~~g
'\f '="
IliI-!::o}---
I1
2
I- 3
•
display (9-10) are used for alann indications. ~)
.~ (,00000000 I ','0
The five digit display (11) shows process I / I h~i© 4
infonnation during operation and alann codes ,

at certain alarms. It is also used for parameter I I I f I I
14 15 11 9 10 5
selection and setting.
1. Heater on/off push-button
The left part of the front panel contains two 2. Control program on/off push-button
3. Sludge discharge push-button
rows of LEDs. The upper row (12) indicates
•
4. Alarm reset
alarms. The alarm source is indicated on the 5. Function symbols
6. LED for heater (green)
upper schematic diagram (13).
7. LED for control program running (green) .
8. LED for stop sequence running (yellow) •
The LEDs in the lower row (14) indicate when
•
9. LED for discharge failure (red)
an output from the control unit is active. The 10. LED for common main alarm (red)
valve or other unit connected to each output is 11. Display
12. LEDs for alarm inputs (red)
indicated on the lower schematic diagram 13. Schematic diagram. alarm inputs
(15). 14. LEDs for output functions (green)
15. Schematic diagram. outputs
The schematic diagrams can be replaced in 16. Door lock
case of system changes or updates.
The front panel can be swung open like a door

by opening the lock (16) to the left.
4 181 8053-{)2
EPC-400 2 Function Description
An on/off switch combined with a fuse is

located behind the front panel. The power is
intended to be permanently on. When work is
to be carried out in the control unit the mains
supply should be externally switched off.
2.3.2 Label Inside the Front Panel
~
:-::1, I J."jl~
A label on the inner side of the front panel, ,: -c 5',
o E=l~ uoo· '
..
,
serves as a quick reminder for parameter
• setting in the EPe. It shows:

• the positions of the mode switch
;@ ®).().e:J.(). 8 H• O
'0
• • the connection between the display and ,.d> ®i

~.",
the push buttons (, ~r·.:b ea-cD
I.",
• the meaning of some parameters (P)
To make use of the label you must be familiar

with parameter setting, see section
"Operation" in this manual, and parameter
values, see the "Parameter List" manual.
2.3.3 Control Module

All electronic components are grouped on two
•
F11 14 X7-X14 xc
circuit boards which are mounted in a hinged F1-F3 3
X1'X3AjjlJJ~=~~~~~~~rr~'-
aluminium frame, forming an easily
accessible control module (I) inside the
•
cabinet. The module is fastened by two
X3B,C--+hlii1
screws, making it easy to remove and service. XD
Electrical output and input connections to the X4-X6
module is made by cables terminated with
2 5 6
multi-plugs that fit into sockets on the circuit
1. Control module
board. 2. Front circuit board
3. Mode switch
The front circuit board controls the operating 4. Display
sequences. It holds the operating push-buttons 5. Push buttons (for parameter setting)
6. Push buttons (for parameter selection)
(5, 6), mode switch (3) and display segments
Fl-F3 Fuses
(4). Fll.Main switch/main fuse
X-. Terminals
1818053-02 5
2 Function Description EPC-400
It also contains built-in relays, which are used

e.g. for the output signals to ancillary
components, stop signal to the separator motor
starter and control signals to an optional
heater.
The rear circuit board (2b) monitors the water F11 Z1 T1 XE

transducer and coordinates the monitoring XA XB
with the operating sequences for the ALCAP
functions.
•
2.3.4 Power Supply
Inside the cabinet, behind the control module,
there is a mounting plate with terminals (XA),
power line filter (Zl) and a transformer (Tl).
2b
1
t. Control module (folded out)

2b. Rear circuit board
Ft. F2 fuses
X1
X3
F1.F2
•
Fll Main switch/main fuse
Tl Transformer
ZI Power line filter
XA Terminals
•
•
6 1818053-02
3 Operation
3.1 Process Operation

The process operation is described in the
"Operating Instructions" manual.
• 3.2 Parameter Setting
•
The parameter setting is perfonned initially at
installation, and also when required during
operation.
How to set parameters is described below,

while the meaning and values of the
parameters are described separately in the
Parameter List for each system.
The parameters are divided into two groups.

Each group begins with a code; Cl and C2.
• Process parameters (Cl): I - 19
• Installation, timer sequence and service
• mode parameters (C2):
- Installation parameters: 20 - 49
- Timer sequence pararr.eters: 50 - 89
• - Service mode parameter: 90 - 95
The settings of process, installation and timer

sequence parameters are similar and are
described together. while the handling of the
service mode parameter is somewhat
different, and is described separately.
1818053-02 7
3 Operation EPC-400
3.2.1 Overview 1 2
The principle of parameter setting is:
I. Set the mode selector in position P o
(programming).
2. Select parameter number or code with the
two upper push buttons (H I" for increasing
and H2"for decreasing the number). The
number or code is shown in the left part of
•
the display (7).
o
3. Set the desired value for each parameter
with the two lower push buttons (H3" for
•
increasing and "4" for decreasing the 7 6 5 4 3
value). The value is shown in the right part 1 Parameter selection - increase number
of the display (6). 2. Parameter selection - decrease number
3. Parameter setting - increase value
4. Parameter setting - decrease value
3.2.2 Setting Procedure 5. Mode selector
6. Parameter value indication
7. Parameter number indication
Setting of parameters is described below.
The installation parameters must be set before

the process parameters. If the installation
parameters are OK, and you just want to
change process parameters, follow the
sequence:I-3, 9, 6-7,11-12.
1. Open the front panel.
~ an:~~
~ ~
•
•
2. Turn the mode selector to P
(programming) position.
"Pro" flashes on the display.
" I
~- ~Q
/
I
P
•
I "-
3. Press the upper selection push button.
The code Cl 1 is displayed. This indicates
process parameters.
8 1818053-02
EPC-400 3 Operation
3 Operation EPC-400
10. Set the process parameters in the same

way as the installation parameters, see
points 6 and 7.
End of Parameter Setting

11. When all parameters are appropriately
adjusted, switch the mode selector to L
R
(local). rT1ITlI L '
L..--L...l..JUJ..J_---'-p~"_
_ Ii
12. Close the front panel. •
•
•
•
10 1818053-02
4 Maintenance
The EPC-400 has a test program for self

testing and separation system testing. For
more information, see the "Alarms and Fault
Finding" manual.
• 4.1 Preventive
• Maintenance
It is recommended to carry out a lamp (LED)
test once a month. No other regular
maintenance is required.
4.1.1 Lamp Test

• Press the alarm reset button for five
seconds. (This can be done during
operation.)
• • Check that all LEDs are lit.
1818053-02 11
4 Maintenance EPC-400
4.2 Corrective
Maintenance
4.2.1 Fuses and Related Functions

Fuses are located on the front board, the rear
board and the power terminal.
" '-,
c5 '~
I
0
o ~ ~ X1
•
0
•
JI..
Al
1
n ~X "_BR
"13
"'2 • " ," c:::m
XA G~xz T1 ~
XI
El
•
.-I ( (
'" 0 0
~-48V
~-24V B
24/48V ~~ 8 n
.tE 31&30-lOn-3
Front board (A 1)
Fuse Functions influenced Alarm
Fl 10 V AC supply to the board Remote alarm
Display black (A4 when new fuse installed)
•
F2 20 V AC supply to the board Al-4
Analog/digital conversion A2-6
Pt-lOO inputs CIF EEE
F3 All outputs PS42
Rear board (A2)

Fuse
F2
Functions influenced
10 V AC supply to the board
Alarm
Al-4
•
F3 20 V AC supply to the board Al-4·
At restart with new fuse,
switch power ON-OFF-ON
Power terminal
Fuse Functions influenced Alarm
F12, F13 Power to the EPC-400 Display black
12 1818053-02
EPC-400 4 Maintenance
4.3 Replacement of
Control Module
If a persistent fault is found in the control
module it must not be repaired, but must be
replaced and sent to an Alfa Laval
representative for repair.
I. Make a note of all the actual parameter
settings.
• 2. Switch off the power to the EPe by the

main switch on the starter.
3. Open the panel door.
• 4. PuB out the wire terminal sockets by hand
Remove terminals XC and XD using a
screwdriver.
Note: both terminal and sockets are marked '-- --= --'0 i
with terminal numbers.
• '-- ----' --'08
• 5. Remove the two screws holding the

module and fold the module out.
'----------"---------------" I
1818053-02 13
4 Maintenance EPC-400
6. Pull out the wire terminal sockets by hand

on the rear circuit board.
7. Lift off the control module from the

cabinet and replace it with a spare module.
+
t4"'-o-'.-. -§ •
8. Fit the spare module in reverse order.
9. Switch on the power.
10. Set the parameters to the values noted.
•
11. Fill in the report form on the rear of the
faulty module and send it for repair.
•
•
14 1818053-{)2
5 Technical Data
5.1 Specification
Mains voltage 48 VAC +10 %
-15 %
• Total power requirement
Power requirement for outputs

During separation: max. 110 VA
During sludge discharge: max. 200 VA
Inrush: max. 5 x 45 VA
•
Continuous: max. 5 x 23 VA
Frequency 50/60 Hz±5%
Max. cable area 1.5 mm 2
Outputs for valves Five relays, connected for 48 V AC at delivery
Outputs for oil heater Three potential-free relays: max 0.5 A
One triac: max. 100 mA
(If the steam control valve is applicable, two
relays are used for increase/decrease signals 24
VAC)
Motor stop function One potential-free relay: max. 50 V, 1 A
•
Alarm inputs Five potential-free contacts
One Pt-lOO temperature sensor
One WT 200 water transducer
•
Temperature control inputs One for Pt-lOO temperature sensor
Remote input signals Six potential-free contacts
Remote alarm output One potential-free relay: max. 50 V, 0.5 A
Communication One current loop, 20 mA, one RS232 C
Fuses Built-in automatic fuse 3.0 A for power supply
combined with power switch
Fuse 1.6 A for 24 V AC supply to external
electronic units, max. total load 0.5 A
Glass fuses 250 mA, 500 mA, 2.5 A, 5 A
Weight 21 kg
1818053-02 15
5 Technical Data EPC-400
Ambient temperature Max. 55°C

Degree of protection IP 65
Ref. 1762575 Rev. 11
5.2 Dimensions
•
! LJ,.,,!J ,-, ~ ~,-,.IlJl. ~
I
i ,
, I
11
, I
:
I,
I .,
I
,i
I
I
i
1
! ! [:
i
:]
...
[: :]
~1
•
!~~
I
~
I~ eT
v.'/
:I II '"
' , 0 0
iI I I 0
0
I, g 000000001
00000000
0
1 0 I!
~
g
iI 0
I I 0 0
•
11
I~ '-+--'
•
I
•
I
i ."
Ref. 1762575 Rev. 11
Article No. Type Separator type

31830-6149-1 EPC-400 FOPX
31830-6228-1
31830-6149-2 EPC-400 LOPX

31830-6228-2
31830-6149-3 EPC-400 MFPX

31830-6228-3
16 1818053-02
~
(D
:0
,..,
(l)
• •
-,-_.----~~~----~----~---~-_._--------_._._---._._-------._._.,----_._---.
• •
__._---_ ..._-_.-- _.__.._-_.. _._---_._--_.. __ ..- .
"fYocc.J50r board 410 (AZ)
---_ ..•.. _-' ..-.-.
.01 m
-
0 Co) "tJ
w J: 0,
'"'"0, Cl:>
P'&T(
..,.
w
'" 0
'?
w
<0
Cl:>
Fll .,0 0
-
21 I 0
'",
Cl
Ph
XA: 1 I- ..erl-...----{E.:L}----;.XA.:] I _.
c:
:0
(l)
:<
w
z
0
<
g
( J: I
_.
C
Ol
A( XA: 2
241/JSo/
N
I- '" XA:t, ~ I X82
Q)
(\~
X8 3
I
IXA -b I 20V CC
~- XB:f. QJ
L_~3X~A'85B:==12~4Vo!
XB:5 XC (COMMON 24VA(\N 2)
3
XA,6 li-
46V (24V I
~
XB.6 Jl("9;il A( IN
XO I(lJ1'1ON OJT I
"'Pl"'Oce .55 or board
-..- ( .Al.) I X3: 8 I
Xc 1
X[-2
-
--
I X3: ( I
X[:]
X[:4
-
X£:5
XE"6 I-
~
A:7
](A:O
: 0
F13
~-------tE3=:I--------
~
X007?l\lA
6 Installation
The installation instructions contain

specifications, which are compulsory
requirements, and recommendations, which
are guidelines indicating ways of improving
•
installation quality.
•
NOTE
If the specifications are not followed,

Alfa Laval cannot be held responsible
for any malfunction of the
installation.
6.1 Mounting
• Recommendation
•
The EPC is wall-mounted by means of two
keyhole lugs and two fastening lugs. For hole
dimensions, see dimensioned drawing.
• Do not use rubber dampers when
mounting the EPC. The vibration may be
amplified instead of damped.
1818053-02 19
6 Installation EPC-400
6.2 Cable Routing
Recommendation
Correct routing inside the EPC cabinet:
• Keep cables short inside the cabinet.
• Keep signal and power cables separate.
•
•
6.3 Location of Cable
Entries
Specification
To prevent the reception of electrical noise
inside the cabinet it is essential that all cables
are routed correctly.
Cables that are to be connected to the left- •

hand terminals must enter from the LEFT. ~
L- --.J,!
Cables that are to be connected to the right-
hand terminals must enter from the RIGHT.
Any other way of routing or mixing cables is

completely unacceptable.
•
•
20 1818053-02
EPC-400 6 Installation
6.4 Terminal Protectors
Specification
The terminal protectors must NOT be
removed until the separator system is about to
be commissioned.
During installation, terminal protectors shield

the EPe's circuit board against possible
• damage from welding currents, etc.
Cables entering the cabinet can still be

connected to their plugs, whilst the terminal
• protectors prevent the plugs being connected

to the circuit-board.
To connect the EPC control unit: 01 10
• Remove the plugs (green) from the

~ --.- ------,
I
~-- ""'-
""- ~- """-
terminal protectors (red). ~-.
"""-- ~rr]D]J
~
~- """- """'-,
11::"'__
G===-- """'-- "'=-
0 0
• • Remove the terminal protectors. 01 10
[
. '"
r~m
• 0
IIIIIl 8
'"
0
]
• Fit the plugs, with cables, on the

terminals.
1818053-02 21
7 Spare Parts
0o-~oooooooJ n
• o
~OOOOOOoO~ <!::!>
• o
A
.n-
n
11
B
~
I I
1
o
o
I
11
11 I, I
I
11
11 I I
I
C
11
11 I --l-~..,I--+--{ 2
11
11
I I
I
1
11
11 I I
I
11
I
11
U I
o o
B-B
Item Qty Article No. Description Remarks

1 1 31830-5010-4 Control module 1) .
2 1 4900795-18 Transformer 21-48 V/l0-20-24 V
3 1 4900860-26 Circuit breaker 3.0 A with push-push
4 1 4901008-02 Rubber push button extension
5 1 4901156-03 Screw terminal
1 31830-5021-2 Spare parts kit, including: 1) 2)

6:1 5 4900850-21 Fuse, slow acting 2.5 A, 5x20
6:2 5 4900850-14 Fuse, slow acting 500 mA, 5x20
6:3 5 4900850-24 Fuse, slow acting 5 A, 5x20
6:4 5 4900850-17 Fuse, slow acting 1 A, 5x20
1. Parts recommended for 3 years of operation

2. Included in delivery
1818053-02 23
~~. AIfaLaval
Eme:rgency Stop
•
• ~
o
•
•
Printed May 1995

Book No. 1818003-02 V2

,
•
•
prior notice.
•
•
suggestions lor improvement 01 this publication would be
gratelullyappreciated.
Copies 01 this publication can be ordered lrom your lo~al Alia

Laval company.

S - 14780 Tumba
Sweden
@CopyrightAlla Laval Separation AB 1995. Printed in Sweden.

Contents
1 Operation 1
2 Installation 3
3 Technical Data 5
• 3.1
3.2
Specification
Dimensions
5
•
•
1818003-02 V2
1 Operation
• Push the red button to disconnect the

electrical system.
• • Push the red button lightly and turn

L ~::::::::.........::..~'___ ___..J~
• clockwise to reset the emergency stop.

The knob will then be released.
~
'------------"'------------',§
•
•
1818003-02 V2 1
2 Installation
Place the emergency stop outside the risk area

for the separator. In case a breakdown occurs
it must be possible to reach the emergency
stop without risk.
• A protection device that prevents

unintentional pressing the button can be
mounted on the emergency stop.
•
•
1818003-02 V2 3
3 Technical Data
3.1 Specification
Yellow plastic enclosure and red push button
• Degree of protection
Ambient temperature
IP 65 to IEC 529
-25 to +60°C
•
Nominal operating voltage 660 V AC
Nominal operating current 2.5 A at 380 V AC
Cable gland 2 connections min. 07 mm, max. 017 mm
Approvals Complying with Classification Societies-
requirements
Ref. 1763946 Rev. 2
•
•
1818003-02 V2 5
3 Technical Data Emergency Stop
3.2 Dimensions
cnbu- ~
tD
,-,
-t t I I
1
~~ I f-f I
N[ J ~ L_.~
.."" '"
•
.,.;
6, ,'9
•
oVIII
I I
\ ) ...,
<0
I I
...,
r\ ~ <0
~l( J
'"~
1
. •
(
l
-$-
((
-
I-
-$-
t N
....
•
$ $-
~
lL ~
•
Ref. 1763946 Rev. 2
6 , 818003·02 V2
b~
AlfaLavaI
WT200
• Water Transducer
•
• i
•
Product No. 31830-1770-3
31830-1770-4
Printed Aug 1997
Book No. 1818002-02 V3

•
•
prior notice.
•
Any comments regarding possible errors and omissions or •
Copies of this publication can be ordered from your local Alia
Laval company.
S - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
Contents
1.1 Application 1
1.2 Design 1
•
1.3 Working Principle 1
2 Fault Finding 3
3 Maintenance 5
• 3.1
3.2
Cleaning the
Water Transducer
Replacing the
Oscillator Unit
5
3.3 Checking the

Transducer Value 6
4 Technical Data 7
4.1 Specification 7
4.2 Dimensions 8
5 Installation 9
• 5.1 Specification s
5.1.1 Location
9
9
•
5.1.2 Connection 9
5.1.3 Oscillator Box 9
6 Spare Parts 11
1818002-02
1.1 Application
The WT 200 water transd ucer is used to
monit or the change of water conte nts in the
processed oil leaving a separator. The signal
• from the water transducer is proce ssed in the

EPC control unit, and appro priate action is
initiated, depending on the status in the
•
separation system.
1.2 Design
The water transducer consi sts of two ~~
1
concentric pipes (4, 5) and a box fitted to the
II~r I
1I Il
outer pipe. The box contains an oscill ator unit 2
(2), a test circuit board (1) and connections. j-
-Ell I I
The two pipes are insulated from each other II ~
and form a circular capacitor. The transd ucer
• is moun ted in the oil pipe by flange s on the

outer pipe, and the full oil flow passe s through
the capacitor. 1.
rD\3
Test circuit board
\
\
4
\IT,
5 .
i:;
•
2. Oscillator unit
3. Insulators
4. Electrode (inner pipe)
5. Transducer housing (outer pipe)
1.3 Working Principle

The EPC supplies direct curren t (DC) to the
transducer. The oscillator conve rts the DC to a
high frequency alternating curren t (AC) which
is fed to the capacitor. Chan ges ofcapacitance
are detected and continuously transmitted to
and interpreted by the EPC.
1
1816002-02
1 Function Description WT200
The capacitance of the transducer capacitor

varies with the dielectric constant of the liquid
flowing through it. As the water content in the
oil increases, so does the dielectric constant.
and consequently its capacitance.
There is a large difference between the

dielectric constant of water and oil. Hence
fluctuations in dielectric constant is a very
sensitive measure of changes in water content.
Both free and emulsified water contamination
is measured.
•
•
•
•
2 1818002-02
2 Fault Finding
The EPC checks the signal from the

transducer and gives alann if there is a fault.
The fault rmding is described in the section
"Alarms and Fault Finding".
•
•
•
•
1616002-02 3
3 Maintenance
3.1 Cleaning the Water

Transducer
If the transducer value is high, the cause can
•
be that dirt has clogg ed betwe en the inner and
outer pipe of the transducer. Then you must
remove and clean the transducer.
• 1. Remove the transducer from the pipe

system preferably whithout disconnecting
the signal cable.
2. Apply suitable detergent to the transducer

electrode and housing.
•
•
3. Flush with freshwater.
4. Before remounting the transducer check

that no solids or other matte r that can
cause short-circuit is stuck between the
transducer electr ode and housing.
5
1818002-02
WT2 00
3 Maint enanc e
3.2 Replacing the

Oscillator Uni t
The oscillator unit must be replaced when the
EPC detects a transducer fault and the voltag e
test indicates faulty oscillator unit (see Alarm s
and Fault Finding).
The oscillator unit with test circui t board are

replac ed together as a complete unit.
1. Disconnect the cables from the oscill ator
terminals.
2. Loose n the centre screw and lift out the
•
comp lete unit.
3. Assemble the complete oscillator spare
part unit and reconnect the cables to the
terminals.
•
4. Fill in the report form and return it with
the faulty oscillator unit to Alfa LavaL
3.3 Checking the

Transducer Value
If the transducer is connected to an EPC-400,
the EPC can display the transducer value. The
value shoul d be 120 - 130 for the transd ucer
in air.
•
•
1818002-02
6
4 Technical Data
4.1 Specification
~
Mineral oil
•
Media
Media temperature Max.1lQOC
Max. working pressure 600 kPa (6 bar)
• Max. testing pressure 1000 kPa (10 bar)
Material
Body Pressure vessel steel
Electrode Stainless steel
O-rings Viton
Insulators PfFE
Flanges according to DIN 2633 and JIS B2213
Connection box
• Ambient temperature
Enclosure
Max. 70°C
IP65
•
Material Aluminium
Cable connection Pr 22.5/Pg 13.5 for cable 0 12.5 - 15.0
Approvals applied for LR, DNY, GL, BV

Weight 7kg
Ref. 1761263 Rev. 3
7
1818002-02
4 Technical Data WT200
4.2 Dimensions
150
itJ120
0",
""[I ,
•
_. ( J I
0 ( 4x) C
r--
'f
-
, ..-
~
~
«
\( -
0
..q-
"&
•
300 . I
Ref. 1761263 Rev. 3
Article No. ON A B C Oscillator
•
(mm) (mm) (mm)
31830-1770-3 ON 40 lOIN 11'150 11'110 11'18 1 MHz
31830·1770-4 ON 40 IJIS 11'140 0105 019 1 MHz
8 1818002-02
5 Installation
5.1 Specification s
NOTE
•
If the specifications are not followed,
Alpha Level can not be held
responsible for any. malfunction
L
related to the installation.
• 5.1.1 Location
Air in the transducer will disturb the
measurement and can cause alarms. The water
transducer should therefore be kept filled with
oil. For this purpose, it must be installed
1 Water transducer
vertically in an upstream direction, sited in a 2 Pipebend
low position, and with an upward pipe bend
installed between the transducer and the
service tank.
• 5.1.2 Connection
• The cable shield must be spread out
evenly around the cable connection inside
• •
the box and secured by means of screws
from outside and a collar inside.
Connections to the terminals must be in
accordance with the interconnection
diagram for the appropriate system.
5.1.3 Oscillator Box

• Make sure the oscillator box is firmly
attached to the transducer bracket.
1818002-02 9
6 Spare Parts
•
•
L..-
--l1-
•
Qty Article No. Description Remarks
Item
1 1 31830- 5933-1 Oscillator unit. complete
11
1818002-02
t-~
A1faLaval
Solenoid Valve Block,

• Water
•
•
•
1763455-88
1763455-90
1763455-91
1763455-92
1763455-93
Printed Mar 2000

Book No. 1818005-02 V4

•
•
Alfa Laval reserves the right to make changes at any time without
•
prior notice.
•
Laval company.

S - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
•



under divider I.
Contents
1.1 Application 1
1.2 Design 1
•
2 Fault Finding 5
3 Maintenance 7
• 3.1
3.2
3.3
Periodic Maintenance
Disassembly and Cleaning
Replacing a
Constant Flow Valve
7
4 Technical Data 9
4.1 Specification 9
4.2 Dimensions 10
5 Spare Parts 11
•
•
1818005-02
1.1 Application
The solenoid valve block supplies water for
different functions in a separator controlled by
a program unit.
•
• 1.2 Design
The valve block consists of four solenoid
valves assembled together in a block. The
solenoid valve (9) is a N.O. valve and used for
drainage.
The two solenoid valves (3) and (4) have a

common water supply channel connected to a
high pressure water supply (B) via a strainer
(6). A vacuum breaker (2) protects the supply
line from negative pressure.
•
The outlet flow is controlled by a constant
flow valve and a non-return valve mounted
inside the solenoid valves (3) and (4).
•
The solenoid valve (5) is connected to a low
pressure water supply (A) via a strainer (6), 1. Coil
2. Vacuum breaker
and does not require a constant flow valve and
3. Solenoid valve, including constant flow valve
a non-return valve in the valve outlet. 4. Solenoid valve, including constant flow valve
5. Solenoid valve
6. Strainer
7. Over-ride for manual operation
8. AC solenoid indicator
9. Solenoid valve for drain N.O.
10. Manual shut-off valve
A Water inlet, low pressure
B Water inlet, high pressure
1818005-02 1
1 Function Description Solenoid Valve Block, Water
1~~
1
7,;'..,V'6 cr~5
I l'-"
Q
Water Inlet
Low pres9ure
·00
I
I 05 I DRAIN 10
Wat., Inl.t
High pressure
I
<
~
A plate mounted on the valve block shows the

valve functions. Indicator (8) rotates when the
solenoid is energized, Le. the valve is open.
The valves (3). (4) and (5) in the common •

block can be opened and closed manually by
pushing and turning the lever (7). ((@ •
Vertical position: Automatic operation
Horizontal position: Manually opened valve

When a solenoid is energized, it lets water out
through the val ve outlet. The indicator (8)
rotates. The flow of the outgoing water is
determined by the constant flow valve (3) and
(4), and is kept constant even at large
variations in water supply pressure.
When the control unit switches off the voltage

•
to the solenoid, the diaphragm goes down and
closes the valve outlet. The AC indicator (8)
stops rotating.
The vacuum breaker (2) lets air in if the

•
pressure in the supply line is lower than
outside. This is to prevent water being sucked
in from the valve outlet and polluting the
supply water line.
2 1818005-02
Solenoid Valve Block, Water 1 Function Description
The solenoid valve (9) is used for drain of

water when leakage in valve (3). When the
solenoid valve (3) is open. the drain valve is
closed. and water is supplied to the separator.
When the solenoid valve (3) closes. the drain
valve opens for drainage. The manual shut-off
valve at the drain outlet is used only for
manual operation of the solenoid valve block.
•
•
•
•
1818005-02 3
2 Fault Finding
Fault Probable cause Remedy

Insufficient water Valves in supply line closed or partly Check the supply line and open the valves.
flow closed.
Clogged strainers. Remove and clean the strainers.
• Excessive water
flow
Leakage
Damaged (or missing) constant flow valve. Replace constant flow valve.
Broken diaphragm or sticking parts.

Dirt affecting the solenoid parts.
Disassemble and clean. Replace worn parts
from spare parts kit and re-assemble.
• Noise
Valve does not

open
Unsatisfactory movement of solenoid core
due to dirt.
Solenoid core stuck due to dirt.
Open circuit due to loose connections or

blown fuses (Indicator stops rotating).
Disassemble. clean and re-assemble.
Disassemble. clean and re-assemble.
Exam ine the electrical system and correct the

fault.
Low voltage (less than 85% of name plate Examine the power supply to the solenoid
rating). valve and correct the fault.
Coil burned out due to too high voltage Replace the coil. Examine the power supply
(Indicator stops rotating). and correct the fault.
•
•
1818005-02 5
3 Maintenance
3.1 Periodic Maintenance

• Clean the strainers regularly in order to
obtain trouble-free operation.
• DANGER
• Disintegration
hazard
If the strainers are clogged, water is

not supplied to the separator bowl for
conditioning of the sludge. This can
lead to breakdown and fatal injury.
• Disassem ble and clean the solenoid valve

at regular service intervals or when
required, see below.
• • Measure the water flows occasionally to

check if the constant flow valves are worn.
(Manually open the valve for e.g. one
•
minute and measure the amount of water
flowing out. See the spare parts list for
flow values.)
1818005-02 7
3 Maintenance Solenoid Valve Block, Water
3.2 Disassembly and

Cleaning
NOTE
Switch off electrical power and

depressurize the valve block before
disassembly.
• Make sure the lever for manual operation

is in the vertical position. Otherwise the
diaphragm spring could be damaged. ((@ •
•
•
Take care not to drop and lose the core
spring when removing the core/diaphragm
subassembly.
Place the core spring with its wide end

•
first into the core when assem bling the
solenoid. The closed end should protrude
from top of the core.
• Make sure the 0- rings are properly placed

in their grooves before assembly.
3.3 Replacing a Constant

Flow Valve •
•
•
Lubricate the O-rings with silicon grease.
Place the constant flow valve in the

housing without the use of any tool. Make
sure the val ve is inserted in the correct
•
position, with the attached non-return
valve downwards.
• Apply Loctite 542 on the hose nipple

before fitting it.
8 1818005"02
,
4 Technical Data
4.1 Specification
Media Fresh water, max. 100dH
Media temperature Max.85°C
• Water pressure
Ambient temperature
Cable connection
150 - 700 kPa (1.5 - 7 bar)
Max. 75°C
PgII (for cable 0 9 - 0 11)
• Material
Body/bonnet
Electrical data
Brass
Supply voltage 48 V, 50/60 Hz

Power consumption Holding: 23 VA
Inrush: 45 VA
Enclosure IP 65
Mounting style Upright
Ref. 1763449 Rev. 5
•
•
1818005-02 9
4 Technical Data Solenoid Valve Block, Water
4.2 Dimensions
l!~:
... 14 I n
1 11
...
_ .16 G!,5 I I 1
_l.~
1
...
-
'-'1 .......
"-
"'"l~ ~ ~
"-
'"
'" -
<0 <0
rrF\
~~ d=- (~
o
I\..~ \\. ./, ~
. f="11f--
:
'"'"
~
tE [IJ
I
•
G 3/4 rr ~ '"'"
1 &. '-IJ.
I
.... 0
"- o:::::::I: <Xl
'"
<0 '"
133
(4x) ~91
73 \(
1'"
;:c
11~
Jj
'"
0>
•
""
340
.-
nr ' InI In
I r-
"'
~ I
e- ~- ~~ 6~
~ p '------<
~ l{]
A c::) t-
_ .. N
~
QB
~
~f1f ~
•
k....
--=--
97 T 73 ~
/!IT
73
Ref. 1763449 Rev. 5
A Water inlet. Iow pressure

B Water inlet, high pressure
Article No. Type

•
1763455-87 MOPX205
1763455-88 MOPX207
1763455-90 MOPX 213. 309, 310
1763455-91 LOPX 705
1763455-92 LOPX 707. 709, 710
1763455-93 LOPX 713
10 1818005-02
5 Spare Parts
•
•
Item Qty Article No. Description Remarks·
1 1 1762826-01 Solenoid valve
1763459-03 Spare parts kit, including: Recommended for 3 years of

operation
•
1 1762691-01 Kit for solenoid valve Kits for solenoid valve include:
6 1 1762702-01 Kit for solenoid valve Core/diaphragm, core spring,
gaskets, O-ring, pin, spring
1 1763458-03 Spare parts kit, including:
2b 1 Vacuum breaker .
•
2d 2 O-ring
2e 2 Washer
3 1 1762894-80 Constant flow valve, 0.9 IImin LOPX 705

1 1762894-81 Constant flow valve, 1.8 I/min LOPX 707, 709, 710
1 1762894-82 Constant flow valve, 2.8 I/min LOPX 713
1762894-83 Constant flow valve, 5.5 I/min MOPX205
1762894-84 Constant flow valve, 11.0 I/min MOPX207
1762894-86 Constant flow valve, 23.0 I/min MOPX 213,309,310
4 1 1762894-84 Constant flow valve, 11.0 I/min MOPX 205, 207, LOPX 705
1 1762894-85 Constant flow valve, 18.0 I/min LOPX 707, 709, 710, 713
1762894-86 Constant flow valve, 23.0 I/min MOPX 213,309,310
5 1 1763444-01 AC solenoid indicator
7 1 1763907-01 Strainer insert
8 1 1763907-02 O-ring
1818005-02 11
b~
AlfaLavaI
Solenoid Valve Block, Air

•
•
o
•
•
1763524-80
Printed Jun 1995

Book No. 1818009-02 V2:

•
•
•
prior notice.
•
Any comments regarding possible errors and omissions or •
Laval company.
Published by: A1fa Lava! Separation AB
S -147 Ba Tumba
Sweden
@CopyrightAlfa Laval Separation AB 1995. Printed in Sweden.
•
Contents
1.1 Application 1
•
2 Fault Finding 3
3 Maintenance 5
3.1 Replacement of Solenoid
• 4
4.1
4.2
Valve
Technical Data
Specification
Dimensions
5
5 Spare Parts 9
•
•
1818009-02 V2
1 Function Description·
1.1 Application
The solenoid valve block supplies compressed
air to the pneumatically operated valve(s) in a
separation system.
•
1
Compressed air comes in to the valve block at
the shut-off valve (2). The air pressure is
indicated on the pressure gauge (I). 2 5
The valve block comprises one or two
solenoid valves (4), depending on the
6
application. When voltage is supplied to a
Valve block with /Wo solenoid valves
solenoid valve, it opens, and air is supplied
. ,.. PresSure gauge
through its outlet. When the voltage goes off, . 2. Shut-off valve
the valve closes. The quick de-aerator (6) 3. Drain port
ensures a fast evacuation of air from the 4. Solenoid valve
5. Override for manual valve operation
pneumatically operated valve, when the
•
6. Quick de-aerator
solenoid valve closes.
•
The valve has a lever for automatic or manual
operation. When the lever is turned to
horizontal position, the valve is operated
automatically, Le, it is normally closed and
opens when the solenoid is energized. When
the solenoid is non energized, the valve can be
opened manually by turning the lever to the
vertical position.
Valve block with one solenoid valve

Automatic operation; lever In horiz?fItaIposition.
181 ROO!l-O' V, 1
2 Fault Finding

No metallic click Open circuit due to loose connection or Examine the electrical system and correct the
when energized. blown fuses. fault
•
Low voltage (leSS than 85% of name plate Examine the power supply to the solenoid
rating). valve and correct the fault
Too high voltage, coil burn~ut. Replace the solenoid valve. Examine the pow-
er supply and correct the fault.
• Leakage Faulty solenoid valve. Replace the solenoid valve.
•
•
t 81 AOOIl-fI' V, 3
3 Maintenance
3.1 Replacement of
Solenoid Valve
• NOTE
Switch off electrical power and close
• •
the shut-.off valve to depressurize the
valve block before disassembly.
Mark each pipe before dismantling to

make sure the inlets and outlets are
connected correctly when the valve is
remounted.
•
•
181 RllO~? V? 5
•
4 Technical Data
4.1 Specification
Valve housing material Brass
Seals Viton
• Air/gas pressure
Ambient temperature
Cable gland
O-lObar
50°C
PG! I for cable 0 9 - 0 11
• Protection class
Voltage
Power consumption, holding
IP65
48 V 50/60Hz
2.5W
Power consumption, inrush lOA VA
Mounting Valve may be mounted in any position
Continuous duty moulded coil class F
Re!. 1763253 Rev. 3
•
•
7
4 Technical Data Solenoid Valve Block, Air
4.2 Dimensions
85 108
18
•
o
-
ID
(2X) 'S,5
•
1763524-80 1763498-80
•
Re!. 1763253 Rev. 3 •
8 181 M09-0? V'-

,\
5 Spare Parts
f"i/'" ~
~~
1~
...
•
1
~g
~
•
r-
• ~
I IH
J Jtj
~
r'--'
I
I I ~
I I ~
~ $
I .e:;
-
~
•
• Item
1
Qty
1
Article No.
1763889-01
Description
Solenoid valve
Remarks
9
~~
AIfa Laval
Pressure Pipe
• Assembly
•
•
•
Product No. 1764780-80 to -85
1765780-80 to -81
Printed Aug 1997

Book No. 1818029-02 V2

•
•
prior notice.
•
•
Alfa Laval company.
S - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
Contents
1 Technical Data 1
1.1 Specification 1
1.2 Dimensions 2
• 2
2.1
Maintenance
Pressure Switch
(Low Pressure)
5
•
2.1.1 Working Principle 5
2.1.2 AdJusting the
Pressure 5etpoint 5
3 Spare Parts 7
•
•
1818029-02
1 Technical Data
1.1 Specification
Pressure Factory set, see table
• Protection class
Cable gland
Low pressure switch
IP65
Pg II (cable 0 9.5 - 12)
• Pressure
Protection class
Cable gland
Adjustable 0 - 4 bar
IP65
Pg 13.5 (cable 09 - 13)
Pressure gauge
Pressure range 0-6 bar
Colour Munsell 7.5 BG 7/2
(on flange connection pipe)
Weight Appr. 6.5 kg (for size 25)
Appr. 7.0 kg (for size 40)
• Ref. 1765026 Rev. 1
1818029-02 1
1 Technical Data Pressure Pipe Assembly
1.2' Dimensions
Pipe Assembly art. no.
1764780-80 to -85
2 0 :w----,.,
ri>
ill
o
•
f"i'l-rW-L-----O=L----.q:.JL..-...j
N. . .
-t-+H---------------+-+
'-'lLGlir'--------------------I
•
F ~Oh
371 ~O
,'-, ,-',
CD I~I CD 1et§1
1
L._.:..J
Ref. 1765026 Rev. 1

L._.:..J
•
•
2 Low pressure switch
3 Pressure gauge
Article No. Pressure Corresponding 0 Oh F

setting flange size (mm) (mm) (mm)
1764780-80 2.0 bar JIS 25A 10K 125 90 14
1764780-81 2.5 bar JIS 25A 10K 125 90 14
1764780-82 3.5 bar JIS 25A 10K 125 90 14
1764780-83 2.0 bar JIS 40A 10K 150 105 16
1764780-84 2.5 bar JIS 40A 10K 150 105 16
1764780-85 3.5 bar JIS 40A 10K 150 105 16
2 1818029-02
Pressure Pipe Assembly 1 Technical Data

1765780·80 to -81
2 o 3
~
II~II
~
o
o
"
•
N
• .~.
0,0
370 1Il150
Ref. 1765780 Rev. 0
1 High pressure switch

2 Low pressure switch
• 3
4
Pressure gauge
Flange connection
1818029-02 3
2 Maintenance
2.1 Pressure Switch

(Low Pressure)
•
2.1.1 Working Principle
o e
When oil enters the chamber ( I), the pressure _,M -
(J)
....0 - -.
is transmitted through a spring-loaded transfer • 1
't! P'! "'"
IS.
Ill'!!! "
...... _ b.
•
mechanism (2) to the microswitch (3). The -~
!
microswitch contact opens when the pressure

is below the setpoint.
o
The pressure setpoint is indicated on the
graduated dial. It can be adjusted, see below.
1 2
1. Chamber
2. Transfer mechanism
3. Microswitch
• 2.1.2 Adjusting the Pressure

Setpoint
2
• •
•
Untighten the stop screw (I) a few turns.
Turn the adjustment screw (2) until the red
indicator points at the desired switching
pressure on the graduated dial.
• Lock the adjustment screw by tightening
the stop screw.
1 Stop screw
2 Adjustment screw
1818029-02 5
" _ .. ,...-,. ,. .,. _. -, --.-
3 Spare Parts

1764780-80 to -85
2 3
•
• •
l- '=='-
~~

1 1 1762771-01 Pressure switch (high) 2.5 bar
1762771-02 3.5 bar
•
1762771-05 2.0 bar
2 1 1763736-01 Pressure switch (Iow) 0-4 bar

3 1 543054-01 Pressure gauge 0-6 bar
1818029-02 7
3 Spare Parts Pressure Pipe Assembly

1765780-80 to -81
2 0 0 3
t\l
I~I
t\l
0
•
•
1 1 1764781-80 Pressure switch (high) 2.0 bar. For pipe assembly
1765780-80
1764781-81 2.5 bar. For pipe assembly
1765780-81
2 1 1764782-80 Pressure switch (Iow) 0-4 bar
3 1 1764783-80 Pressure gauge 0-6 bar
•
•
8 1818029-02
Flow Indicator
•
•
•
•
1761974·82
Printed Jun 1995

Book No. 1818013-02 V2
. Alfa Laval Marine & Power .

•
•
•
prior notice.
gratelully appreciated.
•
Laval company.
S -14780 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alia Laval Separation AB 1995. Printed in Sweden.
Contents
1.1 Application 1
1.2 Design 1
• 1.3 Working Principle 1
2 Maintentance 3
2.1 Cleaning 3
• 2.2
3
3.1
Replacement of the Glass or
Needle
Technical Data
Specification
3
5
3.2 Dimensions 6
4 Spare Parts 7
•
•
1818013-02 V2
1.1 Application
The Flow indicator is used for approximate
indication of oil or water flow.
• 1.2 Design
•
The flow indicator is contained in a housing
with threaded connections.
The gauge dial can be turned to be in proper

position for reading.
• Incom ing oil flows against a spring-loaded

flap which turns along a fixed curve segment.
As the flap moves, the distance to the curve
•
segme nt is expanding according to the flow
ratio.
The indicating needle moves aroun d the dial

by the aid of a magnet mouted on the flap.
1. Spring
2. Flap
3. Magnet
4. Curve segment
5. Indicator housing
1
181 A01:ul? V?
2 Maintentance
2.1 Cleaning
If magnetic particles from the oil stick to the
surfaces inside the flow indicator, it will affect
•
the indication, and cleaning is required.
• Dismantle the flow indicator:
• Apply the special tool in the outer holes of
• •
the dial insert.
Turn the tool to remove the spring wire
inside the housing which holds the entire
indicator insert.
• Clean the inside of the flow indicator.
•
• 2.2 Replacement of the
Glass or Needle
• Remove the glass by applying the special
tool in the holes next to the glass and
turning.
• After replacing the needle adjust its zero
position.
181 Rn1:'W1? V? 3
3 Technical Data
3.1 Specification
Media
• 1761974-80
1761974-82
Max. operating pressure
Oil, 0 - 8 m 3/h, 10 - 48 eSt, max. llOoe
Water, 0 - 12 m3/h
0.6 MPa (6 bar)
• Mounting style
Accuracy (full scale)
Weight
Ref. 1762197 Rev.4
Any position
±15%
"" 1.4 kg
•
•
181 R01:>-<l~ V~ 5
3 Technical Data Flow Indicator
3.2 Dimensions
JO J9
Gll
176'174-80 17&1174-&2
•
Re!. 1762197 Rev.4
•
•
•
6 lR1R01M? V?
4 Spare Parts
• 4
• 5
• Item
1
Qty
1
Article No.
1762196-Q1
Description
Spare parts kit, including:
Remarks
Recommended for·3 years of
operation .
•
4 1 1762181-Q1 Protection glass 1)
5 1 1762188-80 Needle
7 1 1761482-Q4 o-ring
8 1 260104-69 o-ring
1) The kit also includes a lock ring, which is used only for older versions
181/l01:>-n? V? 7
b~
AlfaLavaI
• Pneumatic Change Over

Valve
•
•
• I
748393-83
748393-84
748393-85
Printed Jan 1996
Book No. 1818015-02 V3
\ Alfa Laval Marine & Power

•
•
prior notice.
•
•
suggestions for improvement 01 this publication would be
Copies 01 this publication can be ordered from your 10cal·AIfa
Laval company.
PUblished by: Alia Laval Separation AB
S -147 80 Tumba
Sweden
•
•• Study instruction manuals and observe the
Not following the Instructions can result in

• In order to make the infonnation clear only foreseeable conditions have


under divider 1.
Contents
1.1 Application 1
• 1.2.1 Activated Valve

1.2.2 -Deactivated Valve
1.2.3 Manual Chang~over
2
2
2
• 2
3
3.1
Fault Finding
Maintenance
Diaphragm Replacement
3
5
3.2 Spindle Seal Replacement 6
3.3 Disassembling the Change

Over Valve 7
4 Technical Data
. 9
,
4.1 Specification 9
4.2 Dimensions 10
• 5 Spare Parts 11
1818015-02
1.1 Application ...... ......

The pneumatic change-over valve is used in ...
the oil supply line to a separator. Oil fed to the , \
• valve goes either straight through the valve to

the separator or down to a recirculation line. I
:s;
I
• A
f-"""
~
c-
UI
.
-r B
., T
I I
C ~
A. Out. when aclivated
8. In
C. Out when deactivated
• CAUTION
Entrapment hazard
A
Do not touch the valve spindle. It

may go down and cause injury to
your fmgers. B
A. Deacl/vated valve
8. Activated valve
1818015-02 1
1 Function Description Pneumatic Change Over Valve
1.2.1 Activated Valve 1

The valve actuator is pressurized by
compressed air (2). The diaphragm (4) and
piston rod (6) are pressed downwards and 2
opens the valve for flow straight through. 3
4
•
1.2.2 Deactivated Valve 5
When the valve actuator is depressurized to
atmospheric pressure, the diaphragm is
•
pushed up by the spring (5). The piston rod 6
also goes up, which closes the valve for
straight through flow and opens for flow down
through the bottom valve port. 1. Hand wheel
2. Air inlet
3. Piston plates
1.2.3 Manual Change-over 4. Diaphragm
5. Spring
By screwing the hand wheel down, the piston 6. PistonrrxJ
is forced down and the valve opens for
straight-through flow.
•
•
2 1818015-02
2 Fault Finding

No change-over or sluggish Diaphragm broken. Fit a new diaphragm.
operation of the change over
• valve. Air supply inadequate. Examine the solenoid valve block (air) and
the air supply line. and correct the fault.
Air pressure too low. Adjust the air pressure.
•
Air leakage. Fit a new seal.
Hand wheel screwed down. Turn the hand wheel 10 top position.
•
•
1818015-02 3
3 Maintenance
CAUTION
Burn hazard
• Shut off the process oil before

dismantling or making any repairs.
The oil may be hot and cause skin
• bum.
NOTE
Make sure air pressure is released

before dismantling. r-::k-3
l!::::'~' ~- 4
-;:=.-
1./ - ;:., .q.. ~

1 ~~ .- ::,: . - =;-~5
3.1 Diaphragm
Replacement
I! -_.
~J
--6
•
7
1. Remove the hexagon bolts and the cover
with the hand wheel. 1----8
2
2. Remove the screws to the piston plates
• and the seal washer (3) and gasket (6). i
~ -J
3. Remove the upper piston plate and the

diaphragm. .: "(§)
4. Reassemble in reverse order to

disassembly. (81.
., ...,
1. Cover
2. Body
3. Seal washer
4 Piston plate, upper
5 Diaphragm
6. Gasket
7. Piston plate, lower
8. Piston rod
1818015-02 5
3 Maintenance Pneumatic Change Over Valve
3.2 Spindle Seal

Replacement 1_
l. Remove the pin (7) from the piston rod 2~

(6). 31~
2. Disconnect the air connection to the 4~
-
actuator. 5~ 6
7
3. Loosen the screws (8) holding the actuator
8
•
to the valve and lift off the entire actuator
assembly.
4. Remove the seal sleeve (2) and lift it off

the spindle. Then replace the Q-ring (l)
seal rings (3) and spring (5) by new
spares.
5. Reassemble the spindle seal in reverse

•
order to disassembly. Fit the actuator
assembly and reconnect the pin (7) to the
sleeve (6). Fit the air connection. Tighten
the screws (8).
•
•
6 1818015-02
Pneumatic Change Over Valve 3 Maintenance
3.3 Disassembling the

Change Over Valve
The change over valve nonnally needs no
maintenance. If however. the valve has to be
disassembled. proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect the air connection and remove
the valve from the pipe flanges.
•
2. Screw down the hand wheel to its end
position and remove the pin (2) from the ........--!---4 -.............
'-.
rod (3).
3. Remove the flange (4) from the valve

• body (I).
4. The valve spindle (5) can now be pulled

out for access to the valve cone.
5. Reassemble the valve in reverse order to
assembly.
•
•
1818015-02 7
. Pneumatic Chan ge Over Valve
3 Maintenance
•
•
•
•
1818015-02
8
4 Technical Data
4.1 Specification
Valve
. Media Mine ral oil
• Media temperature
Operating pressure
Max. 150°C
Max. 1.0 MPa (10 bar)
Max. 2.0 MPa (20 bar)
•
Valve housi ng test pressure
Material valve body Spher oidal graphite iron
Pneumatic actuator
Media Air
Operating pressure Max. 1.0 MPa (10 bar)
Test pressure 1.6 MPa (16 bar)

Ref. 748393 Rev. 11
•
•
9
181801 5-02
4 Technical Data Pneumatic Change Over Valve
4.2 Dimensions
,
I
<
.. Os
•
I ,
l l
•
•
: )l['
t-~. +--tt-
;
c
Ref. 748393 Rev. 11
Dimensions
Kv Weight Flanges
•
Conn. Article No. A B C D Dh Os G (m 3 /h) (kg) acc. to
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
40 112" 748393-82 500· 125 200 150 110 18 208 24.5 18 DIN
25 ,. 748393-83 475 105 170 115 85 15 142 10.5 9.8 DIN
40
25
112"
1"
748393-84
748393-85
500
475
125
105
200
170
140
125
105
90
19
19
208
142
-
- .
18.5
12.5
JIS
JIS
•
10 1818015-02
5 Spare Parts
t~-1
• 2
3
• 4
1 1 1761448-03 Spare parts kit for pneumatic ac- Connection 25 1)
• 2 1
1761448-04
748393-16
tuator
Yoke
Connection 40 1)
Contents, see next page
Connection 40
•
748393-17 Connection 25
3 1 748393-06 Sleeve Connection 40
748393-07 Comection 25
4 1 748393-05 Spare parts kit for spindle seal Contents, see next page 1)
5 1 748393-08 Range with gasket Connection 40 DIN
748393-09 Connection 25 JIS
748393-12 Connection 40 DIN
748393-13 Connection 25 JIS
1 748393-10 Spindle with cone and pin Connection 40, L=155
748393-11 Connection 25. L=147
1. Parts recommended for 3 years of operation
1Bl BOl 5-02 11

5 Spare Parts Pneumatic Change Over Valve
a
b
2
2 d
c
e
G.b
•
c
f
d
e
•
f
9

2
. Spare pans kit for pneumatic ac-
tuator includes:
•
a 1 .o-ring
b 1 Screw
c 3 Seal washer
d 3 Gasket
e 1 Diaphragm
•
I 2 Bearing
3 Spare pans kit for spindle seal in-
cludes:
a 1 Seal sleeve
b 1 o-ring
c 3 Sealing
e 1 Cu-washer
I 1 Spring
g 4 Screw
h 1 Pin
12 1816015-02
~~
AJfaLaval
• Regulating Valve
• Product No. 1762570-80
•
1762570-81
1762570-82
1762570-83
1762570-84
1762570-85
1762570-86
1762570-87
1762570-88
1762570-89
1762570-90
1762570-91
1762570-92
1762570-93
1762570-94
Printed Sep 1998

Book No. 1818012-02 V4
t>:· .< . Alfa Laval Marine & Power .

•
•
•
•
prior notice.
Laval company.
S - 147 80 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alia Laval Marine & Power AB 1998.
1 Technical Data
1.1 Specification
Media Oil and water
• Media temperature
Max. working pressure
Max. 150°C
1.6 MPa (I6 bar)
•
*) for 1IS 50 1.0 Mpa (10 bar)
Max. testing pressure 2.4 MPa (24 bar)
Material, valve body Spheroidal graphite iron
Flange standard DIN 2633 or 1IS B2213 (l6k)
*) for 1IS 50 JIS B2213 (\Ok)
Ref. 1762570 Rev. 3
•
•
1818012-02 1
1 Technical Data Regulating Valve
1.2 Dimensions
I
II I
(') '1 ( ')
I
! '-T ir-' I
I ~.
! I ]
x
I 0
E
i, T
r-
:r:
,
.- T
•
I I
[ J
i
"~ ~ \---
I,
I DN 25
i 0 .~ - r-. 7T
;.-::: ::::--:
"
•
'"
\
~ .-
~ ~ ::;:;...-
.h
/'
Dt
~
I.
L I
Ref. 1762570 Rev. 3
Article No. Conn. L HL CL ChL OsL OtL Kv Weight Flanges

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (m 3 /h) (kg) ace. to
1762570-80 25 100 150 125 85 14 - 6.1 3 DIN
1762570-81 32 110 160 140 100 18 - 9.6 4.4 DIN
1762570-82
1762570-83
1762570-84
40
50
25
120
140
100
170
185
152
150
165
125
110
125
90
18
18
19
-
-
-
12.7
18.6
6.1
6
8.4
3
DIN
DIN
JIS
•
1762570-85
1762570-86
1762570-87
1762570-88
40
25
25
25
120
100
100
100
168
150
150
152
150
125
125
125
105
85
85
90
19
14
14
19
-
G3/8
Gl/4
Gl/4
12.7
6.1
6.1
6.1
6
3
3
3
JIS
DIN
DIN
JIS
•
1762570-89 40 120 170 150 110 18 Gl/4 12.7 6 DIN
1762570-90 40 120 168 150 105 19 G1/4 12.7 6 JIS
1762570-91 25 100 152 125 90 19 G3/8 6.1 3 JIS
1762570-92 40 120 170 150 110 18 G3/8 12.7 6 DIN
1762570-93 40 120 168 150 105 19 G3/8 12.7 6 JIS
1762570-92 50 140 185 165 120 19 - 18.6 8.6 JIS
2 1818012-02
2 Spare Parts
•
• D N
L...-___''___'__~ __ __
_ _ _ ' ' _ _ _ ' _ _ ~ ~ ~ _ ~ __'
l~I~
•
2 1 1761731-80 Insert com plete Conn. ON 25
1761731-81 Conn. ON 32
1761731-82 Conn. ON 40
1761731-83 Conn. ON 50
•
748393-05 Spare parts kit, including: Parts recommended for 3
years of operation
3a 1 Seal sleeve
3b 1 O-ring
3c 1 Sealing
3d 1 Sleeve
3e 1 Cu-washer
3f 1 Spring
1818012-02 3
Flexible Hose,
• Oil
•
•
•
534115-81
Printed Apr1996
Book No. 1818044-02 V3

•
•
Alfa Lava) reserv e the right to make changes at any time withou
t
•
prior notice.
suggestions for Improvement of this publication would be
•
Copies 01 this publication can be ordered Irom your local Alia
Laval company.
Publis hed by: Alia Laval Separation AB
Marine & Power Oil Treatm ent Division
S - 14780 Tumba
Sweden

, 1 Technical Data
'.
1.1 Specification
• Max. parallel misalignment. D = 7 mm
• 1.2 Dimensions
8 7 6 4 3 2 1 5
• REF. 534115
• Ref. 53411 5 Rev. 5
1. Flexible hose 5. Braiding

2. Steel sleeve 6. Connecting hose, compiete (items 1-5)
3. Sleeve 7. Packing
4. Union nut, G 1 1/2 8. Nipple, 0 43 x 2.5 (welding connection)
Article No. 534115-80 = Item 6

Article No. 534115-81 = Items 6, 7 and 8
1
1818044-02
r;~
AlfaLavaI
Flexible Hose,
• Water
•
•
•
1763906-02
1763906-03
Printed Apr1996
Book No. 1818036-02 V3

•
•
•
•
•
prior notice.
Laval company.
PUblished by: Alfa Laval Separation AB
S -147 80 Tumba
Sweden
.,,
1 Technical Data
1.1 Specification
Media Water
Media temperature Max.80°C
• Media pressure
Hose (inner diameter)
Material
Max. 15 bar
012
• Hose
Connection
Nitrile rubber with hose braid of galvanized
steel wire
Ni. plated brass
Gasket Fibre
Ref. 1763906 Rev. 2
1.2 Dimensions
•
• '--__===============A============---- Ji
Ref. 1763906 Rev. 2
Article No. A (length) mm B

1763906-01 2000 ± 10
1763906-02 3000 ± 10 2 x Gasket
1763906-03 1500 ± 10
1818036-02 1
~~ AlfaLavaI
• Thermometer
•
..
•
ii
~
•
• Product No. 1761626-01
1761626-02
1761626-D3
1761626-04
1761626-05
1764999-80
1764999-81
Printed Oct1995
Book No. 1818045-02 V1
Alfa Laval Marine &iPower .

•
•
AlIa Laval reserve the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
•
•
gratelully appreciated.
Copies 01 this publication can be ordered from your local AlIa
Laval company.
Published by: AlIa Laval Separation AB
S -147 80 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright AlIa Laval Separation AB 1995.
1 Technical Data
1.1 Specification
1.1.1 Thermometer Complete
• Product No: 1761626-01 to 05

Material:
Thennometer well Brass
• Weight
Housing
Temperature range:
Light metal
'" 0.3 kg
1761626-01 to 04 0-120 cC (32-250 cF)

1761626-05 0-200 cC (32-390 cF)
Ref. 1761626 Rev. 5
1.1.2 Thermometer Complete With
• Pipe Flanges
Product No: 17649999-80 to 81
Material:
• Thennometer well
Housing
Pipe and flanges
Brass
Light metal
Carbon steel
Weight:
DN25 '" 3.3 kg
DN40 '" 4.3 kg
Temperature range 0-120 cC (32-250 CP)
Ref. 1764999 Rev. 0
1818045-02 1
1 Technical Data Thermometer
1.2 Dimensions
1.2.1 Thermometer Complete

Product No: 1761626-01 to 05
1'30
•
I
"F
1 ·C
I
I
i
:::;
•
I
0
-,
r 1 'I
I
Gl/2 I
•
I N
...J
I
.
Ref. 1761626 Rev. 5
Length:
m
•
1761626-01 Ll = HO L2 = 63
1761626-02 Ll = 150 L2 = 63
1761626-03 L1 = 200 L2 = 63
1761626-04 L1 = HO L2=40
1761626-05 L1 = 150 L2 = 63
2 1818045-02
Thermometer 1 Technical Data
1.2.2 Thermometer Complete With

Pipe Flanges
Product No: 17649999-80 to 81
~ ~
~
""~ •
•
~ •
• • •
•
,
=t;;
,
I I
• 8~
£:::! T
=p
,
I,
r-
t9
= '= f--
-~
--
--r f-- V I\
i"-,
/-
' I
,
'r~ . 019
B
G
Cl
G
• 1--
120
./-
I
• Ref. 1765059 Rev. 0
Flange connection with socket:

1764999-80 JIS 40A lOK
.i2Q
0125
W2Il
090
1764999-81 JIS 25A lOK 0140 0105
1818045-02 3
Temperature Sensor
•
•
•
•
Product No. 176443!Hl0
1764998-80
1764998-81
Printed Jun 1997
Book No. 1818059-02 V3
Alfa Laval Marine & Power I

...
•
•
•
•
•
prior notice.
gratefully appreciated. .
Laval company.
S -14780 Tumba
Sweden
@CopyrightAIIa Laval Separation AB 1997.
Contents
1.1 Application 1
1.2 Design 1
•
1.4 Installation 2
2 Technical Data 3
• 2.1
2.2
Specification
Dimensions
2.2.1
2.2.2
Without pipe and flanges
With pipe and flanges
3
4
4
5
•
•
1818059-02
."
1.1 Application
The temperature sensor measures temperature
and is for use with Alfa Laval control systems.
•
• 1.2 Design
The sensor has two temperature dependent
elements with terminals for connection to a
control unit. One of the elements is used for
the control loop. 1---
The sensor spring pocket acts as a non-return
Temperature sensor
valve. When the sensor is mounted in the 1. Spring Pocket
pocket, a spring-loaded seat opens so that oil
•
has direct contact with the sensor. The sensor
can be taken out of the pocket without oil
leakage.
•
The temperature sensor is available either on
its own with spring pocket included (product
no. 1764439-80), or as a kit, mounted on a
pipe with flanges (product no.
1764998-80, 81).
Temp. sensor mounted on pipe with flanges
1818059-02 1
,
1 Function Description Temperature Sensor

The two temperature dependent elements each
have three connections and are connected to a
bridge circuit. '-- =2=-~_Z-,~=3=--
-=M=, li
Temperature dependent element
The voltage potential over the resistor is
measured in the measuring circuit of the
control unit. The value is indicated as a
temperature reading or used for the control
•
loop.
1.4 Installation
The temperature sensor should be mount~d in
the pipe so that the tip of the sensor i, in the
centre of the pipe.
•
Sensor mounting
2 1818059-02
,
2 Technical Data
"-',
2.1 Specification""
Insert Pt 100 insert with ceramic socket
accor~ng to DIN 43760 class B
•
Connection Two-wire
Temperature range -100°C to +200 °C (-ISO OF to +390 oF)
Insert material Stainless steel and brass
• Connection head
Connection head material
Cable entry gland
BUZ type according to DIN 43729
"
Aluminium,
PGI6
;!
Enclosure IP65
Maximum test current 5mA
Spring pocket material Brass
Spring material Spring steel
O-ring material Fluorcarbon rubber
Weight:
• Without pipe and flanges

With pipe and flanges
0.5 kg
4.5 kg
•
Ref. 1764439 Rev. 0
1818059-02 3
2 Technical Data Temperature Sensor
.'
2.2 Dimensions
2.2.1 Without pipe and flanges

Product No: 1764439-80
1
-'
01
I
•
'""'
•
•
Ref. 1764439 Rev. 0
•
4 1818059-02
Temperature Sensor 2 Technical Data
2.2.2 With pipe and flanges

FToduct~o: 1764998-80,81
m •
~
: -f--m:
J
• 6
'"
~
I I
• -
1-1
I
.>",
/
- f--- - - - . - ".
).'$(.
\j c
~ ~
!
t
\ox;
\ '
../--
et>19
-
-
~
120 •
~
Ref. 1765058 Rev. 0
Flange connection with socket:
• 1764998-80
1764998-81
ns 25A 10K
nS40A lOK
0125
0140
090
0105
1818059-02 5

Alfa Laval Lopx 710

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Alfa Laval Lopx 710

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

r-

Alfa Laval Tumba AB

5 Alarms and Fault' Finding

'. 8 Separator Manual

-- 9 Component Descriptions (incl. fault finding)

Alfa Laval Marine & Power

Study instruction manuals and observe the

Not following the instructions can result in

• In order to make the information clear only foreseeable conditions have

Alfa Laval Marine & Power

1.1 Warning Signs 1

1.2 Specific Factors 3

1.1 Warning Signs

• Thi stype of safety instruction

This. type of safety instruction

The warning sign used when there is a risk to

This type of safety instruction

The warning sign is also used when there is a

This sign is used to stress important

1.2 Specific Factors

Materials are carefully chosen and parts are

The separation system is designed and

• and must be used for this function only, and

Incorrect operation or maintenance is likely to

These compulsory safety instructions apply:

If safety instructions and installation

Using the separation~ystem,6litsid~

If power cables have been altered,

'Excessive vibration may ,cause

Do not enter the room after an

" After an emergency stop the

IftheA7- IQ CFOPX)alarm is riot

• Operation instand-by mode fora

• Fail~re to follow th~ above

Never discharge a vibrating sep.fratoE

• Running a separator build for50 Hz

Do riot be~in maintenance work .

Do not switch on without all covers.

Excessive noisecanc3use damage to ..

• . ..•... -_::-:,_:-:~,\::, -_c.:"::::

Operatingwaterihoriage may result

Experience has shown thatif

• . sludge cake can accumulate. On

• oil leakage maymakethe floor

Be sure to study all relevant

If safety instructions, installation

• specifications and additional

• LOPX Separation System

, Alfa laval Marine & Power

2.1 System Layout 4

This system description is valid for the

The LOPX separation systems are designed

In the LOPX process, heated lubricating oil is

An LOPX system comprises:

The LOPX separator operates as a clarifier.

The control unit supervises the entire

At normal conditions, characterized by low or

• sludge discharges are initiated by the control

Water is used in the separation process, and

The control uni t adapts the process to changed

2.1 System Layout

The inlet and outlet arrows indicate the

Item Symbol Designation Function

Displacement pump Feeds unprocessed oil to the separator.